WO2014121491A1 - Communication method, communication apparatus and communication device - Google Patents

Communication method, communication apparatus and communication device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2014121491A1
WO2014121491A1 PCT/CN2013/071522 CN2013071522W WO2014121491A1 WO 2014121491 A1 WO2014121491 A1 WO 2014121491A1 CN 2013071522 W CN2013071522 W CN 2013071522W WO 2014121491 A1 WO2014121491 A1 WO 2014121491A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
access
access site
station
access station
site
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2013/071522
Other languages
French (fr)
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
王可
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2013/071522 priority Critical patent/WO2014121491A1/en
Priority to CN201380000119.2A priority patent/CN104160745B/en
Publication of WO2014121491A1 publication Critical patent/WO2014121491A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/12Setup of transport tunnels

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of communications, and more particularly to communication methods, communication devices, and communication devices. Background technique
  • the Internet of Things also known as Machine Type Communication (MTC) or Machine-To-Machine (M2M) refers to the connection of items to the Internet through information sensing devices for intelligent identification and management. This means that a large number of small devices can wirelessly access, for example, cellular networks for machine type communication.
  • MTC Machine Type Communication
  • M2M Machine-To-Machine
  • IoT devices With the development of IoT technology, the number of IoT devices will become enormous. These devices will be closely integrated with wireless communication technologies and obtain data through wireless connections or report data to the control center. Thus, a large amount of random or periodic reported data may be generated, which may come from various specific applications, such as wireless water meters, vending machines, pos machines, and the like. The number of users of these applications is large, but the amount of data transmitted in a single transaction is relatively small (usually application layer data is in the range of tens of bytes to hundreds of bytes), and even less than the IP header overhead.
  • the data transmission of the UE may be implemented based on, for example, an Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer, where the EPS bearer includes an air interface data radio bearer (DRB) and a general packet radio of the core network.
  • EPS Evolved Packet System
  • DRB air interface data radio bearer
  • GTP General packet radio service Tunnelling Protocol
  • M2M devices may be very large, these large numbers of bearers may have a considerable impact on the Radio Access Network (RAN) and core network entities.
  • the common bearer can be set between the base station and the gateway device, or can be set between the relay node and the base station, by means of multiple devices for machine type communication (below, The traffic of other dedicated bearers other than the air interface of the MTC device is mapped to the public bearer to reduce the impact on the core network.
  • the service flow of the MTC device also needs to be switched (or remapped) from the common bearer of the source base station to the common bearer of the destination base station, that is, it needs to be heavy.
  • Configure the common bearer of the MTC device because the reconfiguration of the common bearer requires the base station and the core network entity (MME, Mobility Management) Entity), the service gateway (S-GW, Serving Gateway), and the packet data gateway (P-GW, Packet Data Network Gateway) perform signaling interaction. Due to the large number of MTC devices, the signaling overhead of this process may be very large. .
  • the present invention is intended to provide a communication method to reduce signaling overhead due to handover.
  • the embodiments of the present invention provide a communication method, a communication device, and a communication device, which can reduce signaling overhead caused by switching.
  • a method for machine type communication includes: acquiring, by a first access station in an access station, first handover indication information sent by a second access station, where the first handover indication information is used Instructing the second access station and the first gateway device to have a common bearer for transmitting data of the at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; the first access site to the second access Transmitting, by the ingress, first data from the mobile device, so that the second access station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer; and/or the first access station receives the second access Transmitting the second data sent by the station, and forwarding the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site and the target mobile device by using the common Corresponding data.
  • the first access site determines to be able to communicate with the second access site.
  • the first access site determines that the second access site can communicate with the second access site, including: the first access site determines The second access site is in the same preset area, where each access station in the preset area can communicate with each other
  • the determining, by the first access site, that the second access site is in a preset area includes: the first access site acquiring at least one The first area indication information is determined to be the same as the second access station according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, the cell list, and the at least one first area indication information.
  • the tracking area of the first access site And the tracking area identifier, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication information of the second access station are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the second area indicates information
  • the cell identifier, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the at least one third area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the third area indication information is used to indicate that the first The cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the three-region indication information; or the first access station acquires at least one fourth area indication information, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, and the tracking of the second access station
  • the area identifier and the at least one fourth area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second
  • the first access station acquires the at least one first area indication information, including: the first access station from the mobility management entity MME or The operation management system OAM acquires the at least one first area indication information; the first access station acquires the at least one second area indication information, where: the first access station acquires the at least one second area indication information from the MME or the OAM; Obtaining, by the first access station, the at least one third area indication information, the first access station acquiring the at least one third area indication information from the MME or the OAM; the first access station acquiring the at least one fourth area indication information
  • the method includes: the first access station acquires the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM.
  • the acquiring, by the first access station, the first handover indication information sent by the second access site includes: receiving, by the first access site a first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information; the first access site obtains the first handover from the first handover request message Instructions.
  • the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, including: the first The access station acquires routing information of the second access station; the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
  • the method includes: the first access station receiving the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes the first The routing information of the second access station is obtained by the first access station from the first handover request message.
  • the method before the first access station receives the second data sent by the second access station, the method further includes: An access station sends the routing information of the first access station to the second access station, so that the second access station sends the routing information to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site. Second data.
  • the first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, including: An access station sends a first handover request response message to the second access site, where the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site, so that the second access site is from the first Obtaining routing information of the first access site in a handover request response message.
  • the first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, including: An access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME forwards the routing information of the first access site to the second access site.
  • the method further includes: the first access station sending, to the third access station, second handover indication information, the second The handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, so that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, and the third After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access site passes Transmitting the third data to the first gateway device, and/or the second access station determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site The third access station sends the fourth data, and the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is sent by the first gateway device to the second interface by using the common The data of the incoming site that corresponds to the target mobile device.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the first access station, the second access site to the third access site , The area identifier or the tracking area identifier, so that the third access station determines that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area after determining, according to the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the second access station And transmitting third data from the mobile device to the second access station, where each access station in the preset area is capable of communicating with each other.
  • the method further includes: the first access station sending the route of the second access site to the third access site And the information, so that the third access station sends the third data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
  • the method further includes: obtaining, by the first access station, routing information of the third access site; the first access The station sends the routing information of the third access station to the second access station, so that the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the first access station, the second access site, to indicate that the target mobile device has Switching from the first access station to the third access indication information of the third access station, so that the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, the target mobile device from the first access site Switch to the third access site.
  • the method before the first access station sends the second handover indication information to the third access site, the method further includes: The first access station acquires the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the first access station determines, according to the second measurement report information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third Access site.
  • the first access station acquires the second measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, and includes: the first access site Transmitting, to the target mobile device, at least one second measurement indication information, where the second measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of a second target carrier frequency, where the second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, the second The measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: a third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information; the first access station receives the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, The second measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the second measurement indication information, where the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, the third Measuring a bandwidth for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth being different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, the fourth measurement bandwidth being used for configuring a measurement of the second non-MTC cell
  • the method further includes: the first access station determining that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
  • the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station comprises a base station device and/or a relay device .
  • the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • the second aspect provides a communication method, where the method includes: sending, by the second access station in the access station, first handover indication information to the first access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate the first
  • a common bearer is disposed between the second access station and the first gateway device, where the common bearer is used to transmit data of the at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; and the second access site receives the first access site to send First data from the target mobile device, and forwarding the first data to the first gateway device through the public bearer; and/or the second access station sends second data to the first access station, so that Transmitting the second data to the target mobile device at the first access station, where the second data is corresponding to the target mobile device by the first gateway device sent to the second access site by using the common access device The data.
  • the first access site is in communication with the second access site.
  • the first access site and the second access site are in a same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
  • the sending the first handover indication information to the first access site includes: sending a first handover request to the first access site a message, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information.
  • the second access station sends the second data to the first access station, where: the second access station acquires routing information of the first access station; the second access station is configured according to the first access site Routing information, sending the second data to the first access station.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the second access station, the routing information of the second access site to the first access site, so that the first access site according to the routing information of the second access site The second access station sends the first data.
  • the method further includes: the second access station determines that the target mobile device is switched from the first access station to the third access
  • the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is the first
  • the gateway device transmits data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the common bearer; and/or the second access site receives the third mobile station from the target mobile device Three data, and forwarding the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer.
  • the first access station and the third access station are capable of communicating.
  • the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
  • the second access station determines that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access station to the third access station
  • the second access station receives the third handover indication information sent by the first access station, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the first
  • the third access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
  • the second access station determines that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site, including The second access station receives the third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site, and the third The handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME; the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site. .
  • the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station, where: the second access site obtains The routing information of the third access station; the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
  • the acquiring, by the second access station, the routing information of the third access site, The routing information of the third access station is sent, where the routing information of the third access station is obtained by the MME from the third access station.
  • the method further includes: sending, by the second access station, routing information of the second access station to the third access station, so that the third access station sends the routing information according to the second access site to the third access station The second access station sends the third data.
  • the method before the second access site sends the first handover indication information to the first access site, the method further includes: The second access station acquires the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the second access station determines, according to the first measurement report information, the target mobile device from the second access station Point to switch to the first access site.
  • the second access station obtains the first measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, and includes: the second access site And transmitting, to the target mobile device, at least one first measurement indication information, where the first measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of a first target carrier frequency, where the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, where the first The measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: the first measurement bandwidth indication information, the at least one reference symbol indication information, and the at least one subframe indication information; the second access station receives the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, The first measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the first measurement indication information, where the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the first measurement bandwidth, and the first measurement bandwidth is used for the at least Measurement of an MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, the first The measurement bandwidth is used to configure a measurement of the first non-MTC
  • the method further includes: the second access station determines that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
  • the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station includes a base station device and/or a relay device .
  • the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • a third aspect provides a communication device, where the device includes: a processing unit, configured to acquire first handover indication information sent by a second access station, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate the second access site and a common bearer is disposed between the first gateway device, where the common bearer is used to transmit data of the at least one mobile device, including the target mobile device, and a sending unit, configured to send the second access site from the mobile device a data, so that the second access station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or the receiving unit is configured to receive, by the first access station, the second access station to send The second data, and the sending unit is configured to forward the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is sent by the first gateway device by using the common Data for the second access site corresponding to the target mobile device.
  • a processing unit configured to acquire first handover indication information sent by a second access station, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate the second access site and a common bearer is disposed between the
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine to be able to communicate with the second access site.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to determine that the second access site is in the same preset area, where the preset area is Each access site is capable of communicating with each other.
  • the processing unit is configured to acquire, by the first access station, a cell identifier, the first The cell identifier, the cell list, and the at least one first area indication information of the second access station are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the first area indication information is used to indicate that the cell list belongs to
  • the first area indicates the cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the information; or is used to obtain at least one second area indication information, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, and the tracking area identifier of the second access station
  • the tracking area identifier list and the at least one second area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the second area indication information is used to indicate that the tracking area identifier list belongs to the second
  • the tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the area indication information or used to obtain at least one third area indicator
  • determining according to the cell
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to acquire the at least one first area indication information from the mobility management entity MME or the operation management system OAM; Obtaining the at least one second area indication information from the MME or the OAM; or acquiring the at least one third area indication information from the MME or the OAM; or acquiring the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM.
  • the receiving unit is specifically configured to receive a first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request The message includes the first handover indication information; the processing unit is specifically configured to use the first In the handover request message, the first handover indication information is obtained.
  • the processing unit is further configured to acquire routing information of the second access site, where the sending unit is specifically configured to use the second interface
  • the routing information of the inbound station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive a first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request The message includes routing information of the second access site.
  • the processing unit is configured to obtain routing information of the second access site from the first handover request message.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send routing information of the first access site to the second access site, to facilitate the The second access station sends the second data to the first access station according to the routing information of the first access station.
  • the sending unit is specifically used by the first access station to send a first handover request response message to the second access site, where The first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site, so that the second access site obtains routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
  • the sending unit is specifically used by the first access station to send routing information of the first access site to the MME, so as to facilitate the The MME forwards the routing information of the first access site to the second access site.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send, by the first access station, second handover indication information to the third access site, where The second handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, so that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, and
  • the third access station After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the third access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access The ingress station forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer, and/or the second access station determines that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site, Sending fourth data to the third access station, the third access station forwarding the same to the target mobile device The fourth data, where the fourth data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send, to the third access station, a cell identifier or a tracking area identifier of the second access station.
  • the third access station determines that the third access station and the second access site are in the same preset area according to the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the second access station is in the second connection.
  • the inbound station transmits third data from the mobile device, wherein each access station in the preset area is capable of communicating with each other.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send, by the third access station, routing information of the second access site, to facilitate the The third access station sends third data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
  • the processing unit is further configured to acquire routing information of the third access site; the sending unit is further configured to use the second The access station sends the routing information of the third access station, so that the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send, to the second access station, an indication that the target mobile device has received the first connection
  • the inbound station switches to the third handover indication information of the third access station, so that the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third Access site.
  • the processing unit is further configured to acquire second measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, and is configured to report the second measurement report according to the second measurement Information determining that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send, to the target mobile device, at least one second measurement indication information, where the second measurement indication information includes The second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, and the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol The indication information, the at least one subframe indication information, the receiving unit is further configured to receive the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, The second measurement reporting information is sent by the target mobile device according to the second measurement indication information, where the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for the at least The measurement of an MTC cell, where the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, where the fourth measurement bandwidth is used to configure measurement of the second non-MTC cell on the second target carrier frequency;
  • the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the measurement of the reference symbol of the MTC cell, and the reference symbol of
  • the processing unit is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
  • the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station is a base station device or a relay device.
  • the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • a fourth aspect provides a communication device, where the device includes: a sending unit, configured to send, to the first access station, first handover indication information, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate the second access site and a common bearer is disposed between the first gateway device, where the common bearer is used to transmit data of the at least one mobile device, including the target mobile device, and a receiving unit, configured to receive, by the first access station, the mobile device from the target mobile device And the first data is forwarded to the first gateway device by the common bearer; and/or the sending unit is further configured to send the second data to the first access station, to facilitate the first access The site forwards the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
  • the first access site and the second access site are capable of communicating.
  • the first access site and the second access site are in a same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
  • the sending unit is configured to send a first handover request message to the first access site, where the first handover request message is The first switching indication information is included.
  • the device further includes: a processing unit, configured to acquire routing information of the first access site; The routing information of the first access station sends the second data to the first access station.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by the second access station, the first handover request response message sent by the first access station,
  • the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site.
  • the processing unit is configured to obtain routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive routing information of the first access site that is sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the The routing information of an access station is obtained by the MME from the first access station.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send routing information of the second access site to the first access site, to facilitate the An access station sends the first data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
  • the apparatus further includes: a processing unit, configured to determine that the target mobile device is switched from the first access station to the third access
  • the sending unit is further configured to send the fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is the first gateway And the data sent by the device to the second access station corresponding to the target mobile device; and/or the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by the third access station, a third from the target mobile device Data, and forwarding the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer.
  • the first access station and the third access station can communicate with each other.
  • the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by the first access station, third handover indication information, where the third cut The change indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has been switched from the first access site to the third access site; the processing unit is configured to determine, according to the third handover indication information, the target mobile device from the first The access site switches to the third access site.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate the target The mobile device has been switched from the first access station to the third access station, where the third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME.
  • the processing unit is specifically configured to use the third handover indication according to the third handover indication. Information determining that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site.
  • the processing unit is further configured to acquire routing information of the third access station, where the sending unit is specifically configured to use the third The routing information of the access station is sent to the third access station.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive routing information of the third access site that is sent by the first access station.
  • the receiving unit is further configured to receive routing information of the third access site that is sent by the MME, where the third access The routing information of the site is obtained by the MME from the third access site.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send the routing information of the second access site to the third access site, to facilitate the The third access station sends the third data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
  • the device further includes: a processing unit, configured to acquire first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; The first measurement reporting information determines that the target mobile device switches from the second access station to the first access station.
  • the sending unit is further configured to send, to the target mobile device, at least one first measurement indication information, where the first measurement indication information includes Carrier frequency information of a target carrier frequency, the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, and the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: first measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol The indication information, the at least one subframe indication information, the receiving unit is further configured to receive the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, The first measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the first measurement indication information, where the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the first measurement bandwidth, and the first measurement bandwidth is used for the at least The measurement of an MTC cell, where the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, where the second measurement bandwidth is used to configure measurement of the first non-MTC cell on the first target carrier frequency;
  • the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the measurement of the reference
  • the apparatus further includes: a processing unit, configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
  • the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station is a base station device or a relay device.
  • the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • a communication device comprising: a bus; a processor connected to the bus; a memory connected to the bus; a transceiver connected to the bus; wherein the processor is invoked through the bus a program stored in the memory, configured to obtain the first handover indication information sent by the second access station, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site and the first gateway device have a common bearer
  • the common bearer is configured to transmit data of the at least one mobile device including the target mobile device, configured to control the transceiver to send the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, to facilitate the second connection
  • the inbound station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer; and/or controls the transceiver to receive the second data sent by the second access station, and controls the transceiver to the target mobile device Forwarding the second data, where the second data is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common The data corresponding to the mobile device.
  • the processor is further configured to determine to be able to communicate with the second access site.
  • the processor is specifically configured to determine that the second access site is in the same preset area, where the preset area is Each access site is capable of communicating with each other.
  • the processor is configured to obtain the at least one first area indication information, and determine, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, the cell list, and the at least one first area indication information.
  • the second access site is in the same preset area, where the first area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier in the cell list that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information; or is used to obtain at least one
  • the second area indication information is determined according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication information, and the second access station is determined In the same preset area, where the second area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information in the tracking area identification list, or used to acquire at least one third area.
  • the indication information according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the The third area indication information is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the third area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information; Or for obtaining the at least one fourth area indication information, determining, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, and the at least one fourth area indication information, determining the second connection
  • the inbound site is in the same preset area, and the fourth area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
  • the processor is specifically configured to acquire the at least one first area indication information from the mobility management entity MME or the operation management system OAM; Acquiring the at least one second area indication information from the MME or the OAM; and acquiring the at least one third area indication information from the MME or the OAM; and acquiring the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where The first handover request message includes the first handover indication information, and is configured to obtain the first handover indication information from the first handover request message.
  • the processor is further configured to obtain routing information of the second access site, and configured to control the transceiver according to the second connection
  • the routing information of the inbound station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the first handover request sent by the second access station.
  • the first handover request message includes the routing information of the second access station, and is configured to obtain routing information of the second access site from the first handover request message.
  • the processor is further configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, The second access station sends the second data to the first access station according to the routing information of the first access station.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send a first handover request response message to the second access site, where The first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site, so that the second access site obtains routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
  • the processor is further configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME The second access station forwards routing information of the first access site.
  • the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send second handover indication information to the third access station, where the second handover The indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, so that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, and the third access
  • the ingress station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access site passes the The public bearer forwards the third data to the first gateway device, and/or the second access station determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site to the third
  • the access station sends the fourth data, and the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is sent by the first gateway device to the second access by using the common The data of the site that corresponds to the target mobile device.
  • the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the cell identifier of the second access site to the third access station. Or tracking the area identifier, so that the third access station determines that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area according to the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the second access station, The second access station sends third data from the mobile device, wherein each access station in the preset area is capable of communicating with each other.
  • the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the routing information of the second access site to the third access site.
  • the third access station sends the third data from the mobile device to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
  • the processor is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access site, and configured to control the transceiver to the second The access station sends the routing information of the third access station, so that the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
  • the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the second access station, to indicate that the target mobile device has been The first access station switches to the third handover indication information of the third access station, so that the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site. To the third access site.
  • the processor is further configured to acquire second measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, Information determining that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send at least one second measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the second measurement
  • the indication information includes carrier frequency information of the second target carrier frequency, the second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, and the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: a third measurement bandwidth indication information, At least one reference symbol indication information, at least one subframe indication information, configured to control the transceiver to receive second measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, where the second measurement reporting information is that the target mobile device is configured according to the second measurement indication
  • the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, and the third measurement bandwidth is compared with the fourth measurement bandwidth.
  • the fourth measurement bandwidth is used to configure a second non-MTC on the second target carrier frequency
  • the measurement of the area is used to indicate the configuration of the reference symbol of the corresponding MTC cell, where the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the measurement of the MTC cell; the subframe indication information is used to indicate the corresponding MTC cell.
  • the subframe used.
  • the processor is further operative to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
  • the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station comprises a base station device and/or a relay device .
  • the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • a communication device comprising: a bus; a processor connected to the bus; a memory connected to the bus; a transceiver connected to the bus; wherein the processor is invoked through the bus a program stored in the memory, configured to control the transceiver to send first handover indication information to the first access station, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate between the second access site and the first gateway device Generating a common bearer for transmitting data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; and controlling the transceiver to receive the first data sent by the first access site from the target mobile device, And controlling the transceiver to forward the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or for controlling the transceiver to send second data to the first access station, so as to facilitate the first access site. Forwarding the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is sent by the first gateway device to the second interface by using the common With the target mobile station device corresponding to the data.
  • the first access site and the second access site are capable of communicating.
  • the first access site and the second access site are in a same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send a first handover request message to the first access site, where the A handover request message includes the first handover indication information.
  • the processor is further configured to obtain routing information of the first access site, and configured to control the transceiver according to the first connection The routing information of the inbound station sends the second data to the first access station.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the first handover request response message sent by the first access station, where The first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site; And the routing information of the first access site is obtained from the first handover request response message.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the first access site that is sent by the mobility management entity MME, The routing information of the first access site is obtained by the MME from the first access site.
  • the processor is further configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the second access site to the first access site, The first access station sends the first data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
  • the processor is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is to be switched from the first access site to the third access site; Controlling the transceiver to send fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is that the first gateway device passes the public Passing data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access station; and/or for controlling the transceiver to receive third data from the target mobile device sent by the third access station, and The public bearer forwards the third data to the first gateway device.
  • the first access station and the third access station are capable of communicating.
  • the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
  • the processor is further configured to control, by the transceiver, the third handover indication information that is sent by the first access station, where The third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has been handed over from the first access site to the third access site, and configured to determine, according to the third handover indication information, the target mobile device from the first access site Switch to the third access site.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control, by the transceiver, the third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used by Instructing the target mobile device to switch from the first access station to the third access station, the third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME; and according to the third handover indication Information determining that the target mobile device is switched from the first access site to The third access site.
  • the processor is further configured to acquire routing information of the third access station, and to control the transceiver according to the third The routing information of the access station is sent to the third access station.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the route of the third access site sent by the first access station. information.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the third access site that is sent by the MME, where The routing information of the third access station is obtained by the MME from the third access station.
  • the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the routing information of the second access site to the third access site.
  • the third access station sends the third data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
  • the processor is further configured to acquire, by using the first measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, Information determining that the target mobile device is handed over from the second access site to the first access site.
  • the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send the at least one first measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the first measurement
  • the indication information includes carrier frequency information of the first target carrier frequency, and the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell
  • the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: first measurement bandwidth indication information, At least one reference symbol indication information, at least one subframe indication information, configured to control the transceiver to receive the first measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, where the first measurement reporting information is that the target mobile device is configured according to the first measurement indication
  • the first measurement bandwidth is used to indicate the first measurement bandwidth, where the first measurement bandwidth is used for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, and the first measurement bandwidth is compared with the second measurement bandwidth.
  • the second measurement bandwidth is used to configure the measurement of the first non-MTC cell on the first target carrier frequency.
  • the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of the corresponding MTC cell, where the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for measurement of the MTC cell; the subframe indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding MTC cell is used. Subframe.
  • the processor is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
  • the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station includes a base station device and/or a relay device .
  • the routing information includes a transmission network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • the communication method, the communication device, and the communication device of the embodiment of the present invention continue to transmit the target mobile device through a source station provided with a common bearer for transmitting data of the target mobile device after the target mobile device switches from the source site to the destination site.
  • the data does not need to change the common bearer of the data of the transmission target mobile device, and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a common bearer according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 5 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present invention. detailed description
  • the communication method 100 can be applied to various types of enabling A system for machine type communication (or, for example, a device capable of machine type communication), such as: Global System of Mobile Communication (GSM), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE), Mechanical Type Communications (MTC), etc. Wait.
  • GSM Global System of Mobile Communication
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • CDMA Code Division Multiple Access
  • WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
  • GPRS General Packet Radio Service
  • LTE Long Term Evolution
  • MTC Mechanical Type Communications
  • FIG. 1 shows a schematic flow chart of a communication method 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention from the perspective of a destination access station (first access node). As shown in FIG. 1, the method 100 includes:
  • the first access station in the access site acquires the first handover indication information sent by the second access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site is located between the second access site and the first gateway device.
  • a public bearer for transmitting data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
  • the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station, so that the second access station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and / or
  • the first access station receives the second data sent by the second access station, and forwards the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is that the first gateway device passes the public access Data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent to the second access site.
  • the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device
  • the access station is a base station device or a relay device.
  • the mobile device may be, for example, a user equipment (UE, User Equipment), or a mobile terminal (Mobile Terminal), a mobile user equipment, or the like, and may be connected to the radio access network ( For example, RAN, Radio Access Network) communicates with one or more core networks, which may be mobile terminals, such as mobile phones (or "cellular" phones) and computers with mobile terminals, for example, may be portable, Pocket, handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with a wireless access network.
  • the user equipment is capable of performing machine type communication.
  • the mobile device may be, for example, a mobile relay device, and the mobile relay device may enumerate a mobile access point (AP, Access Point).
  • the access station may be a base station (BTS, Base Transceiver Station) in GSM or CDMA, or a base station (NodeB) in WCDMA, or an evolved base station (eNB or e-NodeB, evolved Node B) in LTE.
  • the access station may be a micro base station (Micro), a pico base station (Pico), or a home base station, or a femto base station (femto) or an access point (AP, Access Point), the present invention is not limited.
  • the access station can control the mobile device at the same time.
  • the operations of accessing, switching, or reselecting between cells are performed, and the process can be the same as the prior art.
  • an access site currently serving a UE that is, a source site (second access point), is hereinafter referred to as an access site for ease of understanding and differentiation.
  • A can transmit the data of the UE through a common bearer.
  • the data refers to data of the user plane, and does not include signaling of the control plane.
  • Figure 2 shows the structure of a common bearer.
  • the common bearer may include a relay common bearer and a base station common bearer.
  • the base station common bearer is set between the base station device and the gateway device, and the relay common bearer is set in the middle. Between the access site and the base station. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the second access point is a base station device, the common bearer refers to a base station common bearer.
  • the common bearer includes a relay common bearer and a common bearer of the base station.
  • the method before the first access site sends the second handover indication information to the third access site, the method further includes:
  • the first access station acquires the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the first access station determines, according to the second measurement report information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third Access site.
  • the UE moves in the system, there is a case where the communication quality of the current serving cell (or the access station A) is reduced or cannot continue to serve the UE, so that the handover procedure, the mobility of the UE needs to be performed (or The handover can be implemented by the measurement and reporting of the UE, that is, the access station A can control the handover of the UE according to the measurement report message from the UE.
  • the handover can be implemented by the measurement and reporting of the UE, that is, the access station A can control the handover of the UE according to the measurement report message from the UE.
  • the above-described processes and methods may be the same as those in the prior art, and the description thereof will be omitted herein to avoid redundancy.
  • the MTC cell and the legacy cell may have the same carrier frequency (which may also be referred to as a center frequency point), but there is a big difference in bandwidth.
  • the bandwidth of the traditional cell is 20 MHz.
  • the bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz.
  • RRM measurement is implemented by the base station configuring the parameters used by the user equipment for measurement, ie, "Measurement Object", so that the user equipment measures the system cell according to the measurement object.
  • a carrier frequency is only configured with a unique "measurement object", and the "measurement object” contains a parameter for indicating the bandwidth used for measurement, that is, "measurement bandwidth”.
  • the user equipment measures each cell on the carrier frequency according to the measurement bandwidth.
  • the measurement bandwidth can only be set to a narrow bandwidth, but if the user equipment also needs to measure other cells (traditional cells) on the carrier frequency, The measurement bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth affects the measurement effect of the conventional cell. Also, if a measurement bandwidth of a wide bandwidth is used in order to ensure a measurement effect on a legacy cell, the measurement effect of the MTC cell is affected.
  • the access station A may configure different measurement objects for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell, specifically, It is a measurement bandwidth, and the configuration method and value for measuring the measurement bandwidth (second measurement bandwidth) of the non-MTC cell may be similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
  • the access station A may set a measurement bandwidth (first measurement bandwidth) for measuring the MTC cell according to the bandwidth of the MTC cell.
  • the access site A may The first measurement bandwidth is set to be 1.4 MHz, that is, the bandwidth of the MTC cell is the same, or the access station A may set the value of the first measurement bandwidth to be smaller than the bandwidth of the MTC cell, which is not limited in the present invention. .
  • the UE After acquiring the measurement bandwidth (the first measurement bandwidth) of each MTC cell, the UE may perform measurement on each MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method for the UE to measure the MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth The process is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
  • the measurement effect on both sides can be improved.
  • the MTC cell may be configured according to part of resources (specifically, time-frequency resources) of the traditional cell, that is, the MTC cell is narrow bandwidth, but is used for measurement of the MTC cell.
  • the symbols still use the reference symbols of the traditional cell (wide bandwidth cell) (wide bandwidth reference symbols), and therefore may affect the measurement effect.
  • the access station A may notify the UE that the reference symbol is dedicated to measuring the MTC cell.
  • “dedicated to measure the MTC cell” refers to a reference symbol used for measuring the MTC cell.
  • the reference symbols of the traditional cell are not still used, but are small with the MTC.
  • the area corresponds, specifically, to the bandwidth of the MTC cell.
  • the UE may perform measurement on each of the MTC cells according to the reference symbols, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and process for the UE to measure the MTC cells according to the reference symbols are similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
  • the measurement of the MTC cell can be improved by the access station A instructing the user equipment to measure the MTC cell according to the reference symbol corresponding to the MTC cell according to the MTC cell.
  • the user equipment in order to measure the MTC cell, the user equipment needs to continuously monitor and measure each subframe, but the MTC cell may exist only in a part of the subframe, thereby causing the measurement result not to be accurate.
  • the access station A can determine the subframe to which the MTC cell belongs, and notify the UE, so that the UE can only monitor and measure the subframe including the MTC cell, thereby improving the measurement. accuracy.
  • the access station A may initiate a handover procedure according to the measurement report reported by the UE, and determine that the UE needs to be handed over to the destination site (the first access point, which is referred to as the access site B for ease of understanding and differentiation).
  • the handover procedure is similar to the prior art in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the description thereof is omitted.
  • the access site B when the UE switches to the access site B, the access site B needs to map the service flow of the UE to the public bearer of the access site B, in particular, when the access site B does not In the case of a public bearer, the service of the UE needs a separate EPS bearer. In addition, the access site A needs to release the public bearer mapped with the service flow of the UE. As a result, system resources are wasted and signaling overhead is also large.
  • the access station A and the access station B can communicate, specifically, data communication is possible, the access station A can send an indication to the access station B.
  • the access site A is provided with the information of the common bearer (the first handover indication information), so that the access site B can receive the first handover indication information, and the access site A is determined according to the first handover indication information.
  • a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE.
  • the acquiring, by the first access station, the first handover indication information sent by the second access site includes:
  • the first access station obtains the first handover indication information from the first handover request message.
  • the access station A may carry the first handover indication information in the handover request message (the first handover request message), and send the information to the access site B, thereby accessing the site B.
  • the first handover indication information may be obtained from the handover request message.
  • the access station B can receive the
  • the data sent by the UE (uplink data) is forwarded to the access station A, so that the access station A can send the uplink data to the gateway device (the first gateway device) through the common bearer, and then transmit the data to the gateway device (the first gateway device). server.
  • the access station A can receive the data (downlink data) from the server forwarded by the gateway device (the first gateway device) through the common bearer, and send the downlink data.
  • the access station B is given, so that the access station B can send the downlink data to the UE.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first access site determines that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
  • the access station A can also confirm whether the UE can perform machine type communication. And, when it is determined that the UE can perform machine type communication, the data of the UE (specifically, downlink data) is transmitted through the common bearer.
  • the access station B can also confirm whether the UE can perform machine type communication, and when determining that the UE can perform machine type communication, transmit data of the UE (specifically, uplink data) through a common bearer,
  • the method of communication can be exemplified by the following methods:
  • the UE may inform the access point (access station A and access station B) whether the UE can perform machine type communication when entering the network or switching.
  • the upper-layer network side device of the access point (access site A and the access site B), for example, the Mobility Management Entity (MME), for example, the subscription carrier of the UE, whether the UE is known Machine type communication is enabled so that the access point can learn from the MME whether the UE is capable of machine type communication.
  • MME Mobility Management Entity
  • the access site B can learn from the access site A. Whether the UE is capable of machine type communication.
  • the method further includes: the first access site determining to be able to communicate with the second access site.
  • the access station B can also confirm Whether it is possible to communicate with the access site A, specifically, the communication at the data level, likewise, before the first handover indication is sent, the access site A can also confirm whether it can communicate with the access site B. Further, as a method of determining whether or not data communication is possible, the following methods can be cited:
  • the first access station determines that the second access station can communicate with the second access station, where: the first access station determines that the second access site is in the same preset area, where the preset area is Each access site is capable of communicating with each other.
  • a part of the access stations in the communication system can transmit data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource (for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area)
  • a wireless communication resource for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area)
  • Each access point in the area may be allocated a communication resource for transmitting data between each other), for example, an MME or an Operation Management System (OAM), etc.
  • OAM Operation Management System
  • an access station capable of communicating in the system may also be used.
  • the access site is identified and the virtual area formed by the access point having the identifier is used as the preset area.
  • the determining, by the first access station, that the second access site is in the preset area the first access station acquiring the at least one first area indication information, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, The cell identifier, the cell list, and the at least one first area indication information of the second access station are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the first area indication information is used to indicate the cell list a preset area corresponding to the first area indication information Cell identity; or
  • the first access station obtains, by the first access station, at least one second area indication information, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication
  • the information is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the second area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information in the tracking area identification list. ; or
  • the first access station acquires at least one third area indication information, and determines, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the at least one third area indication information,
  • the access site is in the same preset area, where the third area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information; or
  • the first access station acquires at least one fourth area indication information, and determines, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, and the at least one fourth area indication information.
  • the second access site is in the same preset area, where the fourth area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
  • the first access station acquires the at least one first area indication information, where: the first access station acquires the at least one first area indication information from the mobility management entity MME or the operation management system OAM;
  • the first access site acquires at least one second area indication information, including:
  • the first access station acquires the at least one second area indication information from the MME or the OAM; the first access station acquires the at least one third area indication information, including:
  • the first access station acquires the at least one third area indication information from the MME or the OAM; the first access station acquires the at least one fourth area indication information, including:
  • the first access station acquires the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM.
  • the MME or the OAM may obtain, for example, information of an access station capable of communication from a telecommunication carrier, and send information to the access sites indicating an access site capable of data communication. .
  • the MME or the OAM can map the access sites located in the same preset area to the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, and notify the eNB or the OAM.
  • Each access point may notify a location of the access point that is located in a certain preset area in the cell identifier list or the tracking area list (first area indication information or second area indication information), thereby Including the access site A and the connection
  • the access point controlled by the MME or the OAM, including the site B can determine the peer access site capable of data communication from the cell identity list or the tracking area list according to the indication of the MME or the OAM.
  • the MME or the OAM can map the access site (specifically, the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the access site) in the same preset area to an entry and send it to the preset area.
  • Each access station such that the access station can determine data communication with an access site that is in the same entry as the cell identity or tracking area identity.
  • an access station obtains information indicating a preset area from an MME or an OAM, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • information of each preset area may be stored in advance in each connection. Entering the inside of the site, each access station obtains information indicating the preset area from the inside.
  • the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, including:
  • the first access station acquires routing information of the second access site
  • the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
  • each access station may transmit data according to routing information (for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number), and therefore, the access site A needs to obtain an access site. B routing information. Similarly, access station B needs to obtain routing information of access station A.
  • routing information for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number
  • access station B needs to obtain routing information of access station A.
  • the method and the process for transmitting data according to the transmission network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
  • the first access station receives the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes routing information of the second access site;
  • the first access station obtains routing information of the second access station from the first handover request message.
  • the access station A may carry its routing information in the handover request message (the first handover request message), and send it to the access site B, so that the access site B can In the handover request message, the routing information of the access site A is obtained.
  • each access station may transmit data according to routing information (for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number), and therefore, the access site B needs to be obtained. Take the routing information of access site B.
  • routing information for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number
  • the method before the first access station receives the second data sent by the second access station, the method further includes:
  • the first access station sends the routing information of the first access station to the second access station, so that the second access station sends the routing information to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site. Send the second data.
  • the access station B can directly send the routing information to the access station A by using, for example, a signaling message, so that the access station A can receive the routing information, and according to the route, The information is sent to the access site B.
  • the first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, including:
  • the first access station sends a first handover request response message to the second access site, where the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site, so that the second access site is Obtaining routing information of the first access site in the first handover request response message.
  • the access station B may send a handover request response message to the access site A (first The handover request response message), therefore, the access station B can carry its routing information in the handover request response message (first handover request response message) and send it to the access site A, so that the access site A can switch from the handover site A.
  • the routing information of the access station A is obtained.
  • the first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, including:
  • the first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME forwards the routing information of the first access site to the second access site.
  • the access station B may send its routing information to the MME of the access station B by using, for example, a signaling message, and the MME of the access station A accesses the routing information of the station B. Forwarded to the access site A, the access site A can receive the routing information and send data to the access site B according to the routing information.
  • the access station A may carry its routing information to, for example, a path switching request message, and send it to the MME of the access station A, so that the MME of the access station B may also access the access station.
  • the routing information of A is carried, for example, in a path conversion request message, and is sent to the connection. Enter site B.
  • the MME of the access site B may be the same as or different from the MME of the access site A, and in the case that the MME of the access site B and the MME of the access site A may be different, the MMEs Can communicate with each other.
  • the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, including:
  • the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the first trigger message.
  • the access station B may determine that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer (or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access site B). After that, the uplink data of the UE is forwarded to the access station A.
  • the first trigger message includes: a first handover complete message sent by the second base station, a first path switch request response message sent by the mobility management entity MME, or a first end marker sent by the second access station. Message.
  • the access station B may be determined according to the handover complete message sent by the access site A, the path conversion request response message sent by the MME, or the terminator end marker message sent by the access station B.
  • the access station A can transmit the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer, or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access station B.
  • the access station A may forward the UE to the access station B after determining that the access station B can send downlink data to the UE (or the UE has switched to the access station B). Downstream data.
  • the access station A may determine that the access station B can send downlink data to the UE according to the path switching request message sent by the MME, or the UE has switched to the access station B.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first access station sends a second handover indication information to the third access site, where the second handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, so as to facilitate the target.
  • the mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, and
  • the third access station After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the third access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, the second The access station forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer, and/or
  • the second access station After determining that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the second access station sends fourth data to the third access site, where the third access site goes to the target The mobile device forwards the fourth data, where the fourth data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first access station acquires the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the first access station determines, according to the second measurement report information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third Access site.
  • the handover can be implemented by the measurement and reporting of the UE, that is, the access station B can control the handover of the UE according to the measurement report message from the UE.
  • the above-described processes and methods may be the same as those in the prior art, and the description thereof will be omitted in order to avoid redundancy.
  • the first access station acquires the second measurement information sent by the target mobile device, including:
  • the first access station sends at least one second measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the second measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the second target carrier frequency, and the second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication
  • the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: a third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
  • the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, and the fourth measurement bandwidth is different.
  • the subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
  • an MTC cell and a legacy cell may have the same carrier frequency (which may also be referred to as a center frequency point), but there is a big difference in bandwidth, for example, the bandwidth of a traditional cell. It is 20 MHz, and the bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz.
  • RRM measurement is implemented by the base station configuring a parameter used for measurement by the user equipment, that is, a "Measurement Object", so that the user equipment is based on the measurement object to the system. Measurement of the cell.
  • a carrier frequency is only configured with a unique "measurement object", and the "measurement object” contains a parameter for indicating the bandwidth used by the measurement, that is, "measurement bandwidth”.
  • the user equipment measures each cell on the carrier frequency according to the measurement bandwidth.
  • the measurement bandwidth can only be set to a narrow bandwidth, but if the user equipment also needs to measure other cells (traditional cells) on the carrier frequency, The measurement bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth affects the measurement effect of the conventional cell.
  • a measurement bandwidth of a wide bandwidth is used in order to ensure the measurement effect on a conventional cell, the measurement effect of the MTC cell is affected.
  • the access station B may configure different measurement objects for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell, specifically, It is a measurement bandwidth, and the configuration method and value for measuring the measurement bandwidth (second measurement bandwidth) of the non-MTC cell may be similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
  • the access station B can set the measurement bandwidth (the first measurement bandwidth) for measuring the MTC cell according to the bandwidth of the MTC cell.
  • the access station B can The first measurement bandwidth is set to be 1.4 MHz, that is, the bandwidth of the MTC cell is the same, or the access station B may set the value of the first measurement bandwidth to be smaller than the bandwidth of the MTC cell, which is not specifically limited in the present invention. .
  • the UE After acquiring the measurement bandwidth (the first measurement bandwidth) of each MTC cell, the UE may perform measurement on each MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method for the UE to measure the MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth The process is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
  • the measurement effect on both sides can be improved.
  • the MTC cell may be configured according to part of resources (specifically, time-frequency resources) of the traditional cell, that is, the MTC cell is narrow bandwidth, but is used for measurement of the MTC cell.
  • the symbol still uses the reference character of the traditional cell (wide bandwidth cell)
  • the number wide bandwidth reference symbol, therefore, may affect the measurement.
  • the access station B may notify the UE to use the reference symbol for measuring the MTC cell.
  • “dedicated to measure the MTC cell” refers to a reference symbol used for measuring the MTC cell.
  • the reference symbols of the legacy cell are not still used, but correspond to the MTC cell, specifically, the bandwidth of the MTC cell.
  • the UE may perform measurement on each of the MTC cells according to the reference symbols, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and process for the UE to measure the MTC cells according to the reference symbols are similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
  • the access station B instructs the user equipment to measure the MTC cell according to the reference symbol corresponding to the MTC cell according to the MTC cell, so that the measurement effect on the MTC cell can be improved.
  • the user equipment in order to measure the MTC cell, the user equipment needs to continuously monitor and measure each subframe, but the MTC cell may exist only in a part of the subframe, thereby causing the measurement result not to be accurate.
  • the access station B can determine the subframe to which the MTC cell belongs, and notify the UE, so that the UE can only monitor and measure the subframe including the MTC cell, thereby improving the measurement. accuracy.
  • the access station B may initiate a handover procedure after the UE needs to switch to the access site C (the third access point) according to the measurement report information of the UE, so that the UE switches from the access site B to the access site. C.
  • the handover procedure is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
  • the access site C needs to map the service flow of the UE to the public bearer of the access site C, in particular, when the access site C does not In the case of a public bearer, the UE's service requires a separate EPS bearer. As a result, system resources are wasted and signaling overhead is also large.
  • the access site C when the access site A and the access site C can communicate, specifically, data communication is possible, the access site C can obtain the indication that the access site A is provided.
  • the information about the common bearer of the data of the UE (the second handover indication information) is transmitted, so that the access site C can determine, according to the second handover indication information, that the access site A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE. .
  • the access station B can learn that the access node A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE, and therefore, access The station B may provide information (second handover indication information) indicating that the access station A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE.
  • the access station A obtains information indicating that the UE is handed over to the access site C (the third handover indication information), so that the access site A can determine, according to the third handover indication information, that the UE needs to receive the public bearer.
  • the data of the UE is sent to the access station C for transmission to the UE through the access station C.
  • the access station B since the access station B can learn that the UE switches to the access site C, the access station B can send information indicating that the UE switches to the access site C to the access station A. (third switching indication information).
  • the first access station sends the second handover indication information to the third access site, including:
  • the second handover request message includes the second handover indication information, so that the third access station switches from the second In the request message, the second handover indication information is obtained.
  • the access station B may carry the second handover indication information in the handover request message (the second handover request message), and send the information to the access site C, thereby accessing the site C.
  • the second handover indication information may be obtained from the handover request message.
  • the access station C when uplinking (the UE sends data to the server), the access station C can receive the data (uplink data) sent by the UE, and forward the uplink data to the access station A, so that the access station A can pass the
  • the public bearer sends the uplink data to the gateway device (the first gateway device), and then transmits the data to the server.
  • the access station A can send the downlink data to the access station C, and the access station C can send the downlink data to the UE.
  • the method further includes:
  • the third access station sends third data from the mobile device, where each access in the preset area is Sites are able to communicate with each other.
  • the access site C can also confirm whether it is possible to communicate with the access site A, specifically, at the data level. Further, as a method of determining whether or not data communication is possible, the following methods can be cited:
  • a part of the access stations in the communication system can transmit data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource (for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area)
  • Each access point in the area allocates communication resources for transmitting data between each other.
  • a device capable of managing an access site such as an MME or an OAM, may acquire information of an access station capable of communication, for example, from a telecommunication carrier. And transmitting, to each access station, information indicating an access station capable of data communication, so that each access point can learn the peer access station capable of data communication.
  • an access station capable of communicating in the system may also be used.
  • the access site is identified and the virtual area formed by the access point having the identifier is used as the preset area.
  • the MME or the OAM can map the access sites located in the same preset area to the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, and notify the eNB or the OAM.
  • Each access point may notify a location of all access points of the access point that are located in a certain preset area in the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, thereby including the access station A and the access station C.
  • the access point controlled by the MME or the OAM may determine, from the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, the peer access station capable of data communication according to the indication of the MME or the OAM.
  • the MME or the OAM can map the access site (specifically, the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the access site) in the same preset area to an entry and send it to the preset area.
  • Each access station such that the access station can determine data communication with an access site that is in the same entry as the cell identity or tracking area identity.
  • the method further includes:
  • the first access station acquires routing information of the third access station
  • Sending, by the first access station, routing information of the third access site to the second access site, to The second access station is configured to send the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
  • data may be transmitted between the access sites according to the routing information (for example, the transport network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number). Therefore, the access site A needs to obtain the routing information of the access site C. .
  • the method and the process for transmitting data according to the transmission network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
  • the access site C can send its routing information to the access site B, thereby The access station B can forward the routing information of the access station C to the access station A.
  • the access station C may carry its routing information in the path conversion request message, and send it to the MME of the access station C, so that the routing information of the access station C can be sent through the MME of the access station A.
  • the MME of the access site C may be the same as the MME of the access site A, or may be different, and in the case that the MME of the access site C and the MME of the access site A may be different, the MMEs Can communicate with each other.
  • each access station may transmit data according to routing information (for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number), and therefore, the access site C needs to acquire the access site A. Routing information.
  • routing information for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number
  • the access station B can save the routing information of the access station A when the access station A performs data communication, and send the routing information of the access station A to the access station C by, for example, a handover request message.
  • the access station C may determine that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE by using the common bearer (or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access site C). After that, the uplink data of the UE is forwarded to the access station A.
  • the MME may send indication information indicating that the UE switches from the access station B to the access station C to the access station A, so that the access station A can learn that the UE has switched to the access station C, and at this time, the access station A
  • An end marker message may be sent to the access station B, for example, to indicate that the access station A no longer transmits the downlink data of the UE to the access station B, so that the access station B can send, for example, an end marker message or handover to the access station C.
  • the message is completed, so that the access station C can receive the handover complete message sent by the access station B, the path conversion request response message sent by the MME, or
  • the end marker message sent by the station B determines that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer, or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access station B.
  • the access station A may forward the UE to the access station B after determining that the access station C can send downlink data to the UE (or the UE has switched to the access station C). Downstream data.
  • the access station A may determine, according to the path switching request message sent by the MME, that the access station C can send downlink data to the UE, or that the UE has switched to the access site. C.
  • the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention after the target mobile device is switched from the source station to the destination station, continues to transmit the data of the target mobile device through the source station provided with the common bearer for transmitting the data of the target mobile device, without changing the transmission.
  • the common bearer of the data of the target mobile device and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
  • FIG. 3 shows a schematic flow chart of a communication method 200 according to an embodiment of the present invention from the perspective of a source access station (second access node). As shown in FIG. 3, the method 200 includes:
  • the second access station in the access station sends the first handover indication information to the first access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site is located between the second access site and the first gateway device.
  • a public bearer for transmitting data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
  • the second access station receives the first data sent by the first access station from the target mobile device, and forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or
  • the second access station sends the second data to the first access station, so that the first access station forwards the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is the first
  • the gateway device sends data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the common bearer.
  • the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device
  • the access station comprises a base station device and/or a relay device.
  • the mobile device may be, for example, a user equipment (UE, UE, UE, UE, UE
  • User Equipment which may also be called a mobile terminal, a mobile user equipment, etc., may communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (eg, RAN, Radio Access Network), and the user equipment may be A mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone) and a computer with a mobile terminal, for example, can be portable, pocket, handheld, computer Built-in or in-vehicle mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with the wireless access network.
  • the user equipment is capable of performing machine type communication.
  • the mobile device may be, for example, a mobile relay device, and the mobile relay device may enumerate a mobile access point (AP, Access Point).
  • AP mobile access point
  • the access site can be a base station in GSM or CDMA (BTS, Base Transceiver)
  • GSM Global System for Mobile communications
  • CDMA Base Transceiver
  • the access station which may also be a base station (NodeB) in WCDMA, or an evolved base station (eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in LTE.
  • the access station may be a micro base station (Micro), a pico base station (Pico), or a home base station, or a femto base station (femto) or an access point (AP, Access). Point ), the invention is not limited.
  • the operation of the access site will be described using the eNB as an example.
  • the access station may control the mobile device to perform operations such as accessing, switching, or reselecting between multiple cells, and the process may be the same as the prior art.
  • an access site currently serving a UE that is, a source site (second access point), is hereinafter referred to as an access site for ease of understanding and differentiation.
  • A can transmit the data of the UE through a common bearer.
  • the data refers to data of the user plane, and does not include signaling of the control plane.
  • Figure 2 shows the structure of a common bearer.
  • the common bearer may include a relay common bearer and a base station common bearer.
  • the base station common bearer is set between the base station device and the gateway device, and the relay common bearer is set in the middle. Between the access site and the base station. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the second access point is a base station device, the common bearer refers to a base station common bearer.
  • the common bearer includes a relay common bearer and a common bearer of the base station.
  • the method before the second access site sends the first handover indication information to the first access site, the method further includes:
  • the second access station acquires the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the second access station determines, according to the first measurement report information, that the target mobile device switches from the second access site to the first Access site.
  • the UE moves in the system, there is a case where the communication quality of the current serving cell (or the access station A) is reduced or cannot continue to serve the UE, so that the handover procedure, the mobility of the UE needs to be performed (or The handover can be implemented by the measurement and reporting of the UE, that is, the access station A can control the handover of the UE according to the measurement report message from the UE.
  • the foregoing processes and methods may be the same as the prior art, where Avoiding the description and omitting the description.
  • the second access station acquires the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, including:
  • the second access station sends at least one first measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the first measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the first target carrier frequency, and the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication
  • the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: first measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
  • the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a first measurement bandwidth, where the first measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, and the second measurement bandwidth is different.
  • the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of a corresponding MTC cell, where a reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the MTC cell Measurement;
  • the subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
  • an MTC cell and a legacy cell may have the same carrier frequency (which may also be referred to as a center frequency point), but there is a big difference in bandwidth, for example, the bandwidth of a traditional cell. It is 20 MHz, and the bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz.
  • RRM measurement is implemented by the base station configuring a parameter used for measurement by the user equipment, that is, a "Measurement Object", so that the user equipment is based on the measurement object to the system. Measurement of the cell.
  • a carrier frequency is only configured with a unique "measurement object", and the "measurement object” contains a parameter for indicating the bandwidth used by the measurement, that is, "measurement bandwidth”.
  • the user equipment measures each cell on the carrier frequency according to the measurement bandwidth.
  • the measurement bandwidth can only be set to a narrow bandwidth, but if the user equipment also needs to measure other cells (traditional cells) on the carrier frequency, The measurement bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth affects the measurement effect of the conventional cell.
  • a measurement bandwidth of a wide bandwidth is used in order to ensure the measurement effect on a conventional cell, the measurement effect of the MTC cell is affected.
  • an MTC cell is configured on one carrier frequency.
  • the access station A may configure different measurement objects for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell, specifically, measurement bandwidth, where the measurement bandwidth (second measurement bandwidth) for measuring the non-MTC cell is used.
  • the configuration method and numerical values can be similar to those of the prior art, and the description thereof will be omitted herein to avoid redundancy.
  • the access station A may set a measurement bandwidth (first measurement bandwidth) for measuring the MTC cell according to the bandwidth of the MTC cell.
  • the access site A may The first measurement bandwidth is set to be 1.4 MHz, that is, the bandwidth of the MTC cell is the same, or the access station A may set the value of the first measurement bandwidth to be smaller than the bandwidth of the MTC cell, which is not specifically limited in the present invention.
  • the UE may perform measurement on each MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method for the UE to measure the MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth The process is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
  • the measurement effect on both sides can be improved.
  • the MTC cell may be configured according to part of resources (specifically, time-frequency resources) of the traditional cell, that is, the MTC cell is narrow bandwidth, but is used for measurement of the MTC cell.
  • the symbols still use the reference symbols of the traditional cell (wide bandwidth cell) (wide bandwidth reference symbols), and therefore may affect the measurement effect.
  • the access station A may notify the UE that the reference symbol is dedicated to measuring the MTC cell.
  • “dedicated to measure the MTC cell” refers to a reference symbol used for measuring the MTC cell.
  • the reference symbols of the legacy cell are not still used, but correspond to the MTC cell, specifically, the bandwidth of the MTC cell.
  • the UE may perform measurement on each of the MTC cells according to the reference symbols, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and process for the UE to measure the MTC cells according to the reference symbols are similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
  • the measurement of the MTC cell can be improved by the access station A instructing the user equipment to measure the MTC cell according to the reference symbol corresponding to the MTC cell according to the MTC cell.
  • the user equipment in order to measure the MTC cell, the user equipment needs to continuously monitor and measure each subframe, but the MTC cell may exist only in a part of the subframe, thereby causing the measurement result not to be accurate.
  • the access station A can determine that the MTC cell belongs to The subframe is notified to the UE, so that the UE can only monitor and measure the subframe including the MTC cell, thereby improving the accuracy of the measurement.
  • the access station A may initiate a handover procedure according to the measurement report reported by the UE, and determine that the UE needs to be handed over to the destination site (the first access point, which is referred to as the access site B for ease of understanding and differentiation).
  • the handover procedure is similar to the prior art in the embodiment of the present invention.
  • the description thereof is omitted.
  • the access site B when the UE switches to the access site B, the access site B needs to map the service flow of the UE to the public bearer of the access site B, in particular, when the access site B does not In the case of a public bearer, the service of the UE needs a separate EPS bearer. In addition, the access site A needs to release the public bearer mapped with the service flow of the UE. As a result, system resources are wasted and signaling overhead is also large.
  • the access station A and the access station B can communicate, specifically, data communication is possible, the access station A can send an indication to the access station B.
  • the access site A is provided with the information of the common bearer (the first handover indication information), so that the access site B can receive the first handover indication information, and the access site A is determined according to the first handover indication information.
  • a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE.
  • the sending, by the first access station, the first handover indication information includes:
  • the access station A may carry the first handover indication information in the handover request message (the first handover request message), and send the information to the access site B, thereby accessing the site B.
  • the first handover indication information may be obtained from the handover request message.
  • the access station B can receive the data (uplink data) sent by the UE, and forward the uplink data to the access site A, so that the access site A can pass
  • the public bearer sends the uplink data to the gateway device (the first gateway device), and then transmits the data to the server.
  • the access station A when the downlink (the server sends data to the UE), the access station A can receive the data (downlink data) from the server forwarded by the gateway device (the first gateway device) through the common bearer, and send the downlink data.
  • the access station B is given, so that the access station B can send the downlink data to the UE.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second access site determines that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
  • the access station A can also confirm whether the UE can perform machine type communication. And, when it is determined that the UE can perform machine type communication, the data of the UE (specifically, downlink data) is transmitted through the common bearer.
  • the access station B can also confirm whether the UE can perform machine type communication, and when determining that the UE can perform machine type communication, transmit data of the UE (specifically, uplink data) through a common bearer,
  • the method of communication can be exemplified by the above methods a to c.
  • the first access station and the second access station can communicate.
  • the access station B can also confirm Whether it is possible to communicate with the access site A, specifically, the communication at the data level, likewise, before the first handover indication is sent, the access site A can also confirm whether it can communicate with the access site B. Further, as a method of determining whether or not data communication is possible, the following methods can be cited:
  • the first access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
  • a part of the access stations in the communication system can transmit data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource (for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area)
  • a wireless communication resource for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area)
  • Each access point in the area may be allocated a communication resource for transmitting data between each other), for example, an MME or an Operation Management System (OAM), etc.
  • OAM Operation Management System
  • an access station capable of communicating in the system may also be used.
  • the access site is identified and consists of an access point having the identity A virtual area as the preset area.
  • the MME or the OAM may, for example, obtain information of the access station capable of communicating from the telecommunication carrier, and send information to the access sites indicating the access site capable of data communication.
  • the MME or the OAM can map the access sites located in the same preset area to the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, and notify the eNB or the OAM.
  • Each access point may notify a location of the access point that is located in a certain preset area in the cell identifier list or the tracking area list (first area indication information or second area indication information), thereby
  • the access point controlled by the MME or the OAM including the access station A and the access station B, may determine that data communication is possible from the cell identification list or the tracking area list according to the indication of the MME or the OAM.
  • the peer accesses the site.
  • the MME or the OAM can map the access site (specifically, the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the access site) in the same preset area to an entry and send it to the preset area.
  • Each access station such that the access station can determine data communication with an access site that is in the same entry as the cell identity or tracking area identity.
  • an access station obtains information indicating a preset area from an MME or an OAM, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • information of each preset area may be stored in advance in each connection. Entering the inside of the site, each access station obtains information indicating the preset area from the inside.
  • the second access station sends the second data to the first access station, where: the second access station acquires routing information of the first access site;
  • the second access station sends the second data to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site.
  • each access station may transmit data according to routing information (for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number), and therefore, the access site A needs to obtain an access site. B routing information. Similarly, access station B needs to obtain routing information of access station A.
  • routing information for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number
  • access station B needs to obtain routing information of access station A.
  • the method and the process for transmitting data according to the transmission network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
  • the second access site acquires routing information of the first access site, including: Receiving, by the second access station, the first handover request response message sent by the first access station, where the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site;
  • the second access station obtains routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
  • the access station A may carry its routing information in the handover request message (the first handover request message), and send it to the access site B, so that the access site B can In the handover request message, the routing information of the access site A is obtained.
  • the access station B may carry its routing information in the handover request response message (the first handover request response message), and send it to the access site A, so that the access site A can In the handover request response message, the routing information of the access site B is obtained.
  • the method before the second access station receives the first data sent by the first access station from the target mobile device, the method further includes:
  • the second access station sends the routing information of the second access site to the first access site, so that the first access site sends the second access site to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site. Send the first data.
  • the access station B can directly send the routing information to the access station A by using, for example, a signaling message, so that the access station A can receive the routing information, and according to the route, The information is sent to the access site B.
  • the acquiring, by the second access station, the routing information of the first access site where: the second access site receives the routing information of the first access site sent by the mobility management entity MME, where The routing information of the first access site is obtained by the MME from the first access site.
  • the access station B may send its routing information to the MME of the access station B by using, for example, a signaling message, and the MME of the access station A accesses the routing information of the station B. Forwarded to the access site A, the access site A can receive the routing information and send data to the access site B according to the routing information.
  • the access station A may carry its routing information to, for example, a path switching request message, and send it to the MME of the access station A, so that the MME of the access station B may also access the access station.
  • the routing information of A is carried, for example, in a path switching request message, and is sent to the access station B.
  • the MME of the access station B may be the same as the MME of the access station A, or Differently, when the MME of the access site B and the MME of the access site A can be different, the MMEs can communicate with each other.
  • the second access station sends the second data to the first access site, including:
  • the second access station receives the second trigger message
  • the second access station sends the second data to the first access station according to the second trigger message.
  • the access station B may determine that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer (or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access site B). After that, the uplink data of the UE is forwarded to the access station A.
  • the access station A may forward the downlink data of the UE to the access station B after determining that the access station B can send downlink data to the UE (or the UE has switched to the access station B).
  • the second trigger message includes: a first handover complete message sent by the second base station, a first path switch request response message sent by the mobility management entity MME, or a first end marker sent by the second access station. Message.
  • the access station B may be determined according to the handover complete message sent by the access site A, the path conversion request response message sent by the MME, or the terminator end marker message sent by the access station B.
  • the access station A can transmit the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer, or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access station B.
  • the access station A can determine that the access station B can send downlink data to the UE according to the path switching request message sent by the MME, or the UE has switched to the access station B.
  • the method further includes:
  • the second access station determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access station to the third access site
  • the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is that the first gateway device passes
  • the public carrier transmits data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site;
  • the second access station receives the third data sent by the third access station from the target mobile device, and forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer.
  • the handover procedure needs to be performed.
  • the mobility (or handover) of the UE can be implemented by the measurement and reporting of the UE, that is, the access site. B can control the handover of the UE according to the measurement report message from the UE.
  • the above-described processes and methods may be the same as those in the prior art, and the description thereof will be omitted herein to avoid redundancy.
  • the MTC cell and the legacy cell may have the same carrier frequency (which may also be referred to as a center frequency point), but there is a big difference in bandwidth.
  • the bandwidth of the traditional cell is 20 MHz.
  • the bandwidth of an MTC cell is typically 1.4 MHz.
  • RRM measurement is implemented by, for example, a parameter used by a base station to configure measurement for a user equipment, that is, a "measurement object", so that the user equipment according to the measurement object to the system Measurement of the cell.
  • a carrier frequency is only configured with a unique "measurement object", and the "measurement object" contains a parameter for indicating the bandwidth used for measurement, that is, "measurement bandwidth”.
  • the user equipment measures each cell on the carrier frequency according to the measurement bandwidth.
  • the MTC cell is narrowband, if the measurement of the MTC cell is to be guaranteed, the measurement bandwidth can only be set to a narrow bandwidth, but if the user equipment also needs to measure other cells (traditional cells) on the carrier frequency, The measurement bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth affects the measurement effect of the conventional cell. Similarly, if a wide bandwidth measurement bandwidth is used to ensure measurement of a conventional cell, the measurement effect of the MTC cell is affected.
  • the access station when a carrier frequency is configured with an MTC cell and a non-MTC cell, the access station may configure different measurement objects for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell, specifically, It is a measurement bandwidth, and the configuration method and value for measuring the measurement bandwidth (second measurement bandwidth) of the non-MTC cell may be similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
  • the access station may set a measurement bandwidth (first measurement bandwidth) for measuring the MTC cell according to the bandwidth of the MTC cell.
  • the access station B may The first measurement bandwidth is set to be 1.4 MHz, that is, the bandwidth of the MTC cell is the same, or the access station B may set the value of the first measurement bandwidth to be smaller than the bandwidth of the MTC cell, which is not specifically limited in the present invention. .
  • the UE After acquiring the measurement bandwidth (the first measurement bandwidth) of each MTC cell, the UE may perform measurement on each MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method for the UE to measure the MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth The process is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
  • a communication method by using MTC cells and non-identities on the same carrier frequency
  • the MTC cell is configured with different measurement bandwidths, which can improve the measurement effect on both sides.
  • the MTC cell may be configured according to part of resources (specifically, time-frequency resources) of the traditional cell, that is, the MTC cell is narrow bandwidth, but is used for measurement of the MTC cell.
  • the symbols still use the reference symbols of the traditional cell (wide bandwidth cell) (wide bandwidth reference symbols), and therefore may affect the measurement effect.
  • the access station B may notify the UE to use the reference symbol for measuring the MTC cell.
  • “dedicated to measure the MTC cell” refers to a reference symbol used for measuring the MTC cell.
  • the reference symbols of the legacy cell are not still used, but correspond to the MTC cell, specifically, the bandwidth of the MTC cell.
  • the UE may perform measurement on each of the MTC cells according to the reference symbols, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and process for the UE to measure the MTC cells according to the reference symbols are similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
  • the access station B instructs the user equipment to measure the MTC cell according to the reference symbol corresponding to the MTC cell according to the MTC cell, so that the measurement effect on the MTC cell can be improved.
  • the user equipment in order to measure the MTC cell, the user equipment needs to continuously monitor and measure each subframe, but the MTC cell may exist only in a part of the subframe, thereby causing the measurement result not to be accurate.
  • the access station B can determine the subframe to which the MTC cell belongs, and notify the UE, so that the UE can only monitor and measure the subframe including the MTC cell, thereby improving the measurement. accuracy.
  • the access station B may initiate a handover procedure after the UE needs to switch to the access site C (the third access point) according to the measurement report information of the UE, so that the UE switches from the access site B to the access site. C.
  • the handover procedure is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
  • the access site C needs to map the service flow of the UE to the public bearer of the access site C, in particular, when the access site C does not In the case of a public bearer, the UE's service requires a separate EPS bearer. As a result, system resources are wasted and signaling overhead is also large.
  • the access station C when the access station A and the access station C can communicate, specifically, data communication is possible, the access station C can obtain the indication of the access station.
  • the point A is provided with information (second handover indication information) of the common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE, so that the access station C can determine, according to the second handover indication information, that the access station A is provided with the UE capable of transmitting the UE.
  • the common bearing of data since the access station B can learn that the access A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE, the access station B can provide the access station A with the ability to transmit the Commonly carried information of the data of the UE (second handover indication information).
  • the access station A obtains information indicating that the UE is handed over to the access site C (the third handover indication information), so that the access site A can determine, according to the third handover indication information, that the UE needs to receive the public bearer.
  • the data of the UE is sent to the access station C for transmission to the UE through the access station C.
  • the access station B since the access station B can learn that the UE switches to the access site C, the access station B can send information indicating that the UE switches to the access site C to the access station A. (third switching indication information).
  • the second access station determines that the target mobile device is to be switched from the first access site to the third access site, including:
  • the second access station receives the third handover indication information sent by the first access station, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site. ;
  • the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
  • the access station B may send information (the third handover indication information) indicating that the UE switches to the access site C to the access site A, so that the access site A can receive the The third handover indication information, and according to the third handover indication information, determining data of the UE that needs to be received through the common bearer.
  • the above-listed access site C knows that the access site A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE, and the method for the access site A to know that the UE switches to the access site is merely an exemplary description.
  • the invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the access station may also know the above information from an upper management device, such as an MME.
  • the access station C can receive the data (uplink data) sent by the UE, and forward the uplink data to the access site A, so that the access site A can pass the The public bearer sends the uplink data to the gateway device (the first gateway device), and then transmits the data to the server. And, in the downlink (the server sends data to the UE), the access station A can send the downlink data to the access site C, and the access site C can send the downlink data to the UE.
  • the data of the UE that has switched to the access station C is transmitted through the public bearer of the access station A, it is required to establish that the access site A and the access site C can communicate, and thus, for example,
  • the communication method 200 of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to an LTE system, specifically, some or all of the access points in the LTE system can access the site C when transmitting data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource. It is also possible to confirm whether communication with the access site A can be made, specifically, at the data level. Further, as a method of determining whether or not data communication is possible, the following methods can be cited:
  • a part of the access stations in the communication system can transmit data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource (for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area)
  • Each access point in the area allocates communication resources for transmitting data between each other.
  • a device capable of managing an access site such as an MME or an OAM, may acquire information of an access station capable of communication, for example, from a telecommunication carrier. And transmitting, to each access station, information indicating an access station capable of data communication, so that each access point can learn the peer access station capable of data communication.
  • an access station capable of communicating in the system may also be used.
  • the access site is identified and the virtual area formed by the access point having the identifier is used as the preset area.
  • the MME or the OAM can map the access sites located in the same preset area to the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, and notify the eNB or the OAM.
  • Each access point may notify a location of all access points of the access point that are located in a certain preset area in the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, thereby including the access station A and the access station C.
  • the access point controlled by the MME or the OAM may determine, from the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, the peer access station capable of data communication according to the indication of the MME or the OAM.
  • the MME or the OAM can map the access site (specifically, the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the access site) in the same preset area to an entry and send it to an entry.
  • the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station, where: the second access station acquires routing information of the third access station;
  • the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
  • data may be transmitted between the access sites according to the routing information (for example, the transport network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number). Therefore, the access site A needs to obtain the routing information of the access site C. .
  • the method and the process for transmitting data according to the transmission network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
  • the obtaining, by the second access station, the routing information of the third access station, the method includes: the third access station receiving, by the first access station, routing information of the third access station.
  • the access site C can send its routing information to the access site B, thereby The access station B can forward the routing information of the access station C to the access station A.
  • the access station C may carry its routing information in the path switching request message, and send it to the MME of the access station C, so that the access station C can be routed through the MME of the access station A.
  • the information is sent to access site A.
  • the MME of the access site C may be the same as the MME of the access site A, or may be different, and in the case that the MME of the access site C and the MME of the access site A may be different, the MMEs are mutually different. Can communicate with each other.
  • the method before the second access station receives the third data sent by the third access station from the target mobile device, the method further includes:
  • the second access station sends the routing information of the second access station to the third access station, so that the third access station sends the routing information to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site. Send the third data.
  • each access station can transmit numbers according to routing information. According to (for example, the transport network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number), therefore, the access site C needs to obtain the routing information of the access site A.
  • the access station A may send the routing information of the access station A to the access station C by using signaling or the like.
  • the access station B can save the routing information of the access station A when the access station A performs data communication, and send the routing information of the access station A to the access station C by, for example, a handover request message.
  • the access station C may determine that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE by using the common bearer (or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access site C). After that, the uplink data of the UE is forwarded to the access station A.
  • the MME may send indication information indicating that the UE switches from the access station B to the access station C to the access station A, so that the access station A can learn that the UE has switched to the access station C, and at this time, the access station A
  • an end marker message may be sent to the access station B to indicate that the access station A no longer sends the downlink data of the UE to the access station B, so that the access station B can access the access station.
  • the C sends, for example, an end marker message or a handover complete message, so that the access station C can determine according to the handover complete message sent by the access station B, the path conversion request response message sent by the MME, or the end marker message sent by the access station B.
  • the access station A can transmit the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer, or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access station B.
  • the access station A may forward the UE to the access station B after determining that the access station C can send downlink data to the UE (or the UE has switched to the access station C). Downstream data.
  • the access station A may determine, according to the path switching request message sent by the MME, that the access station C can send downlink data to the UE, or that the UE has switched to the access site. C.
  • the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention after the target mobile device is switched from the source station to the destination station, continues to transmit the data of the target mobile device through the source station provided with the common bearer for transmitting the data of the target mobile device, without changing the transmission.
  • the common bearer of the data of the target mobile device and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
  • FIG. 4 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 300 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 300 includes:
  • the processing unit 310 is configured to obtain the first handover indication information that is sent by the second access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site and the first gateway device have a common bearer, and the common bearer Data for transmitting at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
  • the sending unit 320 is configured to send the first data from the mobile device to the second access station, so that the second access station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer;
  • the receiving unit 330 is configured to receive, by the first access station, the second data sent by the second access station, and the sending unit 320 is configured to forward the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is
  • the first gateway device sends data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the common bearer.
  • the processing unit 310 is further configured to determine that the second access site can communicate with the second access site.
  • the processing unit 310 is specifically configured to determine that the second access site is in the same preset area, where each access station in the preset area can communicate with each other.
  • the processing unit 310 is specifically configured to acquire at least one first area indication information, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, the cell list, and the at least one first area.
  • the indication information is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the first area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information in the cell list; or
  • the at least one second area indication information is used to determine, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication information,
  • the second access site is in the same preset area, where the second area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information in the tracking area identification list; or
  • the at least one third area indication information is used to determine that the second access station is located according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the at least one third area indication information. a same preset area, where the third area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information; or
  • the OAM obtains the at least one first area indication information; or
  • the receiving unit 330 is configured to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information;
  • the processing unit 310 is specifically configured to acquire the first handover indication information from the first handover request message.
  • the processing unit 310 is further configured to obtain routing information of the second access site.
  • the sending unit 320 is specifically configured to send, according to the routing information of the second access site, the second access site.
  • the first data of the mobile device is further configured to obtain routing information of the second access site.
  • the receiving unit 330 is further configured to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes routing information of the second access site;
  • the processing unit 310 is specifically configured to obtain routing information of the second access site from the first handover request message.
  • the sending unit 320 is further configured to send the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, so that the second access site sends the routing information to the second access site according to the routing information of the first access site.
  • the first access station sends the second data.
  • the sending unit 320 is specifically configured to send, by the first access station, a first handover request response message to the second access site, where the first handover request response message includes a route of the first access site. And the information, so that the second access station obtains the routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
  • the sending unit 320 is specifically configured to send the routing information of the first access site to the MME by the first access station, so that the MME forwards the route of the first access site to the second access site. information.
  • the sending unit 320 is further configured to send the second handover indication information to the third access site, where the second handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site and the first gateway device are provided with a public Co-bearing, to facilitate switching of the target mobile device from the first access site to the third access site, and
  • the third access station After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the third access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access The inbound station forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer, and/or
  • the second access station After determining that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the second access station sends fourth data to the third access site, where the third access site goes to the target The mobile device forwards the fourth data, where the fourth data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
  • the sending unit 320 is further configured to send, to the third access station, a cell identifier or a tracking area identifier of the second access station, so that the third access station is in accordance with the second access station.
  • the third identifier and the tracking area identifier determine that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area, send the third data from the mobile device to the second access station, where the preset area is Each access site within can communicate with each other.
  • the sending unit 320 is further configured to send routing information of the second access site to the third access station, so that the third access station sends the routing information according to the second access site to the third access site.
  • the second access station transmits third data from the mobile device.
  • the processing unit 310 is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access site.
  • the sending unit 320 is further configured to send routing information of the third access site to the second access site, to facilitate the The second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
  • the sending unit 320 is further configured to send, to the second access station, third handover indication information that is used to indicate that the target mobile device has been handed over from the first access site to the third access site, so that And determining, by the second access station, the target mobile device to switch from the first access station to the third access station according to the third handover indication information.
  • the processing unit 310 is further configured to acquire second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device.
  • the second measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of a second target carrier frequency, the second target At least one machine type communication MTC cell is configured on the carrier frequency, the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
  • the receiving unit 330 is further configured to receive the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, where the second measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device after performing measurement according to the second measurement indication information;
  • the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, and the fourth measurement bandwidth is different.
  • the subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
  • the processing unit 310 is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
  • the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, the access station being a base station device or a relay device.
  • the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • the communication device 300 may correspond to an access site B (first access site) in the method of the embodiment of the present invention, and each unit in the communication device 300 is a module and the above other operations and/or For the purpose of implementing the corresponding process of the method 100 in FIG. 1 , the functions are not described here.
  • the communication device of the embodiment of the present invention after the target mobile device is switched from the source site to the destination site, continues to transmit the data of the target mobile device through the source site provided with the common bearer for transmitting the data of the target mobile device, without changing the transmission.
  • the common bearer of the data of the target mobile device and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
  • FIG. 5 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 400 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the apparatus 400 includes:
  • the sending unit 410 is configured to send the first handover indication information to the first access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, where the public bearer a data for transmitting at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; a receiving unit 420, configured to receive, by the first access station, the mobile device from the target mobile device First data, and forwarding the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or the sending unit 410 is further configured to send the second data to the first access station, to facilitate the first access The site forwards the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
  • the first access station and the second access station are capable of communicating.
  • the first access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
  • the sending unit 410 is specifically configured to send a first handover request message to the first access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information.
  • the device further includes:
  • the processing unit 430 is configured to obtain routing information of the first access site.
  • the sending unit 410 is specifically configured to send the second data to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site.
  • the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive, by the second access station, a first handover request response message sent by the first access station, where the first handover request response message includes the first access site Routing information;
  • the processing unit 430 is specifically configured to obtain routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
  • the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive routing information of the first access site sent by the mobility management entity MME, where routing information of the first access site is the MME from the first access site Obtained.
  • the sending unit 410 is further configured to send the routing information of the second access site to the first access site, so that the first access site sends the routing information according to the routing information of the second access site to the first access site.
  • the second access station sends the first data.
  • the device further includes:
  • the processing unit 430 is configured to determine that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site;
  • the sending unit 410 is further configured to send fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is the first gateway device Corresponding to the target mobile device corresponding to the second access site by the public carrier Data; and/or
  • the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive the third data sent by the third access station from the target mobile device, and forward the third data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer.
  • the first access station and the third access station are capable of communicating.
  • the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
  • the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive, by the first access station, third handover indication information, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the Third access site;
  • the processing unit 430 is specifically configured to determine, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
  • the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site.
  • the third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME.
  • the processing unit 430 is specifically configured to determine, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the Third access site.
  • the processing unit 430 is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access station.
  • the sending unit 410 is specifically configured to send the third access station according to routing information of the third access site. Four data.
  • the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive routing information of the third access station sent by the first access station.
  • the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive routing information of the third access station sent by the MME, where the routing information of the third access station is obtained by the MME from the third access station.
  • the sending unit 410 is further configured to send routing information of the second access site to the third access station, so that the third access station sends the routing information according to the second access site to the third access site.
  • the second access station sends the third data.
  • the device further includes:
  • the processing unit 430 is configured to obtain the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, and configured to determine, according to the first measurement report information, that the target mobile device is handed over from the second access site to the first access site. Instructing information, the first measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the first target carrier frequency, and the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, where the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: First measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
  • the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, where the first measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device after performing measurement according to the first measurement indication information;
  • the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a first measurement bandwidth, where the first measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, and the second measurement bandwidth is different.
  • the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of a corresponding MTC cell, where a reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the MTC cell Measurement;
  • the subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
  • the device further includes:
  • the processing unit 430 is configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
  • the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, the access station being a base station device or a relay device.
  • the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • the communication device 400 may correspond to an access site A (second access site) in the method of the embodiment of the present invention, and each unit in the communication device 400 is a module and the other operations described above and/or For the purpose of implementing the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 3, the functions are not described here.
  • the communication device of the embodiment of the present invention after the target mobile device is switched from the source site to the destination site, continues to transmit the data of the target mobile device through the source site provided with the common bearer for transmitting the data of the target mobile device, without changing the transmission.
  • the common bearer of the data of the target mobile device and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
  • FIG. 6 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 500 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the device 500 includes: Bus 510;
  • processor 520 coupled to the bus 510;
  • a memory 530 connected to the bus 510;
  • transceiver 540 connected to the bus 510;
  • the processor 520 by using the bus 510, invokes a program stored in the memory 530, to obtain the first handover indication information sent by the second access station, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate the second connection.
  • the public carrier transmits data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to determine to be able to communicate with the second access site.
  • the processor 520 is specifically configured to determine that the second access site is in the same preset area, where each access station in the preset area can communicate with each other.
  • the processor 520 is specifically configured to acquire at least one first area indication information, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, the cell list, and the at least one first area.
  • the indication information is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the first area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information in the cell list; or
  • the at least one second area indication information is used to determine, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication information,
  • the second access site is in the same preset area, where the second area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information in the tracking area identification list; or
  • the at least one third area indication information is used to determine that the second access station is located according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the at least one third area indication information. a same preset area, where the third area indication information is used to indicate belonging to The third area indicates the cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the information; or
  • the site is in the same preset area, where the fourth area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
  • the processor 520 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 540 to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information;
  • the first handover indication information is obtained from the first handover request message.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to obtain routing information of the second access site, and configured to control the transceiver 540 to send the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
  • the first data of the mobile device is further configured to obtain routing information of the second access site, and configured to control the transceiver 540 to send the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
  • the processor 520 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 540 to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes routing information of the second access site;
  • the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send routing information of the first access site to the second access site, so that the second access site is configured according to the first access site. Routing information, sending the second data to the first access station.
  • the processor 520 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 540 to send a first handover request response message to the second access site, where the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site.
  • the second access station obtains the routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME forwards the routing information of the first access site to the second access site.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send the second handover indication information to the third access site, where the second handover indication information is used to indicate the second access site and the first gateway device.
  • a common bearer is provided to facilitate switching of the target mobile device from the first access site to the third access site, and
  • the third access station After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the third access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access The inbound station forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer, and/or
  • the second access station After determining that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the second access station sends fourth data to the third access site, where the third access site goes to the target The mobile device forwards the fourth data, where the fourth data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send, to the third access station, a cell identifier or a tracking area identifier of the second access station, so that the third access station is in accordance with the After the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the second access station determines that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area, send the third data from the mobile device to the second access station, where Each access station in the preset area can communicate with each other.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send routing information of the second access site to the third access site, so that the third access site is configured according to the second access site. Routing information, transmitting third data from the mobile device to the second access station.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access site, and configured to control the transceiver 540 to send routing information of the third access site to the second access site, to facilitate the The second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send, to the second access station, a third, indicating that the target mobile device has been handed over from the first access site to the third access site. And switching the indication information, so that the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to obtain second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device.
  • the processor 520 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 540 to send at least one second measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the second measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the second target carrier frequency, the second target At least one machine type communication MTC cell is configured on the carrier frequency, the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: a third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
  • the second measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the second measurement indication information, and is sent by the target mobile device.
  • the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, and the fourth measurement bandwidth is different.
  • the subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
  • the processor 520 is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
  • the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, the access station comprising a base station device and/or a relay device.
  • the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • Processor 520 controls the operation of communication device 500, which may also be referred to as a CPU.
  • Memory 530 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 520. A portion of memory 530 may also include non-volatile line random access memory (NVRAM).
  • the communication device 500 can embed or itself be a wireless communication device such as a mobile telephone, and can also include a carrier that houses the transmitting circuitry and the receiving circuitry to allow for data transmission between the communications device 500 and the remote location. receive. The transmit and receive circuits can be coupled to the antenna.
  • the various components of communication device 500 are coupled together by a bus (also referred to as a bus system) 510, which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • bus 510 various buses are labeled as bus 510 in the figure.
  • the communication device 500 can also include a processing unit for processing signals, and further includes a power controller, a decoding processor.
  • the decoder in a specific different product may be integrated with the processing unit.
  • the processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can be any conventional processor, decoder or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as hardware processor execution completion, or performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 530, and the decoding unit or the processing unit reads the information in the memory 530, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with the hardware thereof.
  • the processor 520 may be a central processing unit (a central processing unit), and the processor 520 may also be another general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP). ), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), off-the-shelf programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, and the like.
  • DSP digital signal processor
  • ASICs application specific integrated circuits
  • FPGAs off-the-shelf programmable gate arrays
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 520 or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software modules can be located in random memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, etc., which are well established in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 530.
  • the processor 520 reads the information in the memory 530 and combines the hardware to perform the steps of the above method. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the communication device 500 may correspond to an access station B (first access site) in the method of the embodiment of the present invention, and each unit in the communication device 500 is a module and the other operations described above and/or For the purpose of implementing the corresponding process of the method 100 in FIG. 1 , the functions are not described here.
  • the communication device of the embodiment of the present invention continues to transmit data of the target mobile device through a source station provided with a common bearer for transmitting data of the target mobile device after the target mobile device is switched from the source site to the destination site, without changing the transmission.
  • the common bearer of the data of the target mobile device and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
  • FIG. 7 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 600 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figure 7, the device 600 includes:
  • Bus 610 a processor 620 connected to the bus 610;
  • a memory 630 connected to the bus 610;
  • transceiver 640 connected to the bus 610;
  • the processor 620 by using the bus 610, invokes a program stored in the memory 630, and is configured to control the transceiver 640 to send first handover indication information to the first access site, where the first handover indication information is used. And indicating that the second access site and the first gateway device are provided with a common bearer for transmitting data of the at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; and controlling the transceiver 640 to receive the first Receiving, by the access station, first data from the target mobile device, and controlling the transceiver 640 to forward the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or
  • the first access station and the second access station are capable of communicating.
  • the first access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
  • the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to send a first handover request message to the first access site, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to obtain routing information of the first access station, and configured to control the transceiver 640 to send the first access station according to routing information of the first access site. Two data.
  • the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the first handover request response message sent by the first access station, where the first handover request response message includes a route of the first access site.
  • the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the routing information of the first access site sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the routing information of the first access site is the MME from the Obtained by the first access site.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to control the transceiver 640 to send routing information of the second access site to the first access site, so that the first access site is configured according to the second access site. Routing information, sending the first data to the second access station.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to determine that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site;
  • the transceiver 640 is configured to receive the third data sent by the third access station from the target mobile device, and forward the third data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer.
  • the first access station and the third access station are capable of communicating.
  • the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the third handover indication information sent by the first access station, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has received the first connection.
  • the inbound site switches to the third access site;
  • the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the a third access station, where the third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME;
  • the processor 620 is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access station, and configured to control the transceiver 640 to send the third access station according to routing information of the third access site.
  • Four data are further configured to obtain routing information of the third access station, and configured to control the transceiver 640 to send the third access station according to routing information of the third access site.
  • the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive routing information of the third access station sent by the first access station.
  • the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the routing information of the third access site that is sent by the MME, where the routing information of the third access site is the third access of the MME. Site acquired.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to control the transceiver 640 to send routing information of the second access site to the third access site, so that the third access site is configured according to the second access site. Routing information, sending the third data to the second access station.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to obtain the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device.
  • the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to send at least one first measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the first measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the first target carrier frequency, the first target At least one machine type communication MTC cell is configured on the carrier frequency, the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: first measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
  • the first measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the first measurement indication information, and is sent by the target mobile device.
  • the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a first measurement bandwidth, where the first measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, and the second measurement bandwidth is different.
  • the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of a corresponding MTC cell, where a reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the MTC cell Measurement;
  • the subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
  • the processor 620 is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
  • the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device
  • the access station comprises a base station device and/or a relay device.
  • the routing information comprises a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
  • the processor 620 controls the operation of the communication device 600, which may also be referred to as a CPU.
  • Memory 630 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 620. A portion of the memory 630 may also include non-volatile line random access memory (NVRAM).
  • NVRAM non-volatile line random access memory
  • the communication device 600 can be embedded or itself can be, for example
  • a wireless communication device, such as a mobile telephone may also include a carrier that houses the transmitting circuitry and the receiving circuitry to allow for data transmission and reception between the communications device 600 and the remote location. The transmit and receive circuits can be coupled to the antenna.
  • the various components of communication device 600 are coupled together by a bus (also referred to as a bus system) 610, which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus.
  • bus 610 can also include a processing unit for processing signals, and further includes a power controller, a decoding processor.
  • the decoder in a specific different product may be integrated with the processing unit.
  • the processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can be any conventional processor, decoder or the like.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as hardware processor execution completion, or performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor.
  • the software modules can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 630, and the decoding unit or the processing unit reads the information in the memory 630, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with the hardware thereof.
  • the processor 620 may be a central processing unit (a central processing unit, referred to as a "CPU"), and the processor 620 may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP). ), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), off-the-shelf programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, and the like.
  • the general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
  • the steps of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 620 or an instruction in the form of software.
  • the steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor.
  • the software modules can be located in random memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, etc., which are well established in the art.
  • the storage medium is located in the memory 630.
  • the processor 620 reads the information in the memory 630 and combines the hardware to complete the steps of the above method. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the communication device 600 may correspond to the access site A (second access site) in the method of the embodiment of the present invention, and each unit in the communication device 600 is a module and the above other operations and/or Or function to achieve the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 3, respectively, in order to clean, I will not repeat them here.
  • the communication device of the embodiment of the present invention continues to transmit data of the target mobile device through a source station provided with a common bearer for transmitting data of the target mobile device after the target mobile device is switched from the source site to the destination site, without changing the transmission.
  • the common bearer of the data of the target mobile device and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
  • the size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be taken to the embodiments of the present invention.
  • the implementation process constitutes any limitation.
  • the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways.
  • the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative.
  • the division of the unit is only a logical function division.
  • there may be another division manner for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not executed.
  • the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be electrical, mechanical or otherwise.
  • each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
  • the functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as separate products, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium.
  • the technical solution of the present invention which is essential to the prior art or part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium, including
  • the instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention.
  • the foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. .

Abstract

The embodiments of the present invention provide a communication method, a communication apparatus and a communication device, which can reduce signalling overheads generated due to switching. The method comprises: a first access site of access sites acquiring first switching indication information sent by a second access site, wherein the first switching indication information is used for indicating that there is a common bearer arranged between the second access site and a first gateway device, and the common bearer is used for transmitting data of at least one mobile device including a target mobile device; the first access site sending to the second access site first data from the mobile device, so that the second access site forwards the first data to the first gateway device via the common bearer; and/or the first access site receiving second data sent by the second access site, and forwarding the second data to the target mobile device, wherein the second data is the data which corresponds to the target mobile device and is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site via the common bearer.

Description

通信方法、 通信装置和通信设备 技术领域  Communication method, communication device and communication device
本发明涉及通信领域, 并且更具体地, 涉及通信方法、 通信装置和通信 设备。 背景技术  The present invention relates to the field of communications, and more particularly to communication methods, communication devices, and communication devices. Background technique
物联网, 也称为机器类型通信(MTC, Machine Type Communication ) 或机器间通信(M2M, Machine-To-Machine ), 是指将物品通过信息传感设 备与互联网连接起来, 实现智能化识别和管理, 这就意味着大量的小型设备 可以通过无线的方式接入例如, 蜂窝网络, 以实现机器类型通信。  The Internet of Things, also known as Machine Type Communication (MTC) or Machine-To-Machine (M2M), refers to the connection of items to the Internet through information sensing devices for intelligent identification and management. This means that a large number of small devices can wirelessly access, for example, cellular networks for machine type communication.
随着物联网技术的发展, 物联网设备的数量会变的十分巨大, 这些设备 会和无线通信技术紧密结合, 并且通过无线连接获得数据或者将数据上报到 控制中心。 从而, 可能产生大量的随机或周期的上报数据, 可能来自于各种 具体应用, 例如, 无线水表电表、 自动售货机、 pos机等等。 这些应用的用 户数目庞大, 但是单次传输的数据量又相对较小(通常应用层数据在几十字 节到几百字节), 甚至小于 IP包头开销。  With the development of IoT technology, the number of IoT devices will become enormous. These devices will be closely integrated with wireless communication technologies and obtain data through wireless connections or report data to the control center. Thus, a large amount of random or periodic reported data may be generated, which may come from various specific applications, such as wireless water meters, vending machines, pos machines, and the like. The number of users of these applications is large, but the amount of data transmitted in a single transaction is relatively small (usually application layer data is in the range of tens of bytes to hundreds of bytes), and even less than the IP header overhead.
现有技术中, UE的数据传输可以基于例如,演进分组系统( EPS, Evolved Packet System )承载来实现, 该 EPS承载包括空口的数据无线承载( DRB, Data Radio Bearer )和核心网的通用分组无线业务隧道协议(GTP, General packet radio service Tunnelling Protocol ) 道。 由于 M2M设备的数量可能会 非常庞大,这些大量的承载会对无线接入网络(RAN, Radio Access Network ) 和核心网实体造成相当大的沖击。  In the prior art, the data transmission of the UE may be implemented based on, for example, an Evolved Packet System (EPS) bearer, where the EPS bearer includes an air interface data radio bearer (DRB) and a general packet radio of the core network. GTP, General packet radio service Tunnelling Protocol (GTP). Since the number of M2M devices may be very large, these large numbers of bearers may have a considerable impact on the Radio Access Network (RAN) and core network entities.
针对这个问题, 提出了公共承载的概念, 该公共承载可以设置在基站与 网关设备之间, 也可以设置在中继节点与基站之间, 通过将多个进行机器类 型通信的设备(以下, 筒称 MTC设备) 的除空口外的其他专用承载的业务 流映射到公共的承载上传输, 来降低对核心网的影响。  Aiming at this problem, the concept of public bearer is proposed. The common bearer can be set between the base station and the gateway device, or can be set between the relay node and the base station, by means of multiple devices for machine type communication (below, The traffic of other dedicated bearers other than the air interface of the MTC device is mapped to the public bearer to reduce the impact on the core network.
但是, 当 MTC设备移动而需要从源基站切换至目的基站时, 该 MTC 设备的业务流也需要从源基站的公共承载切换(或者说, 重新映射)至目的 基站的公共承载, 即, 需要重配置 MTC设备的公共承载, 因为重配置公共 承载需要基站和核心网实体(移动管理实体(MME, Mobility Management Entity ),服务网关( S-GW, Serving Gateway ),分组数据网关( P-GW, Packet Data Network Gateway )之间进行信令交互, 由于 MTC设备数目庞大, 该过 程的信令开销可能会非常大。 However, when the MTC device needs to be handed over from the source base station to the destination base station, the service flow of the MTC device also needs to be switched (or remapped) from the common bearer of the source base station to the common bearer of the destination base station, that is, it needs to be heavy. Configure the common bearer of the MTC device, because the reconfiguration of the common bearer requires the base station and the core network entity (MME, Mobility Management) Entity), the service gateway (S-GW, Serving Gateway), and the packet data gateway (P-GW, Packet Data Network Gateway) perform signaling interaction. Due to the large number of MTC devices, the signaling overhead of this process may be very large. .
因此, 本发明希望能够提供一种通信方法, 以减少因切换而产生的信令 开销。 发明内容  Accordingly, the present invention is intended to provide a communication method to reduce signaling overhead due to handover. Summary of the invention
本发明实施例提供一种通信方法、 通信装置和通信设备, 能够减少因切 换而产生的信令开销。  The embodiments of the present invention provide a communication method, a communication device, and a communication device, which can reduce signaling overhead caused by switching.
第一方面, 提供了一种机器类型通信的方法, 该方法包括: 接入站点中 的第一接入站点获取第二接入站点发送的第一切换指示信息, 该第一切换指 示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 该公共 承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据; 该第一接 入站点向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一数据, 以便于该第二接 入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第一数据;和 /或该第一接入 站点接收该第二接入站点发送的第二数据, 并向该目标移动设备转发该第二 数据, 其中, 该第二数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入 站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。  In a first aspect, a method for machine type communication is provided, the method includes: acquiring, by a first access station in an access station, first handover indication information sent by a second access station, where the first handover indication information is used Instructing the second access station and the first gateway device to have a common bearer for transmitting data of the at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; the first access site to the second access Transmitting, by the ingress, first data from the mobile device, so that the second access station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer; and/or the first access station receives the second access Transmitting the second data sent by the station, and forwarding the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site and the target mobile device by using the common Corresponding data.
结合第一方面, 在第一方面的第一种实现方式中, 该第一接入站点确定 能够与该第二接入站点通信。  In conjunction with the first aspect, in a first implementation of the first aspect, the first access site determines to be able to communicate with the second access site.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第二种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点确定能够与该第二接入站点通信, 包括: 该第一接入站点确定 与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼 此之间能够进行通信  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a second implementation manner of the first aspect, the first access site determines that the second access site can communicate with the second access site, including: the first access site determines The second access site is in the same preset area, where each access station in the preset area can communicate with each other
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第三种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点确定该第二接入站点处于预设区域包括: 该第一接入站点获取 至少一个第一区域指示信息, 根据该第一接入站点的小区标识、 该第二接入 站点的小区标识、 小区列表和该至少一个第一区域指示信息, 确定与该第二 接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第一区域指示信息用于指示该小区列 表中属于该第一区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的小区标识; 或该第一接入 站点获取至少一个第二区域指示信息, 根据该第一接入站点的跟踪区域标 识、 该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识、 跟踪区域标识列表和该至少一个第二 区域指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第二区 域指示信息用于指示该跟踪区域标识列表中属于该第二区域指示信息所对 应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识; 或该第一接入站点获取至少一个第三区域指 示信息, 根据该第一接入站点的小区标识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识和该 至少一个第三区域指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其 中, 该第三区域指示信息用于指示属于该第三区域指示信息所对应的预设区 域的小区标识; 或该第一接入站点获取至少一个第四区域指示信息, 根据该 第一接入站点的跟踪区域标识、该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识和该至少一 个第四区域指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该 第四区域指示信息用于指示属于该第四区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的 跟踪区域标识。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a third implementation manner of the first aspect, the determining, by the first access site, that the second access site is in a preset area, includes: the first access site acquiring at least one The first area indication information is determined to be the same as the second access station according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, the cell list, and the at least one first area indication information. An area, where the first area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier in the cell list that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information; or the first access station acquires at least one second area indication information. According to the tracking area of the first access site And the tracking area identifier, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication information of the second access station are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the second area indicates information The tracking area identifier indicating the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information in the tracking area identifier list; or the first access station acquiring at least one third area indication information, according to the first access station The cell identifier, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the at least one third area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the third area indication information is used to indicate that the first The cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the three-region indication information; or the first access station acquires at least one fourth area indication information, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, and the tracking of the second access station The area identifier and the at least one fourth area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where The fourth area indication information is used to indicate a tracking area identifier that belongs to a preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第四种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点获取至少一个第一区域指示信息, 包括: 第一接入站点从移动 管理实体 MME或运营管理系统 OAM获取该至少一个第一区域指示信息; 该第一接入站点获取至少一个第二区域指示信息, 包括: 第一接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第二区域指示信息; 该第一接入站点获取至 少一个第三区域指示信息, 包括: 第一接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取该至 少一个第三区域指示信息; 该第一接入站点获取至少一个第四区域指示信 息, 包括: 第一接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第四区域指示信 息。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fourth implementation manner of the first aspect, the first access station acquires the at least one first area indication information, including: the first access station from the mobility management entity MME or The operation management system OAM acquires the at least one first area indication information; the first access station acquires the at least one second area indication information, where: the first access station acquires the at least one second area indication information from the MME or the OAM; Obtaining, by the first access station, the at least one third area indication information, the first access station acquiring the at least one third area indication information from the MME or the OAM; the first access station acquiring the at least one fourth area indication information The method includes: the first access station acquires the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第五种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点获取第二接入站点发送的第一切换指示信息包括: 该第一接入 站点接收该第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求 消息包括该第一切换指示信息; 该第一接入站点从该第一切换请求消息中, 获取该第一切换指示信息。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifth implementation manner of the first aspect, the acquiring, by the first access station, the first handover indication information sent by the second access site includes: receiving, by the first access site a first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information; the first access site obtains the first handover from the first handover request message Instructions.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第六种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一数据, 包括: 该 第一接入站点获取该第二接入站点的路由信息; 该第一接入站点根据该第二 接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一数据。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixth implementation manner of the first aspect, the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, including: the first The access station acquires routing information of the second access station; the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第七种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点获取该第二接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该第一接入站点接收 该第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括 该第二接入站点的路由信息; 该第一接入站点从该第一切换请求消息中, 获 取该第二接入站点的路由信息。 In combination with the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventh implementation manner of the first aspect, And obtaining, by the first access station, the routing information of the second access station, the method includes: the first access station receiving the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes the first The routing information of the second access station is obtained by the first access station from the first handover request message.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第八种实现方式中, 在 该第一接入站点接收该第二接入站点发送的第二数据之前, 该方法还包括: 该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于 该第二接入站点根据该第一接入站点的路由信息, 向该第一接入站点发送该 第二数据。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eighth implementation manner of the first aspect, before the first access station receives the second data sent by the second access station, the method further includes: An access station sends the routing information of the first access station to the second access station, so that the second access station sends the routing information to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site. Second data.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第九种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送该第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该 第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送第一切换请求响应消息, 其中, 该第一 切换请求响应消息包括该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第二接入站点 从该第一切换请求响应消息中获取该第一接入站点的路由信息。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a ninth implementation manner of the first aspect, the first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, including: An access station sends a first handover request response message to the second access site, where the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site, so that the second access site is from the first Obtaining routing information of the first access site in a handover request response message.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送该第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该 第一接入站点向 MME发送该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该 MME向 该第二接入站点转发该第一接入站点的路由信息。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a tenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, including: An access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME forwards the routing information of the first access site to the second access site.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十一种实现方式中, 该方法还包括: 该第一接入站点向第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息, 该 第二切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共 承载, 以便于该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点, 以 及该第三接入站点在该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入 站点后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该目标移动设备的第三数据, 该第二接 入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据,和 /或该第二接入 站点在确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点后, 向 该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 该第三接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第 四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接 入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eleventh implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first access station sending, to the third access station, second handover indication information, the second The handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, so that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, and the third After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access site passes Transmitting the third data to the first gateway device, and/or the second access station determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site The third access station sends the fourth data, and the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is sent by the first gateway device to the second interface by using the common The data of the incoming site that corresponds to the target mobile device.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十二种实现方式中, 该方法还包括: 该第一接入站点向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的 d、 区标识或跟踪区域标识, 以便于该第三接入站点在根据该第二接入站点的小 区标识或跟踪区域标识确定该第三接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预 设区域之后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第三数据, 其中, 该 预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twelfth implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: sending, by the first access station, the second access site to the third access site , The area identifier or the tracking area identifier, so that the third access station determines that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area after determining, according to the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the second access station And transmitting third data from the mobile device to the second access station, where each access station in the preset area is capable of communicating with each other.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十三种实现方式中, 该方法还包括: 该第一接入站点向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的路 由信息, 以便于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二 接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第三数据。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a thirteenth implementation manner of the foregoing aspect, the method further includes: the first access station sending the route of the second access site to the third access site And the information, so that the third access station sends the third data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十四种实现方式中, 该方法还包括: 该第一接入站点获取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 该第一接 入站点向该第二接入站点发送该第三接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第二接 入站点根据第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入站点发送第四数据。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the fourteenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: obtaining, by the first access station, routing information of the third access site; the first access The station sends the routing information of the third access station to the second access station, so that the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十五种实现方式中, 该方法还包括: 该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送用于指示该目标移动 设备已从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点的第三切换指示信息, 以便 于该第二接入站点根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一 接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifteenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: sending, by the first access station, the second access site, to indicate that the target mobile device has Switching from the first access station to the third access indication information of the third access station, so that the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, the target mobile device from the first access site Switch to the third access site.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十六种实现方式中, 在该第一接入站点向该第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息之前, 该方法还 包括: 该第一接入站点获取该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息; 该第 一接入站点根据该第二测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站 点切换至该第三接入站点。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the sixteenth implementation manner of the first aspect, before the first access station sends the second handover indication information to the third access site, the method further includes: The first access station acquires the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the first access station determines, according to the second measurement report information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third Access site.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十七种实现方式中, 该第一接入站点获取该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 包括: 该第一接入站点向目标移动设备发送至少一个第二测量指示信息, 该第 二测量指示信息包括第二目标载频的载频信息, 该第二目标载频上配置有至 少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第二测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个 信息: 第三测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧 指示信息; 该第一接入站点接收该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 该第二测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第二测量指示信息进行测量 后发送的; 其中, 该第三测量带宽指示信息用于指示第三测量带宽, 该第三 测量带宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 该第三测量带宽与第四测量带 宽相异, 该第四测量带宽用于配置在该第二目标载频上的第二非 MTC小区 的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的参考符号的配 置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量; 该子帧指示信息用 于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the seventeenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the first access station acquires the second measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, and includes: the first access site Transmitting, to the target mobile device, at least one second measurement indication information, where the second measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of a second target carrier frequency, where the second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, the second The measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: a third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information; the first access station receives the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, The second measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the second measurement indication information, where the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, the third Measuring a bandwidth for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth being different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, the fourth measurement bandwidth being used for configuring a measurement of the second non-MTC cell on the second target carrier frequency; The reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of the corresponding MTC cell, where the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for measurement of the MTC cell; the subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell. .
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十八种实现方式中, 该方法还包括: 该第一接入站点确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通 信。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eighteenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the method further includes: the first access station determining that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第十九种实现方式中, 该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备, 该接入站点包括基站设备和 / 或中继设备。  With reference to the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a nineteenth implementation manner of the first aspect, the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station comprises a base station device and/or a relay device .
结合第一方面及其上述实现方式, 在第一方面的第二十种实现方式中, 该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。  In conjunction with the first aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the twentieth implementation of the first aspect, the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
第二方面, 提供了一种通信方法, 该方法包括: 接入站点中的第二接入 站点向该第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息, 该第一切换指示信息用于指 示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 该公共承载用于传输 包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据; 该第二接入站点接收该 第一接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备的第一数据, 并通过该公共承载向 该第一网关设备转发该第一数据;和 /或该第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发 送第二数据, 以便于该第一接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其 中,该第二数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与 该目标移动设备相对应的数据。  The second aspect provides a communication method, where the method includes: sending, by the second access station in the access station, first handover indication information to the first access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate the first A common bearer is disposed between the second access station and the first gateway device, where the common bearer is used to transmit data of the at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; and the second access site receives the first access site to send First data from the target mobile device, and forwarding the first data to the first gateway device through the public bearer; and/or the second access station sends second data to the first access station, so that Transmitting the second data to the target mobile device at the first access station, where the second data is corresponding to the target mobile device by the first gateway device sent to the second access site by using the common access device The data.
结合第二方面, 在第二方面的第一种实现方式中, 该第一接入站点与该 第二接入站点能够通信。  In conjunction with the second aspect, in a first implementation of the second aspect, the first access site is in communication with the second access site.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第二种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的 各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a second implementation manner of the second aspect, the first access site and the second access site are in a same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第三种实现方式中, 该 向该第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息包括: 向该第一接入站点发送第一 切换请求消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示信息。  With the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a third implementation manner of the second aspect, the sending the first handover indication information to the first access site includes: sending a first handover request to the first access site a message, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第四种实现方式中, 该 第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发送第二数据, 包括: 该第二接入站点获取 该第一接入站点的路由信息; 该第二接入站点根据该第一接入站点的路由信 息, 向该第一接入站点发送该第二数据。 In combination with the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fourth implementation manner of the second aspect, The second access station sends the second data to the first access station, where: the second access station acquires routing information of the first access station; the second access station is configured according to the first access site Routing information, sending the second data to the first access station.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第五种实现方式中, 该 第二接入站点获取该第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该第二接入站点接收 该第一接入站点发送的第一切换请求响应消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求响应 消息包括该第一接入站点的路由信息; 该第二接入站点从该第一切换请求响 应消息中, 获取该第一接入站点的路由信息。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifth implementation manner of the second aspect, the acquiring, by the second access station, the routing information of the first access site, a first handover request response message sent by the access station, where the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site; the second access site obtains the first handover request response message Routing information of the first access site.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第六种实现方式中, 该 第二接入站点获取该第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该第二接入站点接收 移动性管理实体 MME发送的该第一接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 该第一接 入站点的路由信息是该 MME从该第一接入站点获取的。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixth implementation manner of the second aspect, the acquiring, by the second access site, the routing information of the first access site, the second access site receiving the mobility And managing the routing information of the first access site sent by the MME, where the routing information of the first access site is obtained by the MME from the first access site.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第七种实现方式中, 在 该第二接入站点接收该第一接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备的第一数 据之前, 该方法还包括: 该第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发送该第二接入 站点的路由信息, 以便于该第一接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送该第一数据。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventh implementation manner of the second aspect, before the second access station receives the first data sent by the first access station from the target mobile device, The method further includes: sending, by the second access station, the routing information of the second access site to the first access site, so that the first access site according to the routing information of the second access site The second access station sends the first data.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第八种实现方式中, 该 方法还包括: 该第二接入站点确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至 第三接入站点; 该第二接入站点向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 以便于该 第三接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第 一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对 应的数据;和 /或该第二接入站点接收该第三接入站点发送的来自该目标移动 设备的第三数据, 并通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eighth implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second access station determines that the target mobile device is switched from the first access station to the third access The second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is the first The gateway device transmits data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the common bearer; and/or the second access site receives the third mobile station from the target mobile device Three data, and forwarding the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第九种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点与该第三接入站点能够通信。  In conjunction with the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a ninth implementation manner of the second aspect, the first access station and the third access station are capable of communicating.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点与该第三接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的 各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a tenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十一种实现方式中, 该第二接入站点确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至第三接入站 点, 包括: 该第二接入站点接收该第一接入站点发送的第三切换指示信息, 该第三切换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换至 该第三接入站点; 该第二接入站点根据该第三切换指示信息, 确定该目标移 动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。 With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eleventh implementation manner of the second aspect, the second access station determines that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access station to the third access station The second access station receives the third handover indication information sent by the first access station, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the first The third access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十二种实现方式中, 该第二接入站点确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至第三接入站 点, 包括: 该第二接入站点接收 MME发送的第三切换指示信息, 该第三切 换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接 入站点, 该第三切换指示信息是该第三接入站点发送给该 MME的; 该第二 接入站点根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点 切换至该第三接入站点。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twelfth implementation manner of the second aspect, the second access station determines that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site, including The second access station receives the third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site, and the third The handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME; the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site. .
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十三种实现方式中, 该第二接入站点向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 包括: 该第二接入站点获 取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 该第二接入站点根据该第三接入站点的路由 信息, 向该第三接入站点发送该第四数据。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a thirteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station, where: the second access site obtains The routing information of the third access station; the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十四种实现方式中, 该第二接入站点获取该第三接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该第三接入站点接 收该第一接入站点发送的该第三接入站点的路由信息。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the fourteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the acquiring, by the second access station, the routing information of the third access site, The routing information of the third access station sent by the first access station.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十五种实现方式中, 该第二接入站点获取该第三接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该第二接入站点接 收 MME发送的该第三接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 该第三接入站点的路由 信息是该 MME从该第三接入站点获取的。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the fifteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the acquiring, by the second access station, the routing information of the third access site, The routing information of the third access station is sent, where the routing information of the third access station is obtained by the MME from the third access station.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十六种实现方式中, 在该第二接入站点接收该第三接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备的第三 数据之前, 该方法还包括: 该第二接入站点向该第三接入站点发送该第二接 入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信 息, 向该第二接入站点发送该第三数据。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, before the second access station receives the third data sent by the third access station from the target mobile device, The method further includes: sending, by the second access station, routing information of the second access station to the third access station, so that the third access station sends the routing information according to the second access site to the third access station The second access station sends the third data.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十七种实现方式中, 在该第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息之前, 该方法还 包括: 该第二接入站点获取该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息; 该第 二接入站点根据该第一测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第二接入站 点切换至该第一接入站点。 With the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventeenth implementation manner of the second aspect, before the second access site sends the first handover indication information to the first access site, the method further includes: The second access station acquires the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the second access station determines, according to the first measurement report information, the target mobile device from the second access station Point to switch to the first access site.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十八种实现方式中, 该第二接入站点获取该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息, 包括: 该第 二接入站点向目标移动设备发送至少一个第一测量指示信息, 该第一测量指 示信息包括第一目标载频的载频信息, 该第一目标载频上配置有至少一个机 器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第一测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个信息: 第 一测量带宽指示信息、至少一个参考符号指示信息、至少一个子帧指示信息; 该第二接入站点接收该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息,该第一测量 上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第一测量指示信息进行测量后发送的; 其 中, 该第一测量带宽指示信息用于指示第一测量带宽, 该第一测量带宽用于 该至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 该第一测量带宽与第二测量带宽相异, 该第 二测量带宽用于配置在该第一目标载频上的第一非 MTC小区的测量; 该参 考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC 小区的参考符号的配置, 该 MTC 小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量; 该子帧指示信息用于指示所对应 的 MTC小区使用的子帧。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eighteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the second access station obtains the first measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, and includes: the second access site And transmitting, to the target mobile device, at least one first measurement indication information, where the first measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of a first target carrier frequency, where the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, where the first The measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: the first measurement bandwidth indication information, the at least one reference symbol indication information, and the at least one subframe indication information; the second access station receives the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, The first measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the first measurement indication information, where the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the first measurement bandwidth, and the first measurement bandwidth is used for the at least Measurement of an MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, the first The measurement bandwidth is used to configure a measurement of the first non-MTC cell on the first target carrier frequency; the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of the corresponding MTC cell, where the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the Measurement of the MTC cell; the subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第十九种实现方式中, 该方法还包括: 该第二接入站点确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通 信。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a nineteenth implementation manner of the second aspect, the method further includes: the second access station determines that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第二十种实现方式中, 该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备, 该接入站点包括基站设备和 / 或中继设备。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twentieth implementation manner of the second aspect, the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station includes a base station device and/or a relay device .
结合第二方面及其上述实现方式, 在第二方面的第二十一种实现方式 中, 该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。  With reference to the second aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the twenty-first implementation manner of the second aspect, the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
第三方面, 提供了一种通信装置, 该装置包括: 处理单元, 用于获取第 二接入站点发送的第一切换指示信息, 该第一切换指示信息用于指示该第二 接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载,该公共承载用于传输包括目标 移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据; 发送单元, 用于向该第二接入站 点发送来自该移动设备的第一数据, 以便于该第二接入站点通过该公共承载 向该第一网关设备转发该第一数据; 和 /或该接收单元,用于该第一接入站点 接收该第二接入站点发送的第二数据, 以及该发送单元用于向该目标移动设 备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该第二数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送 给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。 A third aspect provides a communication device, where the device includes: a processing unit, configured to acquire first handover indication information sent by a second access station, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate the second access site and a common bearer is disposed between the first gateway device, where the common bearer is used to transmit data of the at least one mobile device, including the target mobile device, and a sending unit, configured to send the second access site from the mobile device a data, so that the second access station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or the receiving unit is configured to receive, by the first access station, the second access station to send The second data, and the sending unit is configured to forward the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is sent by the first gateway device by using the common Data for the second access site corresponding to the target mobile device.
结合第三方面, 在第三方面的第一种实现方式中, 该处理单元还用于确 定能够与该第二接入站点通信。  In conjunction with the third aspect, in a first implementation of the third aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine to be able to communicate with the second access site.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第二种实现方式中, 该 处理单元具体用于确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设 区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a second implementation manner of the third aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to determine that the second access site is in the same preset area, where the preset area is Each access site is capable of communicating with each other.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第三种实现方式中, 该 处理单元具体用于获取至少一个第一区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点的 小区标识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识、 小区列表和该至少一个第一区域指 示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第一区域指示 信息用于指示该小区列表中属于该第一区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的 小区标识; 或用于获取至少一个第二区域指示信息, 根据该第一接入站点的 跟踪区域标识、 该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识、 跟踪区域标识列表和该至 少一个第二区域指示信息,确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域,其中, 该第二区域指示信息用于指示该跟踪区域标识列表中属于该第二区域指示 信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识; 或用于获取至少一个第三区域指示 信息, 根据该第一接入站点的小区标识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识和该至 少一个第三区域指示信息,确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域,其中, 该第三区域指示信息用于指示属于该第三区域指示信息所对应的预设区域 的小区标识; 或用于获取至少一个第四区域指示信息, 根据该第一接入站点 的跟踪区域标识、该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识和该至少一个第四区域指 示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第四区域指示 信息用于指示属于该第四区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识。  With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a third implementation manner of the third aspect, the processing unit is configured to acquire, by the first access station, a cell identifier, the first The cell identifier, the cell list, and the at least one first area indication information of the second access station are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the first area indication information is used to indicate that the cell list belongs to The first area indicates the cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the information; or is used to obtain at least one second area indication information, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, and the tracking area identifier of the second access station The tracking area identifier list and the at least one second area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the second area indication information is used to indicate that the tracking area identifier list belongs to the second The tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the area indication information; or used to obtain at least one third area indicator And determining, according to the cell identifier of the first access site, the cell identifier of the second access site, and the at least one third area indication information, that the second access site is in the same preset area, where the The third area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information, or is used to acquire at least one fourth area indication information, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the first The tracking area identifier of the second access station and the at least one fourth area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the fourth area indication information is used to indicate that the fourth area indication information belongs to The tracking area identifier of the corresponding preset area.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第四种实现方式中, 该 处理单元具体用于从移动管理实体 MME或运营管理系统 OAM获取该至少 一个第一区域指示信息; 或用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第二区域 指示信息; 或用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第三区域指示信息; 或 用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第四区域指示信息。  With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fourth implementation manner of the third aspect, the processing unit is specifically configured to acquire the at least one first area indication information from the mobility management entity MME or the operation management system OAM; Obtaining the at least one second area indication information from the MME or the OAM; or acquiring the at least one third area indication information from the MME or the OAM; or acquiring the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第五种实现方式中, 该 接收单元具体用于接收该第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 该 第一切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示信息; 该处理单元具体用于从该第一 切换请求消息中, 获取该第一切换指示信息。 With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifth implementation manner of the third aspect, the receiving unit is specifically configured to receive a first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request The message includes the first handover indication information; the processing unit is specifically configured to use the first In the handover request message, the first handover indication information is obtained.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第六种实现方式中, 该 处理单元还用于获取该第二接入站点的路由信息; 该发送单元具体用于根据 该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一 数据。  With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixth implementation manner of the third aspect, the processing unit is further configured to acquire routing information of the second access site, where the sending unit is specifically configured to use the second interface The routing information of the inbound station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第七种实现方式中, 该 接收单元还用于接收该第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 该第 一切换请求消息包括该第二接入站点的路由信息; 该处理单元具体用于从该 第一切换请求消息中, 获取该第二接入站点的路由信息。  With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventh implementation manner of the third aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive a first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request The message includes routing information of the second access site. The processing unit is configured to obtain routing information of the second access site from the first handover request message.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第八种实现方式中, 该 发送单元还用于向该第二接入站点发送该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于 该第二接入站点根据该第一接入站点的路由信息, 向该第一接入站点发送该 第二数据。  With the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eighth implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send routing information of the first access site to the second access site, to facilitate the The second access station sends the second data to the first access station according to the routing information of the first access station.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第九种实现方式中, 该 发送单元具体用于该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送第一切换请求响 应消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第二接入站点从该第一切换请求响应消息中获取该第一接入站点 的路由信息。  With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a ninth implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending unit is specifically used by the first access station to send a first handover request response message to the second access site, where The first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site, so that the second access site obtains routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十种实现方式中, 该 发送单元具体用于该第一接入站点向 MME发送该第一接入站点的路由信 息, 以便于该 MME向该第二接入站点转发该第一接入站点的路由信息。  With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a tenth implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending unit is specifically used by the first access station to send routing information of the first access site to the MME, so as to facilitate the The MME forwards the routing information of the first access site to the second access site.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十一种实现方式中, 该发送单元还用于该第一接入站点向第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息, 该第二切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公 共承载, 以便于该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点, 以及  With the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eleventh implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send, by the first access station, second handover indication information to the third access site, where The second handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, so that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, and
该第三接入站点在该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接 入站点后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该目标移动设备的第三数据, 该第二 接入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据,和 /或该第二接 入站点在确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点后, 向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 该第三接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该 第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二 接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。 After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the third access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access The ingress station forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer, and/or the second access station determines that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site, Sending fourth data to the third access station, the third access station forwarding the same to the target mobile device The fourth data, where the fourth data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十二种实现方式中, 该发送单元还用于向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的小区标识或跟 踪区域标识, 以便于该第三接入站点在根据该第二接入站点的小区标识或跟 踪区域标识确定该第三接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域之后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第三数据, 其中, 该预设区域内的 各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  With the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twelfth implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send, to the third access station, a cell identifier or a tracking area identifier of the second access station. After the third access station determines that the third access station and the second access site are in the same preset area according to the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the second access station is in the second connection. The inbound station transmits third data from the mobile device, wherein each access station in the preset area is capable of communicating with each other.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十三种实现方式中, 该发送单元还用于向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的路由信息, 以便 于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送 来自该移动设备的第三数据。  With the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a thirteenth implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send, by the third access station, routing information of the second access site, to facilitate the The third access station sends third data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十四种实现方式中, 该处理单元还用于获取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 该发送单元还用于向该 第二接入站点发送该第三接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第二接入站点根据 第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入站点发送第四数据。  With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the fourteenth implementation manner of the third aspect, the processing unit is further configured to acquire routing information of the third access site; the sending unit is further configured to use the second The access station sends the routing information of the third access station, so that the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十五种实现方式中, 该发送单元还用于向该第二接入站点发送用于指示该目标移动设备已从该 第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点的第三切换指示信息, 以便于该第二接 入站点根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切 换至该第三接入站点。  In combination with the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifteenth implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send, to the second access station, an indication that the target mobile device has received the first connection The inbound station switches to the third handover indication information of the third access station, so that the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third Access site.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十六种实现方式中, 该处理单元还用于获取该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息; 用于根据 该第二测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三 接入站点。  With the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixteenth implementation manner of the third aspect, the processing unit is further configured to acquire second measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, and is configured to report the second measurement report according to the second measurement Information determining that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十七种实现方式中, 该发送单元还用于向目标移动设备发送至少一个第二测量指示信息, 该第二 测量指示信息包括第二目标载频的载频信息,该第二目标载频上配置有至少 一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第二测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个信 息: 第三测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指 示信息; 该接收单元还用于接收该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 该第二测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第二测量指示信息进行测量 后发送的; 其中, 该第三测量带宽指示信息用于指示第三测量带宽, 该第三 测量带宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 该第三测量带宽与第四测量带 宽相异, 该第四测量带宽用于配置在该第二目标载频上的第二非 MTC小区 的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的参考符号的配 置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量; 该子帧指示信息用 于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 In combination with the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the seventeenth implementation manner of the third aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send, to the target mobile device, at least one second measurement indication information, where the second measurement indication information includes The second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, and the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol The indication information, the at least one subframe indication information, the receiving unit is further configured to receive the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, The second measurement reporting information is sent by the target mobile device according to the second measurement indication information, where the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for the at least The measurement of an MTC cell, where the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, where the fourth measurement bandwidth is used to configure measurement of the second non-MTC cell on the second target carrier frequency; The reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the measurement of the reference symbol of the MTC cell, and the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the measurement of the MTC cell; the subframe indication information is used to indicate the subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十八种实现方式中, 该处理单元还用于确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。  In conjunction with the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eighteenth implementation manner of the third aspect, the processing unit is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第十九种实现方式中, 该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,该接入站点为基站设备或中继 设备。  In conjunction with the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a nineteenth implementation manner of the third aspect, the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station is a base station device or a relay device.
结合第三方面及其上述实现方式, 在第三方面的第二十种实现方式中, 该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。  With reference to the third aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the twentieth implementation manner of the third aspect, the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
第四方面, 提供了一种通信装置, 该装置包括: 发送单元, 用于向该第 一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息,该第一切换指示信息用于指示该第二接 入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 该公共承载用于传输包括目标移 动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据; 接收单元, 用于接收该第一接入站 点发送的来自该目标移动设备的第一数据, 并通过该公共承载向该第一网关 设备转发该第一数据;和 /或该发送单元还用于向该第一接入站点发送第二数 据, 以便于该第一接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该第 二数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标 移动设备相对应的数据。  A fourth aspect provides a communication device, where the device includes: a sending unit, configured to send, to the first access station, first handover indication information, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate the second access site and a common bearer is disposed between the first gateway device, where the common bearer is used to transmit data of the at least one mobile device, including the target mobile device, and a receiving unit, configured to receive, by the first access station, the mobile device from the target mobile device And the first data is forwarded to the first gateway device by the common bearer; and/or the sending unit is further configured to send the second data to the first access station, to facilitate the first access The site forwards the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
结合第四方面, 在第四方面的第一种实现方式中, 该第一接入站点与该 第二接入站点能够通信。  In conjunction with the fourth aspect, in a first implementation of the fourth aspect, the first access site and the second access site are capable of communicating.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第二种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的 各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a second implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the first access site and the second access site are in a same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第三种实现方式中, 该 发送单元具体用于向该第一接入站点发送第一切换请求消息, 其中, 该第一 切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示信息。 结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第四种实现方式中, 该 装置还包括: 处理单元, 用于获取该第一接入站点的路由信息; 该发送单元 具体用于根据该第一接入站点的路由信息, 向该第一接入站点发送该第二数 据。 With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a third implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending unit is configured to send a first handover request message to the first access site, where the first handover request message is The first switching indication information is included. With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fourth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the device further includes: a processing unit, configured to acquire routing information of the first access site; The routing information of the first access station sends the second data to the first access station.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第五种实现方式中, 该 接收单元还用于该第二接入站点接收该第一接入站点发送的第一切换请求 响应消息,其中,该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一接入站点的路由信息; 该处理单元具体用于从该第一切换请求响应消息中, 获取该第一接入站点的 路由信息。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by the second access station, the first handover request response message sent by the first access station, The first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site. The processing unit is configured to obtain routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第六种实现方式中, 该 接收单元还用于接收移动性管理实体 MME发送的该第一接入站点的路由信 息,其中,该第一接入站点的路由信息是该 MME从该第一接入站点获取的。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive routing information of the first access site that is sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the The routing information of an access station is obtained by the MME from the first access station.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第七种实现方式中, 该 发送单元还用于向该第一接入站点发送该第二接入站点的路由信息, 以便于 该第一接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送该 第一数据。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventh implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send routing information of the second access site to the first access site, to facilitate the An access station sends the first data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第八种实现方式中, 该 装置还包括: 处理单元, 用于确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至 第三接入站点; 该发送单元还用于向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 以便于 该第三接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该 第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相 对应的数据;和 /或该接收单元还用于接收该第三接入站点发送的来自该目标 移动设备的第三数据, 并通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数 据。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eighth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the apparatus further includes: a processing unit, configured to determine that the target mobile device is switched from the first access station to the third access The sending unit is further configured to send the fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is the first gateway And the data sent by the device to the second access station corresponding to the target mobile device; and/or the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by the third access station, a third from the target mobile device Data, and forwarding the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第九种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点与该第三接入站点能够通信。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a ninth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the first access station and the third access station can communicate with each other.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点与该第三接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的 各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a tenth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十一种实现方式中, 该接收单元还用于接收该第一接入站点发送的第三切换指示信息, 该第三切 换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接 入站点; 该处理单元具体用于根据该第三切换指示信息, 确定该目标移动设 备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。 With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eleventh implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive, by the first access station, third handover indication information, where the third cut The change indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has been switched from the first access site to the third access site; the processing unit is configured to determine, according to the third handover indication information, the target mobile device from the first The access site switches to the third access site.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十二种实现方式中, 该接收单元还用于接收 MME发送的第三切换指示信息, 该第三切换指示信 息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点, 该 第三切换指示信息是该第三接入站点发送给该 MME的; 该处理单元具体用 于根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至 该第三接入站点。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twelfth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate the target The mobile device has been switched from the first access station to the third access station, where the third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME. The processing unit is specifically configured to use the third handover indication according to the third handover indication. Information determining that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十三种实现方式中, 该处理单元还用于获取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 该发送单元具体用于根 据该第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入站点发送该第四数据。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a thirteenth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the processing unit is further configured to acquire routing information of the third access station, where the sending unit is specifically configured to use the third The routing information of the access station is sent to the third access station.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十四种实现方式中, 该接收单元还用于接收该第一接入站点发送的该第三接入站点的路由信息。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fourteenth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive routing information of the third access site that is sent by the first access station.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十五种实现方式中, 该接收单元还用于接收 MME发送的该第三接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 该 第三接入站点的路由信息是该 MME从该第三接入站点获取的。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifteenth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the receiving unit is further configured to receive routing information of the third access site that is sent by the MME, where the third access The routing information of the site is obtained by the MME from the third access site.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十六种实现方式中, 该发送单元还用于向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的路由信息, 以便 于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送 该第三数据。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixteenth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send the routing information of the second access site to the third access site, to facilitate the The third access station sends the third data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十七种实现方式中, 该装置还包括: 处理单元, 用于获取该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信 息; 用于根据该第一测量上报信息, 确定该目标移动设备从该第二接入站点 切换至该第一接入站点。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventeenth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the device further includes: a processing unit, configured to acquire first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; The first measurement reporting information determines that the target mobile device switches from the second access station to the first access station.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十八种实现方式中, 该发送单元还用于向目标移动设备发送至少一个第一测量指示信息, 该第一 测量指示信息包括第一目标载频的载频信息, 该第一目标载频上配置有至少 一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第一测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个信 息: 第一测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指 示信息; 该接收单元还用于接收该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息, 该第一测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第一测量指示信息进行测量 后发送的; 其中, 该第一测量带宽指示信息用于指示第一测量带宽, 该第一 测量带宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 该第一测量带宽与第二测量带 宽相异, 该第二测量带宽用于配置在该第一目标载频上的第一非 MTC小区 的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的参考符号的配 置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量; 该子帧指示信息用 于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eighteenth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the sending unit is further configured to send, to the target mobile device, at least one first measurement indication information, where the first measurement indication information includes Carrier frequency information of a target carrier frequency, the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, and the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: first measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol The indication information, the at least one subframe indication information, the receiving unit is further configured to receive the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, The first measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the first measurement indication information, where the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the first measurement bandwidth, and the first measurement bandwidth is used for the at least The measurement of an MTC cell, where the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, where the second measurement bandwidth is used to configure measurement of the first non-MTC cell on the first target carrier frequency; The reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the measurement of the reference symbol of the MTC cell, and the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the measurement of the MTC cell; the subframe indication information is used to indicate the subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第十九种实现方式中, 该装置还包括:处理单元,用于确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。  In conjunction with the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a nineteenth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the apparatus further includes: a processing unit, configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第二十种实现方式中, 该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,该接入站点为基站设备或中继 设备。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twentieth implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station is a base station device or a relay device.
结合第四方面及其上述实现方式, 在第四方面的第二十一种实现方式 中, 该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。  With reference to the fourth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the twenty-first implementation manner of the fourth aspect, the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
第五方面, 提供了一种通信设备, 该设备包括: 总线; 与该总线相连的 处理器; 与该总线相连的存储器; 与该总线相连的收发器; 其中, 该处理器 通过该总线, 调用该存储器中存储的程序, 以用于获取第二接入站点发送的 第一切换指示信息, 该第一切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网 关设备之间设有公共承载, 该公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至 少一个移动设备的数据; 用于控制该收发器向该第二接入站点发送来自该移 动设备的第一数据, 以便于该第二接入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设 备转发该第一数据;和 /或用于控制该收发器接收该第二接入站点发送的第二 数据, 并控制该收发器向该目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该第二数 据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动 设备相对应的数据。  In a fifth aspect, a communication device is provided, the device comprising: a bus; a processor connected to the bus; a memory connected to the bus; a transceiver connected to the bus; wherein the processor is invoked through the bus a program stored in the memory, configured to obtain the first handover indication information sent by the second access station, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site and the first gateway device have a common bearer The common bearer is configured to transmit data of the at least one mobile device including the target mobile device, configured to control the transceiver to send the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, to facilitate the second connection The inbound station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer; and/or controls the transceiver to receive the second data sent by the second access station, and controls the transceiver to the target mobile device Forwarding the second data, where the second data is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common The data corresponding to the mobile device.
结合第五方面, 在第五方面的第一种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于确定 能够与该第二接入站点通信。  In conjunction with the fifth aspect, in a first implementation of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to determine to be able to communicate with the second access site.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第二种实现方式中, 该 处理器具体用于确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区 域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a second implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to determine that the second access site is in the same preset area, where the preset area is Each access site is capable of communicating with each other.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第三种实现方式中, 该 处理器具体用于获取至少一个第一区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点的小 区标识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识、 小区列表和该至少一个第一区域指示 信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第一区域指示信 息用于指示该小区列表中属于该第一区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的小 区标识; 或用于获取至少一个第二区域指示信息, 根据该第一接入站点的跟 踪区域标识、 该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识、 跟踪区域标识列表和该至少 一个第二区域指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第二区域指示信息用于指示该跟踪区域标识列表中属于该第二区域指示 信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识; 或用于获取至少一个第三区域指示 信息, 根据该第一接入站点的小区标识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识和该至 少一个第三区域指示信息,确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域,其中, 该第三区域指示信息用于指示属于该第三区域指示信息所对应的预设区域 的小区标识; 或用于获取至少一个第四区域指示信息, 根据该第一接入站点 的跟踪区域标识、该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识和该至少一个第四区域指 示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第四区域指示 信息用于指示属于该第四区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识。 With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a third implementation manner of the fifth aspect, The processor is configured to obtain the at least one first area indication information, and determine, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, the cell list, and the at least one first area indication information. The second access site is in the same preset area, where the first area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier in the cell list that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information; or is used to obtain at least one The second area indication information is determined according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication information, and the second access station is determined In the same preset area, where the second area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information in the tracking area identification list, or used to acquire at least one third area. The indication information, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the The third area indication information is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the third area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information; Or for obtaining the at least one fourth area indication information, determining, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, and the at least one fourth area indication information, determining the second connection The inbound site is in the same preset area, and the fourth area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第四种实现方式中, 该 处理器具体用于从移动管理实体 MME或运营管理系统 OAM获取该至少一 个第一区域指示信息; 用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第二区域指示 信息; 用于从 MME或 OAM 获取该至少一个第三区域指示信息; 用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第四区域指示信息。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fourth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to acquire the at least one first area indication information from the mobility management entity MME or the operation management system OAM; Acquiring the at least one second area indication information from the MME or the OAM; and acquiring the at least one third area indication information from the MME or the OAM; and acquiring the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第五种实现方式中, 该 处理器具体用于控制该收发器接收该第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消 息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示信息; 用于从该第一切 换请求消息中, 获取该第一切换指示信息。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where The first handover request message includes the first handover indication information, and is configured to obtain the first handover indication information from the first handover request message.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第六种实现方式中, 该 处理器还用于获取该第二接入站点的路由信息; 用于控制该收发器根据该第 二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一数 据。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to obtain routing information of the second access site, and configured to control the transceiver according to the second connection The routing information of the inbound station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第七种实现方式中, 该 处理器具体用于控制该收发器接收该第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消 息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第二接入站点的路由信息; 用于从该 第一切换请求消息中, 获取该第二接入站点的路由信息。 With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventh implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the first handover request sent by the second access station. The first handover request message includes the routing information of the second access station, and is configured to obtain routing information of the second access site from the first handover request message.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第八种实现方式中, 该 处理器还用于控制该收发器向该第二接入站点发送该第一接入站点的路由 信息, 以便于该第二接入站点根据该第一接入站点的路由信息, 向该第一接 入站点发送该第二数据。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eighth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, The second access station sends the second data to the first access station according to the routing information of the first access station.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第九种实现方式中, 该 处理器具体用于控制该收发器向该第二接入站点发送第一切换请求响应消 息, 其中, 该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便 于该第二接入站点从该第一切换请求响应消息中获取该第一接入站点的路 由信息。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a ninth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send a first handover request response message to the second access site, where The first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site, so that the second access site obtains routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十种实现方式中, 该 处理器还用于控制该收发器向 MME发送该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便 于该 MME向该第二接入站点转发该第一接入站点的路由信息。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a tenth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME The second access station forwards routing information of the first access site.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十一种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于控制该收发器向第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息, 该第 二切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承 载, 以便于该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点, 以及 该第三接入站点在该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站 点后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该目标移动设备的第三数据, 该第二接入 站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据,和 /或该第二接入站 点在确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点后, 向该 第三接入站点发送第四数据, 该第三接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第四 数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入 站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eleventh implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send second handover indication information to the third access station, where the second handover The indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, so that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, and the third access After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the ingress station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access site passes the The public bearer forwards the third data to the first gateway device, and/or the second access station determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site to the third The access station sends the fourth data, and the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is sent by the first gateway device to the second access by using the common The data of the site that corresponds to the target mobile device.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十二种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于控制该收发器向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的小 区标识或跟踪区域标识, 以便于该第三接入站点在根据该第二接入站点的小 区标识或跟踪区域标识确定该第三接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预 设区域之后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第三数据, 其中, 该 预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十三种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于控制该收发器向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的路 由信息, 以便于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二 接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第三数据。 With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twelfth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the cell identifier of the second access site to the third access station. Or tracking the area identifier, so that the third access station determines that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area according to the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the second access station, The second access station sends third data from the mobile device, wherein each access station in the preset area is capable of communicating with each other. With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a thirteenth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the routing information of the second access site to the third access site. The third access station sends the third data from the mobile device to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十四种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于获取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 用于控制该收发器向该第 二接入站点发送该第三接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第二接入站点根据第 三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入站点发送第四数据。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fourteenth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access site, and configured to control the transceiver to the second The access station sends the routing information of the third access station, so that the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十五种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于控制该收发器向该第二接入站点发送用于指示该目标移动 设备已从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点的第三切换指示信息, 以便 于该第二接入站点根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一 接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifteenth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the second access station, to indicate that the target mobile device has been The first access station switches to the third handover indication information of the third access station, so that the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site. To the third access site.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十六种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于获取该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息; 用于根据该 第二测量上 信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接 入站点。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixteenth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is further configured to acquire second measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, Information determining that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十七种实现方式中, 该处理器具体用于控制该收发器向目标移动设备发送至少一个第二测量指 示信息, 该第二测量指示信息包括第二目标载频的载频信息, 该第二目标载 频上配置有至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第二测量指示信息还包括 以下至少一个信息: 第三测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指示信息; 用于控制该收发器接收该目标移动设备发送的第二 测量上报信息,该第二测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第二测量指示 信息进行测量后发送的; 其中, 该第三测量带宽指示信息用于指示第三测量 带宽, 该第三测量带宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 该第三测量带宽 与第四测量带宽相异,该第四测量带宽用于配置在该第二目标载频上的第二 非 MTC小区的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的 参考符号的配置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量; 该子 帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventeenth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send at least one second measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the second measurement The indication information includes carrier frequency information of the second target carrier frequency, the second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, and the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: a third measurement bandwidth indication information, At least one reference symbol indication information, at least one subframe indication information, configured to control the transceiver to receive second measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, where the second measurement reporting information is that the target mobile device is configured according to the second measurement indication The third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, and the third measurement bandwidth is compared with the fourth measurement bandwidth. Different, the fourth measurement bandwidth is used to configure a second non-MTC on the second target carrier frequency The measurement of the area is used to indicate the configuration of the reference symbol of the corresponding MTC cell, where the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the measurement of the MTC cell; the subframe indication information is used to indicate the corresponding MTC cell. The subframe used.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十八种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。 With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eighteenth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, The processor is further operative to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第十九种实现方式中, 该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备, 该接入站点包括基站设备和 / 或中继设备。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a nineteenth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station comprises a base station device and/or a relay device .
结合第五方面及其上述实现方式, 在第五方面的第二十种实现方式中, 该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。  With reference to the fifth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the twentieth implementation manner of the fifth aspect, the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
第六方面, 提供了一种通信设备, 该设备包括: 总线; 与该总线相连的 处理器; 与该总线相连的存储器; 与该总线相连的收发器; 其中, 该处理器 通过该总线, 调用该存储器中存储的程序, 以用于控制该收发器向该第一接 入站点发送第一切换指示信息, 该第一切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站 点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 该公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设 备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据; 用于控制该收发器接收该第一接入站点 发送的来自该目标移动设备的第一数据, 并控制该收发器通过该公共承载向 该第一网关设备转发该第一数据;和 /或用于控制该收发器向该第一接入站点 发送第二数据, 以便于该第一接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该第二数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的 与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。  According to a sixth aspect, a communication device is provided, the device comprising: a bus; a processor connected to the bus; a memory connected to the bus; a transceiver connected to the bus; wherein the processor is invoked through the bus a program stored in the memory, configured to control the transceiver to send first handover indication information to the first access station, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate between the second access site and the first gateway device Generating a common bearer for transmitting data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; and controlling the transceiver to receive the first data sent by the first access site from the target mobile device, And controlling the transceiver to forward the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or for controlling the transceiver to send second data to the first access station, so as to facilitate the first access site. Forwarding the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is sent by the first gateway device to the second interface by using the common With the target mobile station device corresponding to the data.
结合第六方面, 在第六方面的第一种实现方式中, 该第一接入站点与该 第二接入站点能够通信。  In conjunction with the sixth aspect, in a first implementation of the sixth aspect, the first access site and the second access site are capable of communicating.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第二种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的 各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a second implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the first access site and the second access site are in a same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第三种实现方式中, 该 处理器具体用于控制该收发器向该第一接入站点发送第一切换请求消息, 其 中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示信息。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a third implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send a first handover request message to the first access site, where the A handover request message includes the first handover indication information.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第四种实现方式中, 该 处理器还用于获取该第一接入站点的路由信息; 用于控制该收发器根据该第 一接入站点的路由信息, 向该第一接入站点发送该第二数据。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fourth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is further configured to obtain routing information of the first access site, and configured to control the transceiver according to the first connection The routing information of the inbound station sends the second data to the first access station.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第五种实现方式中, 该 处理器具体用于控制该收发器接收该第一接入站点发送的第一切换请求响 应消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一接入站点的路由信息; 用于从该第一切换请求响应消息中 , 获取该第一接入站点的路由信息。 With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the first handover request response message sent by the first access station, where The first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site; And the routing information of the first access site is obtained from the first handover request response message.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第六种实现方式中, 该 处理器具体用于控制该收发器接收移动性管理实体 MME发送的该第一接入 站点的路由信息, 其中, 该第一接入站点的路由信息是该 MME从该第一接 入站点获取的。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the first access site that is sent by the mobility management entity MME, The routing information of the first access site is obtained by the MME from the first access site.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第七种实现方式中, 该 处理器还用于控制该收发器向该第一接入站点发送该第二接入站点的路由 信息, 以便于该第一接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接 入站点发送该第一数据。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventh implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is further configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the second access site to the first access site, The first access station sends the first data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第八种实现方式中, 该 处理器还用于确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至第三接入站点; 用于控制该收发器向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 以便于该第三接入站点 向该目标移动设备转发该第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网关设备通 过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据; 和 / 或用于控制该收发器接收该第三接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备的第 三数据, 并通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eighth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is to be switched from the first access site to the third access site; Controlling the transceiver to send fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is that the first gateway device passes the public Passing data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access station; and/or for controlling the transceiver to receive third data from the target mobile device sent by the third access station, and The public bearer forwards the third data to the first gateway device.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第九种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点与该第三接入站点能够通信。  In conjunction with the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a ninth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the first access station and the third access station are capable of communicating.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十种实现方式中, 该 第一接入站点与该第三接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的 各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the tenth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each part in the preset area Access sites are able to communicate with each other.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十一种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于控制该收发器接收该第一接入站点发送的第三切换指示信 息, 该第三切换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换 至该第三接入站点; 用于根据该第三切换指示信息, 确定该目标移动设备从 该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in an eleventh implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is further configured to control, by the transceiver, the third handover indication information that is sent by the first access station, where The third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has been handed over from the first access site to the third access site, and configured to determine, according to the third handover indication information, the target mobile device from the first access site Switch to the third access site.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十二种实现方式中, 该处理器具体用于控制该收发器接收 MME发送的第三切换指示信息, 该第 三切换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换至该第 三接入站点, 该第三切换指示信息是该第三接入站点发送给该 MME的; 用 于根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至 该第三接入站点。 With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twelfth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control, by the transceiver, the third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used by Instructing the target mobile device to switch from the first access station to the third access station, the third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME; and according to the third handover indication Information determining that the target mobile device is switched from the first access site to The third access site.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十三种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于获取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 用于控制该收发器根据该 第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入站点发送该第四数据。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a thirteenth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is further configured to acquire routing information of the third access station, and to control the transceiver according to the third The routing information of the access station is sent to the third access station.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十四种实现方式中, 该处理器具体用于控制该收发器接收该第一接入站点发送的该第三接入站 点的路由信息。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the fourteenth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the route of the third access site sent by the first access station. information.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十五种实现方式中, 该处理器具体用于控制该收发器接收 MME发送的该第三接入站点的路由信 息,其中,该第三接入站点的路由信息是该 MME从该第三接入站点获取的。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a fifteenth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control, by the transceiver, the routing information of the third access site that is sent by the MME, where The routing information of the third access station is obtained by the MME from the third access station.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十六种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于控制该收发器向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的路 由信息, 以便于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二 接入站点发送该第三数据。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a sixteenth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the routing information of the second access site to the third access site. The third access station sends the third data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十七种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于获取该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息; 用于根据该 第一测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第二接入站点切换至该第一接 入站点。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a seventeenth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is further configured to acquire, by using the first measurement report information that is sent by the target mobile device, Information determining that the target mobile device is handed over from the second access site to the first access site.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十八种实现方式中, 该处理器具体用于控制该收发器向目标移动设备发送至少一个第一测量指 示信息, 该第一测量指示信息包括第一目标载频的载频信息, 该第一目标载 频上配置有至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第一测量指示信息还包括 以下至少一个信息: 第一测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指示信息; 用于控制该收发器接收该目标移动设备发送的第一 测量上报信息,该第一测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第一测量指示 信息进行测量后发送的; 其中, 该第一测量带宽指示信息用于指示第一测量 带宽, 该第一测量带宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 该第一测量带宽 与第二测量带宽相异,该第二测量带宽用于配置在该第一目标载频上的第一 非 MTC小区的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的 参考符号的配置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量; 该子 帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第十九种实现方式中, 该处理器还用于确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。 With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the eighteenth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send the at least one first measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the first measurement The indication information includes carrier frequency information of the first target carrier frequency, and the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, and the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: first measurement bandwidth indication information, At least one reference symbol indication information, at least one subframe indication information, configured to control the transceiver to receive the first measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, where the first measurement reporting information is that the target mobile device is configured according to the first measurement indication The first measurement bandwidth is used to indicate the first measurement bandwidth, where the first measurement bandwidth is used for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, and the first measurement bandwidth is compared with the second measurement bandwidth. The second measurement bandwidth is used to configure the measurement of the first non-MTC cell on the first target carrier frequency. The reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of the corresponding MTC cell, where the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for measurement of the MTC cell; the subframe indication information is used to indicate that the corresponding MTC cell is used. Subframe. In conjunction with the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a nineteenth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the processor is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第二十种实现方式中, 该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备, 该接入站点包括基站设备和 / 或中继设备。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in a twentieth implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, where the access station includes a base station device and/or a relay device .
结合第六方面及其上述实现方式, 在第六方面的第二十一种实现方式 中, 该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。  With reference to the sixth aspect and the foregoing implementation manner, in the twenty-first implementation manner of the sixth aspect, the routing information includes a transmission network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
本发明实施例的通信方法、 通信装置和通信设备, 通过在目标移动设备 从源站点切换至目的站点后, 继续通过设置有用于传输目标移动设备的数据 的公共承载的源站点传输该目标移动设备的数据,无需变更传输目标移动设 备的数据的公共承载, 从而, 能够减少因切换而产生的信令开销。 附图说明  The communication method, the communication device, and the communication device of the embodiment of the present invention continue to transmit the target mobile device through a source station provided with a common bearer for transmitting data of the target mobile device after the target mobile device switches from the source site to the destination site. The data does not need to change the common bearer of the data of the transmission target mobile device, and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced. DRAWINGS
为了更清楚地说明本发明实施例的技术方案, 下面将对实施例或现有技 术描述中所需要使用的附图作筒单地介绍, 显而易见地, 下面描述中的附图 仅仅是本发明的一些实施例, 对于本领域普通技术人员来讲, 在不付出创造 性劳动的前提下, 还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。  In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present invention, the drawings to be used in the embodiments or the description of the prior art will be briefly described below. Obviously, the drawings in the following description are only the present invention. For some embodiments, other drawings may be obtained from those of ordinary skill in the art without departing from the drawings.
图 1是本发明一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图。  FIG. 1 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图 2是表示本发明实施例的公共承载的结构的示意图。  2 is a schematic diagram showing the structure of a common bearer according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图 3是本发明另一实施例的通信方法的示意性流程图。  FIG. 3 is a schematic flowchart of a communication method according to another embodiment of the present invention.
图 4是本发明一实施例的通信装置的示意性框图。  4 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图 5是本发明另一实施例的通信装置的示意性框图。  Figure 5 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device in accordance with another embodiment of the present invention.
图 6是本发明一实施例的通信设备的示意性结构图。  FIG. 6 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
图 7是本发明另一实施例的通信设备的示意性结构图。 具体实施方式  FIG. 7 is a schematic structural diagram of a communication device according to another embodiment of the present invention. detailed description
下面将结合本发明实施例中的附图,对本发明实施例中的技术方案进行 清楚、 完整地描述, 显然, 所描述的实施例是本发明一部分实施例, 而不是 全部的实施例。 基于本发明中的实施例, 本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创 造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其他实施例, 都属于本发明保护的范围。  The technical solutions in the embodiments of the present invention are clearly and completely described in the following with reference to the accompanying drawings in the embodiments of the present invention. It is obvious that the described embodiments are a part of the embodiments of the present invention, and not all of the embodiments. All other embodiments obtained by a person of ordinary skill in the art based on the embodiments of the present invention without making creative labor are within the scope of the present invention.
具体地说,根据本发明实施例的通信方法 100可以适用于各种能够进行 机器类型通信(或者说, 为能够进行机器类型通信的设备服务)的系统, 例 如: 全球移动通讯系统 ( GSM, Global System of Mobile communication ), 码 分多址 (CDMA , Code Division Multiple Access ) 系统, 宽带码分多址 ( WCDMA, Wideband Code Division Multiple Access Wireless ), 通用分组无 线业务(GPRS , General Packet Radio Service ), 长期演进(LTE, Long Term Evolution ), 机械型通信(MTC, Machine Type Communications )等等。 以 下, 为了便于理解, 以将本发明实施例的通信适用于 LTE系统时的实现过程 和方法为例, 进行说明。 In particular, the communication method 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention can be applied to various types of enabling A system for machine type communication (or, for example, a device capable of machine type communication), such as: Global System of Mobile Communication (GSM), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA), Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA), General Packet Radio Service (GPRS), Long Term Evolution (LTE), Mechanical Type Communications (MTC), etc. Wait. Hereinafter, in order to facilitate understanding, an implementation process and method when the communication of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to an LTE system will be described as an example.
图 1示出了从目的接入站点(第一接入节点)角度的根据本发明实施例 的通信方法 100的示意性流程图, 如图 1所示, 该方法 100包括:  FIG. 1 shows a schematic flow chart of a communication method 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention from the perspective of a destination access station (first access node). As shown in FIG. 1, the method 100 includes:
S110,接入站点中的第一接入站点获取第二接入站点发送的第一切换指 示信息,该第一切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间 设有公共承载,该公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动 设备的数据;  S110. The first access station in the access site acquires the first handover indication information sent by the second access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site is located between the second access site and the first gateway device. a public bearer for transmitting data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
S120,该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一数 据, 以便于该第二接入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第一数 据; 和 /或  S120, the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station, so that the second access station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and / or
S120' , 该第一接入站点接收该第二接入站点发送的第二数据, 并向该 目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该第二数据是该第一网关设备通过该 公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。  S120', the first access station receives the second data sent by the second access station, and forwards the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is that the first gateway device passes the public access Data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent to the second access site.
并且,在本发明实施例中,该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备, 该接入站点为基站设备或中继设备。  Moreover, in the embodiment of the present invention, the mobile device includes a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, and the access station is a base station device or a relay device.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 移动设备例如, 可以是用户设备(UE, User Equipment ),也可称之为移动终端( Mobile Terminal ),移动用户设备等, 可以经无线接入网(例如, RAN, Radio Access Network )与一个或多个核心 网进行通信, 用户设备可以是移动终端, 如移动电话(或称为"蜂窝"电话) 和具有移动终端的计算机, 例如, 可以是便携式、 袖珍式、 手持式、 计算机 内置的或者车载的移动装置, 它们与无线接入网交换语言和 /或数据。 另外, 需要说明的是, 在本发明实施例中, 用户设备能够进行机器类型通信。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the mobile device may be, for example, a user equipment (UE, User Equipment), or a mobile terminal (Mobile Terminal), a mobile user equipment, or the like, and may be connected to the radio access network ( For example, RAN, Radio Access Network) communicates with one or more core networks, which may be mobile terminals, such as mobile phones (or "cellular" phones) and computers with mobile terminals, for example, may be portable, Pocket, handheld, computer built-in or in-vehicle mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with a wireless access network. In addition, it should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present invention, the user equipment is capable of performing machine type communication.
或者, 在本发明实施例中, 移动设备例如, 可以是移动中继设备, 该移 动中继设备可以列举移动接入点 ( AP , Access Point )。 接入站点可以是 GSM 或 CDMA 中的基站 (BTS , Base Transceiver Station ), 也可以是 WCDMA中的基站(NodeB ), 还可以是 LTE中的演进 型基站(eNB或 e-NodeB, evolutional Node B )„ 另夕卜, 接入站点可以是微基 站(Micro ), 也可以是微微基站(Pico ), 还可以是家庭基站, 也可称之为毫 微微蜂窝基站 ( femto )或接入点 (AP, Access Point ), 本发明并不限定。 以下, 为了便于理解, 以 eNB 为例, 对接入站点的动作进行说明。 需要说 明的是,在本发明实施例中接入站点可以控制移动设备在多个小区之间进行 接入、 切换或重选等动作, 并且, 该过程可以与现有技术相同。 Alternatively, in the embodiment of the present invention, the mobile device may be, for example, a mobile relay device, and the mobile relay device may enumerate a mobile access point (AP, Access Point). The access station may be a base station (BTS, Base Transceiver Station) in GSM or CDMA, or a base station (NodeB) in WCDMA, or an evolved base station (eNB or e-NodeB, evolved Node B) in LTE. In addition, the access station may be a micro base station (Micro), a pico base station (Pico), or a home base station, or a femto base station (femto) or an access point (AP, Access Point), the present invention is not limited. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the operation of the access site will be described by taking the eNB as an example. It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station can control the mobile device at the same time. The operations of accessing, switching, or reselecting between cells are performed, and the process can be the same as the prior art.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 当前为 UE (目标移动设备)服务的接 入站点, 即, 源站点 (第二接入点), 以下, 为了便于理解和区分, 称为接 入站点 A可以通过公共承载来传输该 UE的数据。 这里, 需要说明的是, 该 数据是指用户面的数据, 并不包括控制面的信令。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, an access site currently serving a UE (target mobile device), that is, a source site (second access point), is hereinafter referred to as an access site for ease of understanding and differentiation. A can transmit the data of the UE through a common bearer. Here, it should be noted that the data refers to data of the user plane, and does not include signaling of the control plane.
图 2示出了公共承载的结构, 如图 2所示, 该公共承载可以包括中继公 共承载和基站公共承载, 基站公共承载设置在基站设备与网关设备之间, 中 继公共承载设置在中继接入站点与基站之间。 因此, 在本发明实施例中, 当 该第二接入点为基站设备时, 该公共承载是指基站公共承载。 当该第二接入 点为中继接入站点时, 该公共承载包括中继公共承载和基站公共承载双方。  Figure 2 shows the structure of a common bearer. As shown in Figure 2, the common bearer may include a relay common bearer and a base station common bearer. The base station common bearer is set between the base station device and the gateway device, and the relay common bearer is set in the middle. Between the access site and the base station. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the second access point is a base station device, the common bearer refers to a base station common bearer. When the second access point is a relay access station, the common bearer includes a relay common bearer and a common bearer of the base station.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 在该第一接入站点向该第三接入站点发送 第二切换指示信息之前, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, before the first access site sends the second handover indication information to the third access site, the method further includes:
该第一接入站点获取该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息; 该第一接入站点根据该第二测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第 一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  The first access station acquires the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the first access station determines, according to the second measurement report information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third Access site.
具体地说, 例如, 当 UE在系统中移动时, 存在当前服务小区 (或接入 站点 A ) 的通信质量降低或不能继续为该 UE服务的情况, 从而需要执行切 换流程, UE的移动性(或者说, 切换)可以通过 UE的测量和上报来实现, 即, 接入站点 A可以根据来自 UE的测量上报消息, 来控制该 UE的切换。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 上述过程及方法可以与现有技术相同, 这里, 为 了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  Specifically, for example, when the UE moves in the system, there is a case where the communication quality of the current serving cell (or the access station A) is reduced or cannot continue to serve the UE, so that the handover procedure, the mobility of the UE needs to be performed (or The handover can be implemented by the measurement and reporting of the UE, that is, the access station A can control the handover of the UE according to the measurement report message from the UE. Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, the above-described processes and methods may be the same as those in the prior art, and the description thereof will be omitted herein to avoid redundancy.
另外, 现有技术中, MTC小区和传统小区(非 MTC小区)可能具有相 同的载频 (也可以称为中心频点), 但带宽上存在很大的差异, 例如, 传统 小区的带宽为 20MHz, 而 MTC小区的带宽通常为 1.4MHz。 目前, 对系统 小区测量, 例如, RRM 测量是通过以下方式实现, 即, 基站为用户设备配 置测量使用的参数, 即, "测量对象(Measurement Object )" , 以使用户设备 根据该测量对象对系统小区的测量。 一个载频只会配置一个唯一的 "测量对 象",并且,该"测量对象"中包含用于指示测量使用的带宽的参数, 即, "测 量带宽"。 用户设备根据该测量带宽对该载频上各小区进行测量。 然而, 因 为 MTC小区是窄带的, 如果要保证 MTC小区的测量, 则只能将测量带宽 设定为窄带宽, 但是, 如果用户设备还需要测量该载频上的其他小区(传统 小区), 则该窄带宽的测量带宽会影响该传统小区的测量效果。 同样, 如果 为了确保对传统小区的测量效果而使用宽带宽的测量带宽,则会影响该 MTC 小区的测量效果。 In addition, in the prior art, the MTC cell and the legacy cell (non-MTC cell) may have the same carrier frequency (which may also be referred to as a center frequency point), but there is a big difference in bandwidth. For example, the bandwidth of the traditional cell is 20 MHz. The bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz. Currently, on the system Cell measurement, for example, RRM measurement is implemented by the base station configuring the parameters used by the user equipment for measurement, ie, "Measurement Object", so that the user equipment measures the system cell according to the measurement object. A carrier frequency is only configured with a unique "measurement object", and the "measurement object" contains a parameter for indicating the bandwidth used for measurement, that is, "measurement bandwidth". The user equipment measures each cell on the carrier frequency according to the measurement bandwidth. However, since the MTC cell is narrowband, if the measurement of the MTC cell is to be ensured, the measurement bandwidth can only be set to a narrow bandwidth, but if the user equipment also needs to measure other cells (traditional cells) on the carrier frequency, The measurement bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth affects the measurement effect of the conventional cell. Also, if a measurement bandwidth of a wide bandwidth is used in order to ensure a measurement effect on a legacy cell, the measurement effect of the MTC cell is affected.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 一个载频上即配置有 MTC小区又配置 有非 MTC小区时,接入站点 A可以为 MTC小区和非 MTC小区配置不同的 测量对象, 具体地说, 是测量带宽, 其中, 用于测量非 MTC小区的测量带 宽(第二测量带宽)的配置方法和数值可以与现有技术相似, 这里为了避免 赘述, 省略其说明。 并且, 接入站点 A可以根据 MTC小区的带宽, 设置用 于测量该 MTC小区的测量带宽(第一测量带宽), 例如, 由于 MTC小区的 带宽通常为 1.4MHz,因此,接入站点 A可以将该第一测量带宽设为 1.4MHz, 即, 与该 MTC小区的带宽相同, 或者, 接入站点 A也可以将该第一测量带 宽的数值设为小于 MTC小区的带宽, 本发明并未特别限定。 UE在获取各 MTC小区的测量带宽 (第一测量带宽)后, 可以根据该测量带宽对各 MTC 小区进行测量, 并且, 在本发明实施例中, UE根据测量带宽对 MTC小区进 行测量的方法和过程与现有技术相似, 这里为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  On the other hand, in the embodiment of the present invention, when a carrier frequency is configured with an MTC cell and a non-MTC cell, the access station A may configure different measurement objects for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell, specifically, It is a measurement bandwidth, and the configuration method and value for measuring the measurement bandwidth (second measurement bandwidth) of the non-MTC cell may be similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy. In addition, the access station A may set a measurement bandwidth (first measurement bandwidth) for measuring the MTC cell according to the bandwidth of the MTC cell. For example, since the bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz, the access site A may The first measurement bandwidth is set to be 1.4 MHz, that is, the bandwidth of the MTC cell is the same, or the access station A may set the value of the first measurement bandwidth to be smaller than the bandwidth of the MTC cell, which is not limited in the present invention. . After acquiring the measurement bandwidth (the first measurement bandwidth) of each MTC cell, the UE may perform measurement on each MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method for the UE to measure the MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth The process is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
根据本发明实施例的通信方法, 通过为同一载频上的 MTC 小区和非 MTC小区配置不同的测量带宽, 能够提高对双方的测量效果。  According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, by configuring different measurement bandwidths for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell on the same carrier frequency, the measurement effect on both sides can be improved.
另外, 现有技术中, MTC 小区可以根据传统小区的部分资源 (具体地 说, 是时频资源) 来配置, 即该 MTC 小区虽然是窄带宽的, 但用于对该 MTC 小区进行测量的参考符号却仍沿用传统小区 (宽带宽小区) 的参考符 号 (宽带宽的参考符号), 因此, 可能影响测量效果。  In addition, in the prior art, the MTC cell may be configured according to part of resources (specifically, time-frequency resources) of the traditional cell, that is, the MTC cell is narrow bandwidth, but is used for measurement of the MTC cell. The symbols still use the reference symbols of the traditional cell (wide bandwidth cell) (wide bandwidth reference symbols), and therefore may affect the measurement effect.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以通知 UE专用于测量 MTC小区的参考符号,这里, "专用于测量 MTC小区"是指,用于对该 MTC 小区进行测量的参考符号不仍沿用传统小区的参考符号, 而是与该 MTC小 区相对应, 具体地说, 是与 MTC小区的带宽相对应。 UE在获取各 MTC小 区的参考符号后, 可以根据该参考符号对各 MTC小区进行测量, 并且, 在 本发明实施例中, UE根据参考符号对 MTC小区进行测量的方法和过程与现 有技术相似, 这里为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。 In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may notify the UE that the reference symbol is dedicated to measuring the MTC cell. Here, "dedicated to measure the MTC cell" refers to a reference symbol used for measuring the MTC cell. The reference symbols of the traditional cell are not still used, but are small with the MTC. The area corresponds, specifically, to the bandwidth of the MTC cell. After acquiring the reference symbols of the MTC cells, the UE may perform measurement on each of the MTC cells according to the reference symbols, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and process for the UE to measure the MTC cells according to the reference symbols are similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
根据本发明实施例的通信方法, 通过接入站点 A根据 MTC小区指示用 户设备根据与该 MTC小区相对应侧参考符号对该 MTC小区进行测量, 能 够提高对 MTC小区的测量效果。  According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, the measurement of the MTC cell can be improved by the access station A instructing the user equipment to measure the MTC cell according to the reference symbol corresponding to the MTC cell according to the MTC cell.
另外, 现有技术中, 与测量非 MTC 小区的方式相同, 为了测量 MTC 小区, 用户设备需要连续地监听并测量每个子帧, 但是, MTC 小区可能仅 存在于部分子帧, 从而导致测量结果不准确。  In addition, in the prior art, in the same manner as the measurement of the non-MTC cell, in order to measure the MTC cell, the user equipment needs to continuously monitor and measure each subframe, but the MTC cell may exist only in a part of the subframe, thereby causing the measurement result not to be accurate.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以确定 MTC小区所属于 的子帧, 并通知 UE,从而, UE可以仅监听并测量包括该 MTC小区的子帧, 从而能够提高测量的准确性。  On the other hand, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A can determine the subframe to which the MTC cell belongs, and notify the UE, so that the UE can only monitor and measure the subframe including the MTC cell, thereby improving the measurement. accuracy.
接入站点 A在根据 UE的测量上报信息, 确定该 UE需要切换至目的站 点 (第一接入点, 以下为了便于理解和区分, 称为接入站点 B )后, 可以发 起切换流程, 以使该 UE从接入站点 A切换至接入站点 B , 在本发明实施例 中, 该切换流程与现有技术相似, 这里, 为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  The access station A may initiate a handover procedure according to the measurement report reported by the UE, and determine that the UE needs to be handed over to the destination site (the first access point, which is referred to as the access site B for ease of understanding and differentiation). In the embodiment of the present invention, the handover procedure is similar to the prior art in the embodiment of the present invention. Herein, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
在现有技术中, 在 UE切换至接入站点 B时, 接入站点 B需要将该 UE 的业务流映射至该接入站点 B的公共承载上, 特别是, 当该接入站点 B上 未设有公共承载的情况下, 该 UE的业务需要独立的 EPS承载, 另外, 接入 站点 A需要释放映射有该 UE的业务流的公共承载。 从而, 可能导致系统资 源的浪费, 信令开销也较大。  In the prior art, when the UE switches to the access site B, the access site B needs to map the service flow of the UE to the public bearer of the access site B, in particular, when the access site B does not In the case of a public bearer, the service of the UE needs a separate EPS bearer. In addition, the access site A needs to release the public bearer mapped with the service flow of the UE. As a result, system resources are wasted and signaling overhead is also large.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 在接入站点 A和接入站点 B可以通信, 具体地说, 能够进行数据通信的情况下, 接入站点 A可以向接入站点 B发 送指示该接入站点 A设有公共承载的信息 (第一切换指示信息), 从而在 S110,接入站点 B可以接收该第一切换指示信息, 并根据该第一切换指示信 息, 确定接入站点 A设有能够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载。  In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the access station A and the access station B can communicate, specifically, data communication is possible, the access station A can send an indication to the access station B. The access site A is provided with the information of the common bearer (the first handover indication information), so that the access site B can receive the first handover indication information, and the access site A is determined according to the first handover indication information. A common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该第一接入站点获取第二接入站点发送的 第一切换指示信息包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the acquiring, by the first access station, the first handover indication information sent by the second access site includes:
该第一接入站点接收该第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示信息; 该第一接入站点从该第一切换请求消息中 , 获取该第一切换指示信息。 具体地说,在本发明实施例中,接入站点 A可以将该第一切换指示信息 承载于切换请求消息 (第一切换请求消息) 中, 发送给接入站点 B, 从而, 接入站点 B可以从该切换请求消息中, 获取该第一切换指示信息。 Receiving, by the first access station, the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information; The first access station obtains the first handover indication information from the first handover request message. Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may carry the first handover indication information in the handover request message (the first handover request message), and send the information to the access site B, thereby accessing the site B. The first handover indication information may be obtained from the handover request message.
在 S120, 在上行时 (UE向服务器发送数据), 接入站点 B可以接收该 At S120, when uplink (the UE sends data to the server), the access station B can receive the
UE发送的数据(上行数据), 并将该上行数据转发给接入站点 A, 从而, 接 入站点 A 可以通过该公共承载将该上行数据发送给网关设备(第一网关设 备), 进而传输给服务器。 The data sent by the UE (uplink data) is forwarded to the access station A, so that the access station A can send the uplink data to the gateway device (the first gateway device) through the common bearer, and then transmit the data to the gateway device (the first gateway device). server.
在 S120' , 在下行时(服务器向 UE发送数据 ), 接入站点 A可以通过 该公共承载接收网关设备 (第一网关设备 )转发的来自服务器的数据(下行 数据), 并将该下行数据发送给接入站点 B, 从而, 接入站点 B可以将该下 行数据发送给 UE。  At S120', in the downlink (the server sends data to the UE), the access station A can receive the data (downlink data) from the server forwarded by the gateway device (the first gateway device) through the common bearer, and send the downlink data. The access station B is given, so that the access station B can send the downlink data to the UE.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the method further includes:
该第一接入站点确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。  The first access site determines that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
具体地说, 由于该公共承载用于机器类型通信, 因此, 例如, 在将本发 明实施例的通信方法 100适用于 LTE系统中时, 接入站点 A还可以确认该 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信, 并且, 在确定该 UE能够进行机器类型通 信时, 通过公共承载传输 UE 的数据 (具体地说, 是下行数据)。 同样, 接 入站点 B也可以确认该 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信, 并且, 在确定该 UE能够进行机器类型通信时, 通过公共承载传输 UE的数据(具体地说, 是上行数据), 器类型通信的方法, 可以列举以下方法:  Specifically, since the common bearer is used for machine type communication, for example, when the communication method 100 of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to an LTE system, the access station A can also confirm whether the UE can perform machine type communication. And, when it is determined that the UE can perform machine type communication, the data of the UE (specifically, downlink data) is transmitted through the common bearer. Similarly, the access station B can also confirm whether the UE can perform machine type communication, and when determining that the UE can perform machine type communication, transmit data of the UE (specifically, uplink data) through a common bearer, The method of communication can be exemplified by the following methods:
a. UE可以在入网或者切换时, 通过信令告知接入点(接入站点 A和接 入站点 B )该 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信。  a. The UE may inform the access point (access station A and access station B) whether the UE can perform machine type communication when entering the network or switching.
b. 接入点 (接入站点 A和接入站点 B ) 的上层网络侧设备, 例如, 移 动性管理实体(MME, Mobility Management Entity ) 可以从例如, 该 UE的 签约运营商, 获知该 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信, 从而, 接入点可以从 该 MME获知该 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信。  b. The upper-layer network side device of the access point (access site A and the access site B), for example, the Mobility Management Entity (MME), for example, the subscription carrier of the UE, whether the UE is known Machine type communication is enabled so that the access point can learn from the MME whether the UE is capable of machine type communication.
c 在该 UE是从接入站点 A切换至接入站点 B时, 且 UE已告知接入 站点 A该 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信的情况下,接入站点 B可以从接入 站点 A获知该 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信。  c. When the UE is handed over from the access site A to the access site B, and the UE has informed the access site A whether the UE is capable of machine type communication, the access site B can learn from the access site A. Whether the UE is capable of machine type communication.
应理解, 以上列举的方法 a~c仅为示例性说明, 本发明并不限定于此, 其他能够使接入点确定 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信的方法均落入本发明 的保护范围内。 It should be understood that the methods a to c listed above are merely illustrative, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Other methods that enable an access point to determine whether a UE is capable of machine type communication are within the scope of the present invention.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该方法还包括: 该第一接入站点确定能够 与该第二接入站点通信。  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the method further includes: the first access site determining to be able to communicate with the second access site.
具体地说, 由于通过接入站点 A 的公共承载发送已切换至接入站点 B 的 UE的数据, 需要建立在接入站点 A与接入站点 B能够通信的前提下, 因 此, 例如, 在将本发明实施例的通信方法 100适用于 LTE系统中时, 具体地 说,该 LTE系统中的部分或全部接入点能够通过例如,光纤或无线通信资源 传输数据时, 接入站点 B还可以确认是否能够与接入站点 A通信, 具体地 说, 使数据层面的通信, 同样, 在发送第一切换指示前, 接入站点 A还可以 确认是否能够与接入站点 B通信。 并且,作为确定是否能够进行数据通信的 方法, 可以列举以下方法:  Specifically, since the data of the UE that has switched to the access station B is transmitted through the public bearer of the access station A, it needs to be established on the premise that the access station A and the access station B can communicate, and therefore, for example, When the communication method 100 of the embodiment of the present invention is applicable to an LTE system, specifically, when some or all of the access points in the LTE system can transmit data through, for example, optical fiber or wireless communication resources, the access station B can also confirm Whether it is possible to communicate with the access site A, specifically, the communication at the data level, likewise, before the first handover indication is sent, the access site A can also confirm whether it can communicate with the access site B. Further, as a method of determining whether or not data communication is possible, the following methods can be cited:
可选地, 该第一接入站点确定能够与该第二接入站点通信, 包括: 该第一接入站点确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预 设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the first access station determines that the second access station can communicate with the second access station, where: the first access station determines that the second access site is in the same preset area, where the preset area is Each access site is capable of communicating with each other.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 当通信系统中的部分接入站点可以通过 例如, 光纤或无线通信资源传输数据时(例如, 在具体的某一地理区域(预 设区域的一例), 可以为该区域内的各接入点分配用于在彼此之间传输数据 的通信资源 ) , 例如, MME 或运营管理系统 ( OAM , Operation and Management )等能够管理接入站点的设备可以例如,从电信运营商获取能够 通信的接入站点的信息, 并向各接入站点下发指示能够进行数据通信的接入 站点的信息, 从而, 各接入点可以获知能够进行数据通信的对端接入站点。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, when a part of the access stations in the communication system can transmit data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource (for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area), Each access point in the area may be allocated a communication resource for transmitting data between each other), for example, an MME or an Operation Management System (OAM), etc., capable of managing an access site may, for example, The telecom operator obtains the information of the access station capable of communicating, and sends information to the access stations indicating the access stations capable of data communication, so that each access point can learn the peer access capable of data communication. Site.
应理解, 以上列举的预设区域的实现方式仅为示例性说明, 本发明并未 限定于此, 例如, 也可以对系统内能够进行通信的接入站点(例如, 位于同 一地理区域中的部分接入站点)进行标识, 并由具有该标识的接入点构成的 虚拟区域, 作为该预设区域。  It should be understood that the implementation manners of the preset areas listed above are merely exemplary, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, an access station capable of communicating in the system (for example, a part located in the same geographical area) may also be used. The access site is identified and the virtual area formed by the access point having the identifier is used as the preset area.
可选地, 该第一接入站点确定该第二接入站点处于预设区域包括: 该第一接入站点获取至少一个第一区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点 的小区标识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识、 小区列表和该至少一个第一区域 指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第一区域指 示信息用于指示该小区列表中属于该第一区域指示信息所对应的预设区域 的小区标识; 或 Optionally, the determining, by the first access station, that the second access site is in the preset area, the first access station acquiring the at least one first area indication information, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, The cell identifier, the cell list, and the at least one first area indication information of the second access station are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the first area indication information is used to indicate the cell list a preset area corresponding to the first area indication information Cell identity; or
该第一接入站点获取至少一个第二区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点 的跟踪区域标识、 该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识、 跟踪区域标识列表和该 至少一个第二区域指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其 中, 该第二区域指示信息用于指示该跟踪区域标识列表中属于该第二区域指 示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识; 或  Obtaining, by the first access station, at least one second area indication information, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication The information is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the second area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information in the tracking area identification list. ; or
该第一接入站点获取至少一个第三区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点 的小区标识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识和该至少一个第三区域指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第三区域指示信息用于 指示属于该第三区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的小区标识; 或  The first access station acquires at least one third area indication information, and determines, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the at least one third area indication information, The access site is in the same preset area, where the third area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information; or
该第一接入站点获取至少一个第四区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点 的跟踪区域标识、该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识和该至少一个第四区域指 示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第四区域指示 信息用于指示属于该第四区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识。  The first access station acquires at least one fourth area indication information, and determines, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, and the at least one fourth area indication information. The second access site is in the same preset area, where the fourth area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
并且,可选地,该第一接入站点获取至少一个第一区域指示信息, 包括: 第一接入站点从移动管理实体 MME或运营管理系统 OAM获取该至少 一个第一区域指示信息;  And optionally, the first access station acquires the at least one first area indication information, where: the first access station acquires the at least one first area indication information from the mobility management entity MME or the operation management system OAM;
该第一接入站点获取至少一个第二区域指示信息, 包括:  The first access site acquires at least one second area indication information, including:
第一接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第二区域指示信息; 该第一接入站点获取至少一个第三区域指示信息, 包括:  The first access station acquires the at least one second area indication information from the MME or the OAM; the first access station acquires the at least one third area indication information, including:
第一接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第三区域指示信息; 该第一接入站点获取至少一个第四区域指示信息, 包括:  The first access station acquires the at least one third area indication information from the MME or the OAM; the first access station acquires the at least one fourth area indication information, including:
第一接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第四区域指示信息。 具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, MME或 OAM可以例如, 从电信运营 商获取能够通信的接入站点的信息, 并向各接入站点下发指示能够进行数据 通信的接入站点的信息。  The first access station acquires the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM. Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the MME or the OAM may obtain, for example, information of an access station capable of communication from a telecommunication carrier, and send information to the access sites indicating an access site capable of data communication. .
例如, 由于小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表能够指示系统内的各接入站 点, 因此, MME或 OAM可以将位于同一预设区域的接入站点映射在该小 区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中, 并通知各接入点, 例如, 可以通知接入点位 于某一预设区域的所有接入点在该小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中的位置 (第一区域指示信息或第二区域指示信息), 从而包括所述接入站点 A和接 入站点 B在内的受该 MME或 OAM控制的接入点,可以根据 MME或 OAM 的指示, 从小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中, 确定能够进行数据通信的对端 接入站点。 For example, the MME or the OAM can map the access sites located in the same preset area to the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, and notify the eNB or the OAM. Each access point, for example, may notify a location of the access point that is located in a certain preset area in the cell identifier list or the tracking area list (first area indication information or second area indication information), thereby Including the access site A and the connection The access point controlled by the MME or the OAM, including the site B, can determine the peer access site capable of data communication from the cell identity list or the tracking area list according to the indication of the MME or the OAM.
再例如, MME或 OAM可以将位于同一预设区域的接入站点 (具体地 说, 是接入站点的小区标识或跟踪区域标识 )映射在一个表项中, 并下发给 位于该预设区域的各接入站点, 从而, 接入站点可以确定能够与小区标识或 跟踪区域标识处于同一表项的接入站点进行数据通信。  For example, the MME or the OAM can map the access site (specifically, the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the access site) in the same preset area to an entry and send it to the preset area. Each access station, such that the access station can determine data communication with an access site that is in the same entry as the cell identity or tracking area identity.
应理解, 以上列举了接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取指示预设区域的信 息的实施例, 但本发明并未限定于此, 例如, 还可以在预先将各预设区域的 信息存储在各接入站点内部,从而各接入站点从内部获取指示预设区域的信 息。  It should be understood that the foregoing describes an embodiment in which an access station obtains information indicating a preset area from an MME or an OAM, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, information of each preset area may be stored in advance in each connection. Entering the inside of the site, each access station obtains information indicating the preset area from the inside.
可选地, 该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一 数据, 包括:  Optionally, the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, including:
该第一接入站点获取该第二接入站点的路由信息;  The first access station acquires routing information of the second access site;
该第一接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发 送来自该移动设备的第一数据。  The first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 各接入站点之间可以根据路由信息来传 输数据(例如, 传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号), 因此, 接入站点 A需 要获取接入站点 B的路由信息。 同样, 接入站点 B需要获取接入站点 A的 路由信息。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 根据传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编 号传输数据的方法和过程可以与现有技术相似, 这里, 为了避免赘述, 省略 其说明。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, each access station may transmit data according to routing information (for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number), and therefore, the access site A needs to obtain an access site. B routing information. Similarly, access station B needs to obtain routing information of access station A. Moreover, in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and the process for transmitting data according to the transmission network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
可选地, 该第一接入站点接收该第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消 息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第二接入站点的路由信息;  Optionally, the first access station receives the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes routing information of the second access site;
该第一接入站点从该第一切换请求消息中, 获取该第二接入站点的路由 信息。  The first access station obtains routing information of the second access station from the first handover request message.
具体地说,在本发明实施例中,接入站点 A可以将其路由信息承载于切 换请求消息(第一切换请求消息) 中, 发送给接入站点 B, 从而, 接入站点 B可以从该切换请求消息中, 获取该接入站点 A的路由信息。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may carry its routing information in the handover request message (the first handover request message), and send it to the access site B, so that the access site B can In the handover request message, the routing information of the access site A is obtained.
同样, 在本发明实施例中, 各接入站点之间可以根据路由信息来传输数 据(例如, 传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号), 因此, 接入站点 B需要获 取接入站点 B的路由信息。 Similarly, in the embodiment of the present invention, each access station may transmit data according to routing information (for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number), and therefore, the access site B needs to be obtained. Take the routing information of access site B.
可选地, 在该第一接入站点接收该第二接入站点发送的第二数据之前, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, before the first access station receives the second data sent by the second access station, the method further includes:
该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以 便于该第二接入站点根据该第一接入站点的路由信息, 向该第一接入站点发 送该第二数据。  The first access station sends the routing information of the first access station to the second access station, so that the second access station sends the routing information to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site. Send the second data.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以通过例如信令消息等, 直接向接入站点 A发送其路由信息, 从而, 接入站点 A可以接收该路由信 息, 并根据该路由信息向接入站点 B发送数据。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B can directly send the routing information to the access station A by using, for example, a signaling message, so that the access station A can receive the routing information, and according to the route, The information is sent to the access site B.
可选地, 该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送该第一接入站点的路由 信息, 包括:  Optionally, the first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, including:
该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送第一切换请求响应消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第二接 入站点从该第一切换请求响应消息中获取该第一接入站点的路由信息。  The first access station sends a first handover request response message to the second access site, where the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site, so that the second access site is Obtaining routing information of the first access site in the first handover request response message.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B在接收到接入站点 B发送 的切换请求消息(第一切换请求消息)后, 可以向接入站点 A发送切换请求 响应消息 (第一切换请求响应消息), 因此, 接入站点 B可以将其路由信息 承载于切换请求响应消息(第一切换请求响应消息)中,发送给接入站点 A, 从而, 接入站点 A可以从该切换请求消息中, 获取该接入站点 A的路由信 息。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, after receiving the handover request message (first handover request message) sent by the access station B, the access station B may send a handover request response message to the access site A (first The handover request response message), therefore, the access station B can carry its routing information in the handover request response message (first handover request response message) and send it to the access site A, so that the access site A can switch from the handover site A. In the request message, the routing information of the access station A is obtained.
可选地, 该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送该第一接入站点的路由 信息, 包括:  Optionally, the first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, including:
该第一接入站点向 MME发送该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该 MME向该第二接入站点转发该第一接入站点的路由信息。  The first access station sends the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME forwards the routing information of the first access site to the second access site.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以通过例如信令消息等, 将其路由信息发送给接入站点 B的 MME, 接入站点 A的 MME将接入站点 B的路由信息转发给接入站点 A, 从而, 接入站点 A可以接收该路由信息, 并根据该路由信息向接入站点 B发送数据。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may send its routing information to the MME of the access station B by using, for example, a signaling message, and the MME of the access station A accesses the routing information of the station B. Forwarded to the access site A, the access site A can receive the routing information and send data to the access site B according to the routing information.
并且, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以将其路由信息承载于例如, 路径转换请求消息,发送给接入站点 A的 MME,从而,接入站点 B的 MME 也可以将接入站点 A的路由信息承载于例如,路径转换请求消息,发送给接 入站点 B。 In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may carry its routing information to, for example, a path switching request message, and send it to the MME of the access station A, so that the MME of the access station B may also access the access station. The routing information of A is carried, for example, in a path conversion request message, and is sent to the connection. Enter site B.
应理解,接入站点 B的 MME与接入站点 A的 MME可以相同,也可以 相异, 并且, 在接入站点 B的 MME与接入站点 A的 MME可以相异的情况 下, MME彼此之间能够进行通信。  It should be understood that the MME of the access site B may be the same as or different from the MME of the access site A, and in the case that the MME of the access site B and the MME of the access site A may be different, the MMEs Can communicate with each other.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送来 自该移动设备的第一数据, 包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, including:
该第一接入站点接收第一触发消息;  Receiving, by the first access station, a first trigger message;
该第一接入站点根据该第一触发消息, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移 动设备的第一数据。  The first access station sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the first trigger message.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以在确定接入站点 A能 够通过该公共承载发送该 UE的上行数据 (或者说, 接入站点 A确定 UE已 切换至接入站点 B )后, 向接入站点 A转发 UE的上行数据。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may determine that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer (or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access site B). After that, the uplink data of the UE is forwarded to the access station A.
可选地, 该第一触发消息包括: 该第二基站发送的第一切换完成消息、 移动性管理实体 MME发送的第一路径转换请求响应消息或该第二接入站点 发送的第一 end marker消息。  Optionally, the first trigger message includes: a first handover complete message sent by the second base station, a first path switch request response message sent by the mobility management entity MME, or a first end marker sent by the second access station. Message.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以根据该接入站点 A发 送的切换完成消息、 MME发送的路径转换请求响应消息或接入站点 B发送 的终止符 end marker消息, 确定接入站点 A能够通过该公共承载发送该 UE 的上行数据, 或者说, 接入站点 A确定 UE已切换至接入站点 B。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may be determined according to the handover complete message sent by the access site A, the path conversion request response message sent by the MME, or the terminator end marker message sent by the access station B. The access station A can transmit the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer, or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access station B.
同样, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以在确定接入站点 B能够向 该 UE发送下行数据 (或者说, UE已切换至接入站点 B )后, 向接入站点 B 转发 UE的下行数据。  Similarly, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may forward the UE to the access station B after determining that the access station B can send downlink data to the UE (or the UE has switched to the access station B). Downstream data.
并且, 在本发明实施例中,接入站点 A可以根据 MME发送的路径转换 请求消息, 确定接入站点 B能够向该 UE发送下行数据, 或者说, UE已切 换至接入站点 B。  In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may determine that the access station B can send downlink data to the UE according to the path switching request message sent by the MME, or the UE has switched to the access station B.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the method further includes:
该第一接入站点向第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息, 该第二切换指 示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 以便于 该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点, 以及  The first access station sends a second handover indication information to the third access site, where the second handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, so as to facilitate the target. The mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, and
该第三接入站点在该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接 入站点后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该目标移动设备的第三数据, 该第二 接入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据, 和 /或 After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the third access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, the second The access station forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer, and/or
该第二接入站点在确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第 三接入站点后, 向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 该第三接入站点向该目标 移动设备转发该第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共 承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。  After determining that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the second access station sends fourth data to the third access site, where the third access site goes to the target The mobile device forwards the fourth data, where the fourth data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
并且, 可选地, 在该第一接入站点向该第三接入站点发送第二切换指示 信息之前, 该方法还包括:  And, optionally, before the first access station sends the second handover indication information to the third access site, the method further includes:
该第一接入站点获取该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息; 该第一接入站点根据该第二测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第 一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  The first access station acquires the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the first access station determines, according to the second measurement report information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third Access site.
具体地说, 例如, 当 UE继续在系统中移动时, 存在当前服务小区 (或 接入站点 B ) 的通信质量降低或不能继续为该 UE服务的情况, 从而需要执 行切换流程, UE的移动性(或者说, 切换)可以通过 UE的测量和上报来 实现, 即, 接入站点 B可以根据来自 UE的测量上报消息, 来控制该 UE的 切换。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 上述过程及方法可以与现有技术相同, 这 里, 为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  Specifically, for example, when the UE continues to move in the system, there is a case where the communication quality of the current serving cell (or the access station B) is reduced or cannot continue to serve the UE, so that the handover procedure, the mobility of the UE needs to be performed ( In other words, the handover can be implemented by the measurement and reporting of the UE, that is, the access station B can control the handover of the UE according to the measurement report message from the UE. Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, the above-described processes and methods may be the same as those in the prior art, and the description thereof will be omitted in order to avoid redundancy.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该第一接入站点获取该目标移动设备发送 的第二测量上 信息, 包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the first access station acquires the second measurement information sent by the target mobile device, including:
该第一接入站点向目标移动设备发送至少一个第二测量指示信息, 该第 二测量指示信息包括第二目标载频的载频信息, 该第二目标载频上配置有至 少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第二测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个 信息: 第三测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧 指示信息;  The first access station sends at least one second measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the second measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the second target carrier frequency, and the second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication The MTC cell, the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: a third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
该第一接入站点接收该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 该第二 测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第二测量指示信息进行测量后发送 的;  Receiving, by the first access station, the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, where the second measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the second measurement indication information;
其中, 该第三测量带宽指示信息用于指示第三测量带宽, 该第三测量带 宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量,该第三测量带宽与第四测量带宽相异, 该第四测量带宽用于配置在该第二目标载频上的第二非 MTC小区的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的参考符号的配置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量; 该子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 The third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, and the fourth measurement bandwidth is different. Means for configuring a second non-MTC cell on the second target carrier frequency; the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of the corresponding MTC cell, where the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the MTC cell Measurement; The subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
具体地说, 现有技术中, MTC小区和传统小区(非 MTC小区)可能具 有相同的载频 (也可以称为中心频点), 但带宽上存在很大的差异, 例如, 传统小区的带宽为 20MHz, 而 MTC小区的带宽通常为 1.4MHz。 目前, 对 系统小区测量, 例如, RRM 测量是通过以下方式实现, 即, 基站为用户设 备配置测量使用的参数, 即, "测量对象(Measurement Object )" , 以使用户 设备根据该测量对象对系统小区的测量。 一个载频只会配置一个唯一的 "测 量对象", 并且, 该 "测量对象" 中包含用于指示测量使用的带宽的参数, 即, "测量带宽"。 用户设备根据该测量带宽对该载频上各小区进行测量。 然 而, 因为 MTC小区是窄带的, 如果要保证 MTC小区的测量, 则只能将测 量带宽设定为窄带宽, 但是, 如果用户设备还需要测量该载频上的其他小区 (传统小区), 则该窄带宽的测量带宽会影响该传统小区的测量效果。 同样, 如果为了确保对传统小区的测量效果而使用宽带宽的测量带宽, 则会影响该 MTC小区的测量效果。  Specifically, in the prior art, an MTC cell and a legacy cell (non-MTC cell) may have the same carrier frequency (which may also be referred to as a center frequency point), but there is a big difference in bandwidth, for example, the bandwidth of a traditional cell. It is 20 MHz, and the bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz. Currently, for system cell measurement, for example, RRM measurement is implemented by the base station configuring a parameter used for measurement by the user equipment, that is, a "Measurement Object", so that the user equipment is based on the measurement object to the system. Measurement of the cell. A carrier frequency is only configured with a unique "measurement object", and the "measurement object" contains a parameter for indicating the bandwidth used by the measurement, that is, "measurement bandwidth". The user equipment measures each cell on the carrier frequency according to the measurement bandwidth. However, since the MTC cell is narrowband, if the measurement of the MTC cell is to be ensured, the measurement bandwidth can only be set to a narrow bandwidth, but if the user equipment also needs to measure other cells (traditional cells) on the carrier frequency, The measurement bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth affects the measurement effect of the conventional cell. Similarly, if a measurement bandwidth of a wide bandwidth is used in order to ensure the measurement effect on a conventional cell, the measurement effect of the MTC cell is affected.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 一个载频上即配置有 MTC小区又配置 有非 MTC小区时,接入站点 B可以为 MTC小区和非 MTC小区配置不同的 测量对象, 具体地说, 是测量带宽, 其中, 用于测量非 MTC小区的测量带 宽(第二测量带宽)的配置方法和数值可以与现有技术相似, 这里为了避免 赘述, 省略其说明。 并且, 接入站点 B可以根据 MTC小区的带宽, 设置用 于测量该 MTC小区的测量带宽(第一测量带宽), 例如, 由于 MTC小区的 带宽通常为 1.4MHz,因此,接入站点 B可以将该第一测量带宽设为 1.4MHz, 即, 与该 MTC小区的带宽相同, 或者, 接入站点 B也可以将该第一测量带 宽的数值设为小于 MTC小区的带宽, 本发明并未特别限定。 UE在获取各 MTC小区的测量带宽 (第一测量带宽)后, 可以根据该测量带宽对各 MTC 小区进行测量, 并且, 在本发明实施例中, UE根据测量带宽对 MTC小区进 行测量的方法和过程与现有技术相似, 这里为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  On the other hand, in the embodiment of the present invention, when a carrier frequency is configured with an MTC cell and a non-MTC cell, the access station B may configure different measurement objects for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell, specifically, It is a measurement bandwidth, and the configuration method and value for measuring the measurement bandwidth (second measurement bandwidth) of the non-MTC cell may be similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy. In addition, the access station B can set the measurement bandwidth (the first measurement bandwidth) for measuring the MTC cell according to the bandwidth of the MTC cell. For example, since the bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz, the access station B can The first measurement bandwidth is set to be 1.4 MHz, that is, the bandwidth of the MTC cell is the same, or the access station B may set the value of the first measurement bandwidth to be smaller than the bandwidth of the MTC cell, which is not specifically limited in the present invention. . After acquiring the measurement bandwidth (the first measurement bandwidth) of each MTC cell, the UE may perform measurement on each MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method for the UE to measure the MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth The process is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
根据本发明实施例的通信方法, 通过为同一载频上的 MTC 小区和非 MTC小区配置不同的测量带宽, 能够提高对双方的测量效果。  According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, by configuring different measurement bandwidths for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell on the same carrier frequency, the measurement effect on both sides can be improved.
另外, 现有技术中, MTC 小区可以根据传统小区的部分资源 (具体地 说, 是时频资源) 来配置, 即该 MTC 小区虽然是窄带宽的, 但用于对该 MTC 小区进行测量的参考符号却仍沿用传统小区 (宽带宽小区) 的参考符 号 (宽带宽的参考符号), 因此, 可能影响测量效果。 In addition, in the prior art, the MTC cell may be configured according to part of resources (specifically, time-frequency resources) of the traditional cell, that is, the MTC cell is narrow bandwidth, but is used for measurement of the MTC cell. The symbol still uses the reference character of the traditional cell (wide bandwidth cell) The number (wide bandwidth reference symbol), therefore, may affect the measurement.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以通知 UE专用于测量 MTC小区的参考符号,这里, "专用于测量 MTC小区"是指,用于对该 MTC 小区进行测量的参考符号不仍沿用传统小区的参考符号, 而是与该 MTC小 区相对应, 具体地说, 是与 MTC小区的带宽相对应。 UE在获取各 MTC小 区的参考符号后, 可以根据该参考符号对各 MTC小区进行测量, 并且, 在 本发明实施例中, UE根据参考符号对 MTC小区进行测量的方法和过程与现 有技术相似, 这里为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may notify the UE to use the reference symbol for measuring the MTC cell. Here, "dedicated to measure the MTC cell" refers to a reference symbol used for measuring the MTC cell. The reference symbols of the legacy cell are not still used, but correspond to the MTC cell, specifically, the bandwidth of the MTC cell. After acquiring the reference symbols of the MTC cells, the UE may perform measurement on each of the MTC cells according to the reference symbols, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and process for the UE to measure the MTC cells according to the reference symbols are similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
根据本发明实施例的通信方法, 通过接入站点 B根据 MTC小区指示用 户设备根据与该 MTC小区相对应侧参考符号对该 MTC小区进行测量, 能 够提高对 MTC小区的测量效果。  According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B instructs the user equipment to measure the MTC cell according to the reference symbol corresponding to the MTC cell according to the MTC cell, so that the measurement effect on the MTC cell can be improved.
另外, 现有技术中, 与测量非 MTC 小区的方式相同, 为了测量 MTC 小区, 用户设备需要连续地监听并测量每个子帧, 但是, MTC 小区可能仅 存在于部分子帧, 从而导致测量结果不准确。  In addition, in the prior art, in the same manner as the measurement of the non-MTC cell, in order to measure the MTC cell, the user equipment needs to continuously monitor and measure each subframe, but the MTC cell may exist only in a part of the subframe, thereby causing the measurement result not to be accurate.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以确定 MTC小区所属于 的子帧, 并通知 UE,从而, UE可以仅监听并测量包括该 MTC小区的子帧, 从而能够提高测量的准确性。  On the other hand, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B can determine the subframe to which the MTC cell belongs, and notify the UE, so that the UE can only monitor and measure the subframe including the MTC cell, thereby improving the measurement. accuracy.
接入站点 B在根据 UE的测量上报信息, 确定该 UE需要切换至接入站 点 C (第三接入点 )后, 可以发起切换流程, 以使该 UE从接入站点 B切换 至接入站点 C, 在本发明实施例中, 该切换流程与现有技术相似, 这里, 为 了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  The access station B may initiate a handover procedure after the UE needs to switch to the access site C (the third access point) according to the measurement report information of the UE, so that the UE switches from the access site B to the access site. C. In the embodiment of the present invention, the handover procedure is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
在现有技术中, 在 UE切换至接入站点 C时, 接入站点 C需要将该 UE 的业务流映射至该接入站点 C的公共承载上, 特别是, 当该接入站点 C上 未设有公共承载的情况下, 该 UE的业务需要独立的 EPS承载。 从而, 可能 导致系统资源的浪费, 信令开销也较大。  In the prior art, when the UE switches to the access site C, the access site C needs to map the service flow of the UE to the public bearer of the access site C, in particular, when the access site C does not In the case of a public bearer, the UE's service requires a separate EPS bearer. As a result, system resources are wasted and signaling overhead is also large.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 在接入站点 A和接入站点 C可以通信, 具体地说, 能够进行数据通信的情况下,接入站点 C可以获取指示该接入站 点 A设有能够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载的信息 (第二切换指示信息 ), 从而, 接入站点 C可以根据该第二切换指示信息, 确定接入站点 A设有能 够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 由于接入站点 B能够获知接入节点 A设有能够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载, 因此, 接入 站点 B可以向指示该接入站点 A设有能够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载的信 息 (第二切换指示信息)。 In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the access site A and the access site C can communicate, specifically, data communication is possible, the access site C can obtain the indication that the access site A is provided. The information about the common bearer of the data of the UE (the second handover indication information) is transmitted, so that the access site C can determine, according to the second handover indication information, that the access site A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE. . In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B can learn that the access node A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE, and therefore, access The station B may provide information (second handover indication information) indicating that the access station A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE.
并且,接入站点 A获取指示该 UE切换至接入站点 C的信息(第三切换 指示信息), 从而, 接入站点 A可以根据该第三切换指示信息, 确定 UE需 要将通过公共承载接收到的 UE的数据, 具体地说是下行数据, 发送给接入 站点 C, 以通过接入站点 C发送给 UE。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 由于接 入站点 B能够获知 UE切换至接入站点 C, 因此, 接入站点 B可以向指示该 接入站点 A发送指示该 UE切换至接入站点 C的信息(第三切换指示信息)。  And the access station A obtains information indicating that the UE is handed over to the access site C (the third handover indication information), so that the access site A can determine, according to the third handover indication information, that the UE needs to receive the public bearer. The data of the UE, specifically the downlink data, is sent to the access station C for transmission to the UE through the access station C. In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, since the access station B can learn that the UE switches to the access site C, the access station B can send information indicating that the UE switches to the access site C to the access station A. (third switching indication information).
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该第一接入站点向第三接入站点发送第二 切换指示信息, 包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the first access station sends the second handover indication information to the third access site, including:
该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送的第二切换请求消息, 其中, 该 第二切换请求消息包括该第二切换指示信息, 以便于该第三接入站点从该第 二切换请求消息中, 获取该第二切换指示信息。  a second handover request message sent by the first access station to the second access station, where the second handover request message includes the second handover indication information, so that the third access station switches from the second In the request message, the second handover indication information is obtained.
具体地说,在本发明实施例中,接入站点 B可以将该第二切换指示信息 承载于切换请求消息 (第二切换请求消息) 中, 发送给接入站点 C, 从而, 接入站点 C可以从该切换请求消息中, 获取该第二切换指示信息。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may carry the second handover indication information in the handover request message (the second handover request message), and send the information to the access site C, thereby accessing the site C. The second handover indication information may be obtained from the handover request message.
从而, 在上行时( UE向服务器发送数据 ), 接入站点 C可以接收该 UE 发送的数据(上行数据), 并将该上行数据转发给接入站点 A, 从而, 接入 站点 A可以通过该公共承载将该上行数据发送给网关设备(第一网关设备 ), 进而传输给服务器。  Therefore, when uplinking (the UE sends data to the server), the access station C can receive the data (uplink data) sent by the UE, and forward the uplink data to the access station A, so that the access station A can pass the The public bearer sends the uplink data to the gateway device (the first gateway device), and then transmits the data to the server.
并且, 在下行时 (服务器向 UE发送数据), 接入站点 A可以通过该公 并将该下行数据发送给接入站点 C, 从而, 接入站点 C可以将该下行数据发 送给 UE。  Moreover, in the downlink (the server sends data to the UE), the access station A can send the downlink data to the access station C, and the access station C can send the downlink data to the UE.
可选地, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, the method further includes:
该第一接入站点向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的小区标识或 跟踪区域标识, 以便于该第三接入站点在根据该第二接入站点的小区标识或 跟踪区域标识确定该第三接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域之 后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第三数据, 其中, 该预设区域 内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Sending, by the first access station, the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the second access station to the third access station, so that the third access station is in the cell identifier or the tracking area according to the second access station. After the identifier determines that the third access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, the third access station sends third data from the mobile device, where each access in the preset area is Sites are able to communicate with each other.
具体地说, 由于通过接入站点 A 的公共承载发送已切换至接入站点 C 的 UE的数据, 需要建立在接入站点 A与接入站点 C能够通信的前提下, 因 此, 例如, 在将本发明实施例的通信方法 100适用于 LTE系统中时, 具体地 说,该 LTE系统中的部分或全部接入点能够通过例如,光纤或无线通信资源 传输数据时, 接入站点 C还可以确认是否能够与接入站点 A通信, 具体地 说, 使数据层面的通信。 并且, 作为确定是否能够进行数据通信的方法, 可 以列举以下方法: Specifically, since the public bearer transmission through access site A has been switched to access site C The data of the UE needs to be established on the premise that the access site A and the access site C can communicate. Therefore, for example, when the communication method 100 of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to the LTE system, specifically, the LTE When some or all of the access points in the system are capable of transmitting data over, for example, fiber optic or wireless communication resources, the access site C can also confirm whether it is possible to communicate with the access site A, specifically, at the data level. Further, as a method of determining whether or not data communication is possible, the following methods can be cited:
在本发明实施例中, 当通信系统中的部分接入站点可以通过例如, 光纤 或无线通信资源传输数据时(例如, 在具体的某一地理区域(预设区域的一 例;), 可以为该区域内的各接入点分配用于在彼此之间传输数据的通信资 源), 例如, MME或 OAM等能够管理接入站点的设备可以例如, 从电信运 营商获取能够通信的接入站点的信息, 并向各接入站点下发指示能够进行数 据通信的接入站点的信息, 从而, 各接入点可以获知能够进行数据通信的对 端接入站点。  In the embodiment of the present invention, when a part of the access stations in the communication system can transmit data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource (for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area), Each access point in the area allocates communication resources for transmitting data between each other. For example, a device capable of managing an access site, such as an MME or an OAM, may acquire information of an access station capable of communication, for example, from a telecommunication carrier. And transmitting, to each access station, information indicating an access station capable of data communication, so that each access point can learn the peer access station capable of data communication.
应理解, 以上列举的预设区域的实现方式仅为示例性说明, 本发明并未 限定于此, 例如, 也可以对系统内能够进行通信的接入站点(例如, 位于同 一地理区域中的部分接入站点 )进行标识, 并由具有该标识的接入点构成的 虚拟区域, 作为该预设区域。  It should be understood that the implementation manners of the preset areas listed above are merely exemplary, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, an access station capable of communicating in the system (for example, a part located in the same geographical area) may also be used. The access site is identified and the virtual area formed by the access point having the identifier is used as the preset area.
例如, 由于小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表能够指示系统内的各接入站 点, 因此, MME或 OAM可以将位于同一预设区域的接入站点映射在该小 区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中, 并通知各接入点, 例如, 可以通知接入点位 于某一预设区域的所有接入点在该小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中的位置, 从而包括所述接入站点 A和接入站点 C在内的受该 MME或 OAM控制的接 入点,可以根据 MME或 OAM的指示,从小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中, 确定能够进行数据通信的对端接入站点。  For example, the MME or the OAM can map the access sites located in the same preset area to the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, and notify the eNB or the OAM. Each access point, for example, may notify a location of all access points of the access point that are located in a certain preset area in the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, thereby including the access station A and the access station C. The access point controlled by the MME or the OAM may determine, from the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, the peer access station capable of data communication according to the indication of the MME or the OAM.
再例如, MME或 OAM可以将位于同一预设区域的接入站点 (具体地 说, 是接入站点的小区标识或跟踪区域标识 )映射在一个表项中, 并下发给 位于该预设区域的各接入站点, 从而, 接入站点可以确定能够与小区标识或 跟踪区域标识处于同一表项的接入站点进行数据通信。  For example, the MME or the OAM can map the access site (specifically, the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the access site) in the same preset area to an entry and send it to the preset area. Each access station, such that the access station can determine data communication with an access site that is in the same entry as the cell identity or tracking area identity.
可选地, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, the method further includes:
该第一接入站点获取该第三接入站点的路由信息;  The first access station acquires routing information of the third access station;
该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发送该第三接入站点的路由信息, 以 便于该第二接入站点根据第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入站点发送 第四数据。 Sending, by the first access station, routing information of the third access site to the second access site, to The second access station is configured to send the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
在本发明实施例中, 各接入站点之间可以根据路由信息来传输数据(例 如, 传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号), 因此, 接入站点 A需要获取接入 站点 C的路由信息。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 根据传输网络层地址和 /或 隧道终端编号传输数据的方法和过程可以与现有技术相似, 这里, 为了避免 赘述, 省略其说明。  In the embodiment of the present invention, data may be transmitted between the access sites according to the routing information (for example, the transport network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number). Therefore, the access site A needs to obtain the routing information of the access site C. . Moreover, in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and the process for transmitting data according to the transmission network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 由于接入站点 B与接入站点 C在切换 流程中需要信令交互, 因此,接入站点 C可以将其路由信息发送给接入站点 B, 从而, 接入站点 B可以将接入站点 C的路由信息转发给接入站点 A。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, since the access site B and the access site C need to perform signaling interaction in the handover process, the access site C can send its routing information to the access site B, thereby The access station B can forward the routing information of the access station C to the access station A.
另外,接入站点 C可以将其路由信息承载于路径转换请求消息中,发送 给该接入站点 C的 MME, 从而, 并通过接入站点 A的 MME可以将该接入 站点 C的路由信息发送给接入站点 A。应理解,接入站点 C的 MME与接入 站点 A的 MME可以相同, 也可以相异, 并且, 在接入站点 C的 MME与接 入站点 A的 MME可以相异的情况下, MME彼此之间能够进行通信。  In addition, the access station C may carry its routing information in the path conversion request message, and send it to the MME of the access station C, so that the routing information of the access station C can be sent through the MME of the access station A. Give access to site A. It should be understood that the MME of the access site C may be the same as the MME of the access site A, or may be different, and in the case that the MME of the access site C and the MME of the access site A may be different, the MMEs Can communicate with each other.
同样, 在本发明实施例中, 各接入站点之间可以根据路由信息来传输数 据(例如, 传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号), 因此, 接入站点 C需要获 取接入站点 A的路由信息。  Similarly, in the embodiment of the present invention, each access station may transmit data according to routing information (for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number), and therefore, the access site C needs to acquire the access site A. Routing information.
具体地说, 接入站点 B在于接入站点 A进行数据通信时可以保存接入 站点 A的路由信息, 并将接入站点 A的路由信息通过例如切换请求消息等 发送给接入站点 C。  Specifically, the access station B can save the routing information of the access station A when the access station A performs data communication, and send the routing information of the access station A to the access station C by, for example, a handover request message.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 C可以在确定接入站点 A能够 通过该公共承载发送该 UE的上行数据 (或者说, 接入站点 A确定 UE已切 换至接入站点 C )后, 向接入站点 A转发 UE的上行数据。  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station C may determine that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE by using the common bearer (or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access site C). After that, the uplink data of the UE is forwarded to the access station A.
在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 C在向 MME发送路径切换请求消息后, In the embodiment of the present invention, after the access site C sends a path switch request message to the MME,
MME可以向接入站点 A发送指示该 UE从接入站点 B切换至接入站点 C的 指示信息, 从而, 接入站点 A可以获知 UE已切换至接入站点 C, 此时, 接 入站点 A可以向接入站点 B发送例如 end marker消息, 以指示接入站点 A 不再向接入站点 B发送 UE的下行数据,从而,接入站点 B可以向接入站点 C发送例如 end marker消息或切换完成消息, 从而,接入站点 C可以根据该 接入站点 B发送的切换完成消息、 MME发送的路径转换请求响应消息或接 入站点 B发送的 end marker消息, 确定接入站点 A能够通过该公共承载发 送该 UE的上行数据, 或者说, 接入站点 A确定 UE已切换至接入站点 B。 The MME may send indication information indicating that the UE switches from the access station B to the access station C to the access station A, so that the access station A can learn that the UE has switched to the access station C, and at this time, the access station A An end marker message may be sent to the access station B, for example, to indicate that the access station A no longer transmits the downlink data of the UE to the access station B, so that the access station B can send, for example, an end marker message or handover to the access station C. The message is completed, so that the access station C can receive the handover complete message sent by the access station B, the path conversion request response message sent by the MME, or The end marker message sent by the station B determines that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer, or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access station B.
同样, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以在确定接入站点 C能够向 该 UE发送下行数据 (或者说, UE已切换至接入站点 C )后, 向接入站点 B 转发 UE的下行数据。  Similarly, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may forward the UE to the access station B after determining that the access station C can send downlink data to the UE (or the UE has switched to the access station C). Downstream data.
并且, 如上所述, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以根据 MME发送 的路径转换请求消息,确定接入站点 C能够向该 UE发送下行数据,或者说, UE已切换至接入站点 C。  In addition, as described above, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may determine, according to the path switching request message sent by the MME, that the access station C can send downlink data to the UE, or that the UE has switched to the access site. C.
本发明实施例的通信方法,通过在目标移动设备从源站点切换至目的站 点后, 继续通过设置有用于传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载的源站点传 输该目标移动设备的数据, 无需变更传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载, 从而, 能够减少因切换而产生的信令开销。  The communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, after the target mobile device is switched from the source station to the destination station, continues to transmit the data of the target mobile device through the source station provided with the common bearer for transmitting the data of the target mobile device, without changing the transmission. The common bearer of the data of the target mobile device, and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
图 3示出了从源接入站点(第二接入节点)角度的根据本发明实施例的 通信方法 200的示意性流程图, 如图 3所示, 该方法 200包括:  FIG. 3 shows a schematic flow chart of a communication method 200 according to an embodiment of the present invention from the perspective of a source access station (second access node). As shown in FIG. 3, the method 200 includes:
S210,接入站点中的第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发送第一切换指示 信息, 该第一切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设 有公共承载, 该公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设 备的数据;  S210, the second access station in the access station sends the first handover indication information to the first access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site is located between the second access site and the first gateway device. a public bearer for transmitting data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
S220,该第二接入站点接收该第一接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备 的第一数据, 并通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第一数据; 和 /或 S220, the second access station receives the first data sent by the first access station from the target mobile device, and forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or
S220' , 该第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发送第二数据, 以便于该第 一接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该第二数据是该第一 网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应 的数据。 S220', the second access station sends the second data to the first access station, so that the first access station forwards the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is the first The gateway device sends data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the common bearer.
并且,在本发明实施例中,该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备, 该接入站点包括基站设备和 /或中继设备。  Moreover, in the embodiment of the present invention, the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, and the access station comprises a base station device and/or a relay device.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 移动设备例如, 可以是用户设备(UE, Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the mobile device may be, for example, a user equipment (UE,
User Equipment ),也可称之为移动终端( Mobile Terminal ),移动用户设备等, 可以经无线接入网(例如, RAN, Radio Access Network )与一个或多个核心 网进行通信, 用户设备可以是移动终端, 如移动电话(或称为"蜂窝"电话) 和具有移动终端的计算机, 例如, 可以是便携式、 袖珍式、 手持式、 计算机 内置的或者车载的移动装置, 它们与无线接入网交换语言和 /或数据。 另外, 需要说明的是, 在本发明实施例中, 用户设备能够进行机器类型通信。 User Equipment ), which may also be called a mobile terminal, a mobile user equipment, etc., may communicate with one or more core networks via a radio access network (eg, RAN, Radio Access Network), and the user equipment may be A mobile terminal, such as a mobile phone (or "cellular" phone) and a computer with a mobile terminal, for example, can be portable, pocket, handheld, computer Built-in or in-vehicle mobile devices that exchange language and/or data with the wireless access network. In addition, it should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present invention, the user equipment is capable of performing machine type communication.
或者, 在本发明实施例中, 移动设备例如, 可以是移动中继设备, 该移 动中继设备可以列举移动接入点 ( AP , Access Point )。  Alternatively, in the embodiment of the present invention, the mobile device may be, for example, a mobile relay device, and the mobile relay device may enumerate a mobile access point (AP, Access Point).
接入站点可以是 GSM 或 CDMA 中的基站 (BTS , Base Transceiver The access site can be a base station in GSM or CDMA (BTS, Base Transceiver)
Station ), 也可以是 WCDMA中的基站(NodeB ), 还可以是 LTE中的演进 型基站( eNB或 e-NodeB, evolutional Node B )。 另夕卜, 接入站点可以是微基 站(Micro ), 也可以是微微基站(Pico ), 还可以是家庭基站, 也可称之为毫 微微蜂窝基站 ( femto )或接入点 (AP, Access Point ), 本发明并不限定。 以下, 为了便于理解, 以 eNB 为例, 对接入站点的动作进行说明。 需要说 明的是,在本发明实施例中接入站点可以控制移动设备在多个小区之间进行 接入、 切换或重选等动作, 并且, 该过程可以与现有技术相同。 Station), which may also be a base station (NodeB) in WCDMA, or an evolved base station (eNB or e-NodeB, evolutional Node B) in LTE. In addition, the access station may be a micro base station (Micro), a pico base station (Pico), or a home base station, or a femto base station (femto) or an access point (AP, Access). Point ), the invention is not limited. Hereinafter, for ease of understanding, the operation of the access site will be described using the eNB as an example. It should be noted that, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station may control the mobile device to perform operations such as accessing, switching, or reselecting between multiple cells, and the process may be the same as the prior art.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 当前为 UE (目标移动设备)服务的接 入站点, 即, 源站点 (第二接入点), 以下, 为了便于理解和区分, 称为接 入站点 A可以通过公共承载来传输该 UE的数据。 这里, 需要说明的是, 该 数据是指用户面的数据, 并不包括控制面的信令。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, an access site currently serving a UE (target mobile device), that is, a source site (second access point), is hereinafter referred to as an access site for ease of understanding and differentiation. A can transmit the data of the UE through a common bearer. Here, it should be noted that the data refers to data of the user plane, and does not include signaling of the control plane.
图 2示出了公共承载的结构, 如图 2所示, 该公共承载可以包括中继公 共承载和基站公共承载 , 基站公共承载设置在基站设备与网关设备之间 , 中 继公共承载设置在中继接入站点与基站之间。 因此, 在本发明实施例中, 当 该第二接入点为基站设备时, 该公共承载是指基站公共承载。 当该第二接入 点为中继接入站点时, 该公共承载包括中继公共承载和基站公共承载双方。  Figure 2 shows the structure of a common bearer. As shown in Figure 2, the common bearer may include a relay common bearer and a base station common bearer. The base station common bearer is set between the base station device and the gateway device, and the relay common bearer is set in the middle. Between the access site and the base station. Therefore, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the second access point is a base station device, the common bearer refers to a base station common bearer. When the second access point is a relay access station, the common bearer includes a relay common bearer and a common bearer of the base station.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 在该第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发送 第一切换指示信息之前, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, before the second access site sends the first handover indication information to the first access site, the method further includes:
该第二接入站点获取该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息; 该第二接入站点根据该第一测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第 二接入站点切换至该第一接入站点。  The second access station acquires the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device; the second access station determines, according to the first measurement report information, that the target mobile device switches from the second access site to the first Access site.
具体地说, 例如, 当 UE在系统中移动时, 存在当前服务小区 (或接入 站点 A ) 的通信质量降低或不能继续为该 UE服务的情况, 从而需要执行切 换流程, UE的移动性(或者说, 切换)可以通过 UE的测量和上报来实现, 即, 接入站点 A可以根据来自 UE的测量上报消息, 来控制该 UE的切换。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 上述过程及方法可以与现有技术相同, 这里, 为 了避免赘述, 省略其说明。 Specifically, for example, when the UE moves in the system, there is a case where the communication quality of the current serving cell (or the access station A) is reduced or cannot continue to serve the UE, so that the handover procedure, the mobility of the UE needs to be performed (or The handover can be implemented by the measurement and reporting of the UE, that is, the access station A can control the handover of the UE according to the measurement report message from the UE. Moreover, in the embodiment of the present invention, the foregoing processes and methods may be the same as the prior art, where Avoiding the description and omitting the description.
可选地, 该第二接入站点获取该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信 息, 包括:  Optionally, the second access station acquires the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, including:
该第二接入站点向目标移动设备发送至少一个第一测量指示信息, 该第 一测量指示信息包括第一目标载频的载频信息, 该第一目标载频上配置有至 少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第一测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个 信息: 第一测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧 指示信息;  The second access station sends at least one first measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the first measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the first target carrier frequency, and the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication The MTC cell, the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: first measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
该第二接入站点接收该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息, 该第一 测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第一测量指示信息进行测量后发送 的;  Receiving, by the second access station, the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, where the first measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the first measurement indication information;
其中, 该第一测量带宽指示信息用于指示第一测量带宽, 该第一测量带 宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量,该第一测量带宽与第二测量带宽相异, 该第二测量带宽用于配置在该第一目标载频上的第一非 MTC小区的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的参考符号的配置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量;  The first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a first measurement bandwidth, where the first measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, and the second measurement bandwidth is different. Means for configuring a first non-MTC cell on the first target carrier frequency; the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of a corresponding MTC cell, where a reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the MTC cell Measurement;
该子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。  The subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
具体地说, 现有技术中, MTC小区和传统小区(非 MTC小区)可能具 有相同的载频 (也可以称为中心频点), 但带宽上存在很大的差异, 例如, 传统小区的带宽为 20MHz, 而 MTC小区的带宽通常为 1.4MHz。 目前, 对 系统小区测量, 例如, RRM 测量是通过以下方式实现, 即, 基站为用户设 备配置测量使用的参数, 即, "测量对象(Measurement Object )" , 以使用户 设备根据该测量对象对系统小区的测量。 一个载频只会配置一个唯一的 "测 量对象", 并且, 该 "测量对象" 中包含用于指示测量使用的带宽的参数, 即, "测量带宽"。 用户设备根据该测量带宽对该载频上各小区进行测量。 然 而, 因为 MTC小区是窄带的, 如果要保证 MTC小区的测量, 则只能将测 量带宽设定为窄带宽, 但是, 如果用户设备还需要测量该载频上的其他小区 (传统小区), 则该窄带宽的测量带宽会影响该传统小区的测量效果。 同样, 如果为了确保对传统小区的测量效果而使用宽带宽的测量带宽, 则会影响该 MTC小区的测量效果。  Specifically, in the prior art, an MTC cell and a legacy cell (non-MTC cell) may have the same carrier frequency (which may also be referred to as a center frequency point), but there is a big difference in bandwidth, for example, the bandwidth of a traditional cell. It is 20 MHz, and the bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz. Currently, for system cell measurement, for example, RRM measurement is implemented by the base station configuring a parameter used for measurement by the user equipment, that is, a "Measurement Object", so that the user equipment is based on the measurement object to the system. Measurement of the cell. A carrier frequency is only configured with a unique "measurement object", and the "measurement object" contains a parameter for indicating the bandwidth used by the measurement, that is, "measurement bandwidth". The user equipment measures each cell on the carrier frequency according to the measurement bandwidth. However, since the MTC cell is narrowband, if the measurement of the MTC cell is to be ensured, the measurement bandwidth can only be set to a narrow bandwidth, but if the user equipment also needs to measure other cells (traditional cells) on the carrier frequency, The measurement bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth affects the measurement effect of the conventional cell. Similarly, if a measurement bandwidth of a wide bandwidth is used in order to ensure the measurement effect on a conventional cell, the measurement effect of the MTC cell is affected.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 一个载频上即配置有 MTC小区又配置 有非 MTC小区时,接入站点 A可以为 MTC小区和非 MTC小区配置不同的 测量对象, 具体地说, 是测量带宽, 其中, 用于测量非 MTC小区的测量带 宽(第二测量带宽)的配置方法和数值可以与现有技术相似, 这里为了避免 赘述, 省略其说明。 并且, 接入站点 A可以根据 MTC小区的带宽, 设置用 于测量该 MTC小区的测量带宽(第一测量带宽), 例如, 由于 MTC小区的 带宽通常为 1.4MHz,因此,接入站点 A可以将该第一测量带宽设为 1.4MHz, 即, 与该 MTC小区的带宽相同, 或者, 接入站点 A也可以将该第一测量带 宽的数值设为小于 MTC 小区的带宽, 本发明并未特别限定。 UE在获取各 MTC小区的测量带宽 (第一测量带宽)后, 可以根据该测量带宽对各 MTC 小区进行测量, 并且, 在本发明实施例中, UE根据测量带宽对 MTC小区进 行测量的方法和过程与现有技术相似, 这里为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。 In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, an MTC cell is configured on one carrier frequency. When there is a non-MTC cell, the access station A may configure different measurement objects for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell, specifically, measurement bandwidth, where the measurement bandwidth (second measurement bandwidth) for measuring the non-MTC cell is used. The configuration method and numerical values can be similar to those of the prior art, and the description thereof will be omitted herein to avoid redundancy. In addition, the access station A may set a measurement bandwidth (first measurement bandwidth) for measuring the MTC cell according to the bandwidth of the MTC cell. For example, since the bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz, the access site A may The first measurement bandwidth is set to be 1.4 MHz, that is, the bandwidth of the MTC cell is the same, or the access station A may set the value of the first measurement bandwidth to be smaller than the bandwidth of the MTC cell, which is not specifically limited in the present invention. . After acquiring the measurement bandwidth (the first measurement bandwidth) of each MTC cell, the UE may perform measurement on each MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method for the UE to measure the MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth The process is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
根据本发明实施例的通信方法, 通过为同一载频上的 MTC 小区和非 MTC小区配置不同的测量带宽, 能够提高对双方的测量效果。  According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, by configuring different measurement bandwidths for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell on the same carrier frequency, the measurement effect on both sides can be improved.
另外, 现有技术中, MTC 小区可以根据传统小区的部分资源 (具体地 说, 是时频资源) 来配置, 即该 MTC 小区虽然是窄带宽的, 但用于对该 MTC 小区进行测量的参考符号却仍沿用传统小区 (宽带宽小区) 的参考符 号 (宽带宽的参考符号), 因此, 可能影响测量效果。  In addition, in the prior art, the MTC cell may be configured according to part of resources (specifically, time-frequency resources) of the traditional cell, that is, the MTC cell is narrow bandwidth, but is used for measurement of the MTC cell. The symbols still use the reference symbols of the traditional cell (wide bandwidth cell) (wide bandwidth reference symbols), and therefore may affect the measurement effect.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以通知 UE专用于测量 MTC小区的参考符号,这里, "专用于测量 MTC小区"是指,用于对该 MTC 小区进行测量的参考符号不仍沿用传统小区的参考符号, 而是与该 MTC小 区相对应, 具体地说, 是与 MTC小区的带宽相对应。 UE在获取各 MTC小 区的参考符号后, 可以根据该参考符号对各 MTC小区进行测量, 并且, 在 本发明实施例中, UE根据参考符号对 MTC小区进行测量的方法和过程与现 有技术相似, 这里为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may notify the UE that the reference symbol is dedicated to measuring the MTC cell. Here, "dedicated to measure the MTC cell" refers to a reference symbol used for measuring the MTC cell. The reference symbols of the legacy cell are not still used, but correspond to the MTC cell, specifically, the bandwidth of the MTC cell. After acquiring the reference symbols of the MTC cells, the UE may perform measurement on each of the MTC cells according to the reference symbols, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and process for the UE to measure the MTC cells according to the reference symbols are similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
根据本发明实施例的通信方法, 通过接入站点 A根据 MTC小区指示用 户设备根据与该 MTC小区相对应侧参考符号对该 MTC小区进行测量, 能 够提高对 MTC小区的测量效果。  According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, the measurement of the MTC cell can be improved by the access station A instructing the user equipment to measure the MTC cell according to the reference symbol corresponding to the MTC cell according to the MTC cell.
另外, 现有技术中, 与测量非 MTC 小区的方式相同, 为了测量 MTC 小区, 用户设备需要连续地监听并测量每个子帧, 但是, MTC 小区可能仅 存在于部分子帧, 从而导致测量结果不准确。  In addition, in the prior art, in the same manner as the measurement of the non-MTC cell, in order to measure the MTC cell, the user equipment needs to continuously monitor and measure each subframe, but the MTC cell may exist only in a part of the subframe, thereby causing the measurement result not to be accurate.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以确定 MTC小区所属于 的子帧, 并通知 UE,从而, UE可以仅监听并测量包括该 MTC小区的子帧, 从而能够提高测量的准确性。 In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A can determine that the MTC cell belongs to The subframe is notified to the UE, so that the UE can only monitor and measure the subframe including the MTC cell, thereby improving the accuracy of the measurement.
接入站点 A在根据 UE的测量上报信息, 确定该 UE需要切换至目的站 点 (第一接入点, 以下为了便于理解和区分, 称为接入站点 B )后, 可以发 起切换流程, 以使该 UE从接入站点 A切换至接入站点 B, 在本发明实施例 中, 该切换流程与现有技术相似, 这里, 为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  The access station A may initiate a handover procedure according to the measurement report reported by the UE, and determine that the UE needs to be handed over to the destination site (the first access point, which is referred to as the access site B for ease of understanding and differentiation). In the embodiment of the present invention, the handover procedure is similar to the prior art in the embodiment of the present invention. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
在现有技术中, 在 UE切换至接入站点 B时, 接入站点 B需要将该 UE 的业务流映射至该接入站点 B的公共承载上, 特别是, 当该接入站点 B上 未设有公共承载的情况下, 该 UE的业务需要独立的 EPS承载, 另外, 接入 站点 A需要释放映射有该 UE的业务流的公共承载。 从而, 可能导致系统资 源的浪费, 信令开销也较大。  In the prior art, when the UE switches to the access site B, the access site B needs to map the service flow of the UE to the public bearer of the access site B, in particular, when the access site B does not In the case of a public bearer, the service of the UE needs a separate EPS bearer. In addition, the access site A needs to release the public bearer mapped with the service flow of the UE. As a result, system resources are wasted and signaling overhead is also large.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 在接入站点 A和接入站点 B可以通信, 具体地说, 能够进行数据通信的情况下, 接入站点 A可以向接入站点 B发 送指示该接入站点 A设有公共承载的信息 (第一切换指示信息), 从而在 S110,接入站点 B可以接收该第一切换指示信息, 并根据该第一切换指示信 息, 确定接入站点 A设有能够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载。  In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the access station A and the access station B can communicate, specifically, data communication is possible, the access station A can send an indication to the access station B. The access site A is provided with the information of the common bearer (the first handover indication information), so that the access site B can receive the first handover indication information, and the access site A is determined according to the first handover indication information. A common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该向该第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信 息包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the sending, by the first access station, the first handover indication information includes:
向该第一接入站点发送第一切换请求消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息 包括该第一切换指示信息。  Sending a first handover request message to the first access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information.
具体地说,在本发明实施例中,接入站点 A可以将该第一切换指示信息 承载于切换请求消息 (第一切换请求消息) 中, 发送给接入站点 B, 从而, 接入站点 B可以从该切换请求消息中, 获取该第一切换指示信息。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may carry the first handover indication information in the handover request message (the first handover request message), and send the information to the access site B, thereby accessing the site B. The first handover indication information may be obtained from the handover request message.
在 S220, 在上行时 (UE向服务器发送数据), 接入站点 B可以接收该 UE发送的数据(上行数据), 并将该上行数据转发给接入站点 A, 从而, 接 入站点 A可以通过该公共承载将该上行数据发送给网关设备(第一网关设 备), 进而传输给服务器。  At S220, when uplink (the UE sends data to the server), the access station B can receive the data (uplink data) sent by the UE, and forward the uplink data to the access site A, so that the access site A can pass The public bearer sends the uplink data to the gateway device (the first gateway device), and then transmits the data to the server.
在 S220' , 在下行时(服务器向 UE发送数据 ), 接入站点 A可以通过 该公共承载接收网关设备 (第一网关设备 )转发的来自服务器的数据(下行 数据), 并将该下行数据发送给接入站点 B, 从而, 接入站点 B可以将该下 行数据发送给 UE。 可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该方法还包括: In S220', when the downlink (the server sends data to the UE), the access station A can receive the data (downlink data) from the server forwarded by the gateway device (the first gateway device) through the common bearer, and send the downlink data. The access station B is given, so that the access station B can send the downlink data to the UE. Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the method further includes:
该第二接入站点确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。  The second access site determines that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
具体地说, 由于该公共承载用于机器类型通信, 因此, 例如, 在将本发 明实施例的通信方法 200适用于 LTE系统中时, 接入站点 A还可以确认该 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信, 并且, 在确定该 UE能够进行机器类型通 信时, 通过公共承载传输 UE 的数据 (具体地说, 是下行数据)。 同样, 接 入站点 B也可以确认该 UE是否能够进行机器类型通信, 并且, 在确定该 UE能够进行机器类型通信时, 通过公共承载传输 UE的数据(具体地说, 是上行数据), 器类型通信的方法, 可以列举上述方法 a~c。  Specifically, since the common bearer is used for machine type communication, for example, when the communication method 200 of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to an LTE system, the access station A can also confirm whether the UE can perform machine type communication. And, when it is determined that the UE can perform machine type communication, the data of the UE (specifically, downlink data) is transmitted through the common bearer. Similarly, the access station B can also confirm whether the UE can perform machine type communication, and when determining that the UE can perform machine type communication, transmit data of the UE (specifically, uplink data) through a common bearer, The method of communication can be exemplified by the above methods a to c.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该第一接入站点与该第二接入站点能够通 信。  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the first access station and the second access station can communicate.
具体地说, 由于通过接入站点 A 的公共承载发送已切换至接入站点 B 的 UE的数据, 需要建立在接入站点 A与接入站点 B能够通信的前提下, 因 此, 例如, 在将本发明实施例的通信方法 100适用于 LTE系统中时, 具体地 说,该 LTE系统中的部分或全部接入点能够通过例如,光纤或无线通信资源 传输数据时, 接入站点 B还可以确认是否能够与接入站点 A通信, 具体地 说, 使数据层面的通信, 同样, 在发送第一切换指示前, 接入站点 A还可以 确认是否能够与接入站点 B通信。 并且,作为确定是否能够进行数据通信的 方法, 可以列举以下方法:  Specifically, since the data of the UE that has switched to the access station B is transmitted through the public bearer of the access station A, it needs to be established on the premise that the access station A and the access station B can communicate, and therefore, for example, When the communication method 100 of the embodiment of the present invention is applicable to an LTE system, specifically, when some or all of the access points in the LTE system can transmit data through, for example, optical fiber or wireless communication resources, the access station B can also confirm Whether it is possible to communicate with the access site A, specifically, the communication at the data level, likewise, before the first handover indication is sent, the access site A can also confirm whether it can communicate with the access site B. Further, as a method of determining whether or not data communication is possible, the following methods can be cited:
可选地, 该第一接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the first access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 当通信系统中的部分接入站点可以通过 例如, 光纤或无线通信资源传输数据时(例如, 在具体的某一地理区域(预 设区域的一例), 可以为该区域内的各接入点分配用于在彼此之间传输数据 的通信资源 ) , 例如, MME 或运营管理系统 ( OAM , Operation and Management )等能够管理接入站点的设备可以例如,从电信运营商获取能够 通信的接入站点的信息, 并向各接入站点下发指示能够进行数据通信的接入 站点的信息, 从而, 各接入点可以获知能够进行数据通信的对端接入站点。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, when a part of the access stations in the communication system can transmit data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource (for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area), Each access point in the area may be allocated a communication resource for transmitting data between each other), for example, an MME or an Operation Management System (OAM), etc., capable of managing an access site may, for example, The telecom operator obtains the information of the access station capable of communicating, and sends information to the access stations indicating the access stations capable of data communication, so that each access point can learn the peer access capable of data communication. Site.
应理解, 以上列举的预设区域的实现方式仅为示例性说明, 本发明并未 限定于此, 例如, 也可以对系统内能够进行通信的接入站点(例如, 位于同 一地理区域中的部分接入站点 )进行标识, 并由具有该标识的接入点构成的 虚拟区域, 作为该预设区域。 It should be understood that the implementation manners of the preset areas listed above are merely exemplary, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, an access station capable of communicating in the system (for example, a part located in the same geographical area) may also be used. The access site is identified and consists of an access point having the identity A virtual area as the preset area.
在本发明实施例中, MME或 OAM可以例如, 从电信运营商获取能够 通信的接入站点的信息, 并向各接入站点下发指示能够进行数据通信的接入 站点的信息。  In the embodiment of the present invention, the MME or the OAM may, for example, obtain information of the access station capable of communicating from the telecommunication carrier, and send information to the access sites indicating the access site capable of data communication.
例如, 由于小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表能够指示系统内的各接入站 点, 因此, MME或 OAM可以将位于同一预设区域的接入站点映射在该小 区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中, 并通知各接入点, 例如, 可以通知接入点位 于某一预设区域的所有接入点在该小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中的位置 (第一区域指示信息或第二区域指示信息), 从而包括所述接入站点 A和接 入站点 B在内的受该 MME或 OAM控制的接入点,可以根据 MME或 OAM 的指示, 从小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中, 确定能够进行数据通信的对端 接入站点。  For example, the MME or the OAM can map the access sites located in the same preset area to the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, and notify the eNB or the OAM. Each access point, for example, may notify a location of the access point that is located in a certain preset area in the cell identifier list or the tracking area list (first area indication information or second area indication information), thereby The access point controlled by the MME or the OAM, including the access station A and the access station B, may determine that data communication is possible from the cell identification list or the tracking area list according to the indication of the MME or the OAM. The peer accesses the site.
再例如, MME或 OAM可以将位于同一预设区域的接入站点 (具体地 说, 是接入站点的小区标识或跟踪区域标识 )映射在一个表项中, 并下发给 位于该预设区域的各接入站点, 从而, 接入站点可以确定能够与小区标识或 跟踪区域标识处于同一表项的接入站点进行数据通信。  For example, the MME or the OAM can map the access site (specifically, the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the access site) in the same preset area to an entry and send it to the preset area. Each access station, such that the access station can determine data communication with an access site that is in the same entry as the cell identity or tracking area identity.
应理解, 以上列举了接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取指示预设区域的信 息的实施例, 但本发明并未限定于此, 例如, 还可以在预先将各预设区域的 信息存储在各接入站点内部,从而各接入站点从内部获取指示预设区域的信 息。  It should be understood that the foregoing describes an embodiment in which an access station obtains information indicating a preset area from an MME or an OAM, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, information of each preset area may be stored in advance in each connection. Entering the inside of the site, each access station obtains information indicating the preset area from the inside.
可选地, 该第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发送第二数据, 包括: 该第二接入站点获取该第一接入站点的路由信息;  Optionally, the second access station sends the second data to the first access station, where: the second access station acquires routing information of the first access site;
该第二接入站点根据该第一接入站点的路由信息, 向该第一接入站点发 送该第二数据。  The second access station sends the second data to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 各接入站点之间可以根据路由信息来传 输数据(例如, 传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号), 因此, 接入站点 A需 要获取接入站点 B的路由信息。 同样, 接入站点 B需要获取接入站点 A的 路由信息。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 根据传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编 号传输数据的方法和过程可以与现有技术相似, 这里, 为了避免赘述, 省略 其说明。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, each access station may transmit data according to routing information (for example, a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number), and therefore, the access site A needs to obtain an access site. B routing information. Similarly, access station B needs to obtain routing information of access station A. Moreover, in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and the process for transmitting data according to the transmission network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
可选地, 该第二接入站点获取该第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该第二接入站点接收该第一接入站点发送的第一切换请求响应消息, 其 中, 该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一接入站点的路由信息; Optionally, the second access site acquires routing information of the first access site, including: Receiving, by the second access station, the first handover request response message sent by the first access station, where the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site;
该第二接入站点从该第一切换请求响应消息中, 获取该第一接入站点的 路由信息。  The second access station obtains routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
具体地说,在本发明实施例中,接入站点 A可以将其路由信息承载于切 换请求消息(第一切换请求消息) 中, 发送给接入站点 B, 从而, 接入站点 B可以从该切换请求消息中, 获取该接入站点 A的路由信息。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may carry its routing information in the handover request message (the first handover request message), and send it to the access site B, so that the access site B can In the handover request message, the routing information of the access site A is obtained.
同样, 在本发明实施例中,接入站点 B可以将其路由信息承载于切换请 求响应消息(第一切换请求响应消息) 中, 发送给接入站点 A, 从而, 接入 站点 A可以从该切换请求响应消息中, 获取该接入站点 B的路由信息。  Similarly, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may carry its routing information in the handover request response message (the first handover request response message), and send it to the access site A, so that the access site A can In the handover request response message, the routing information of the access site B is obtained.
可选地,在该第二接入站点接收该第一接入站点发送的来自该目标移动 设备的第一数据之前, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, before the second access station receives the first data sent by the first access station from the target mobile device, the method further includes:
该第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发送该第二接入站点的路由信息, 以 便于该第一接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发 送该第一数据。  The second access station sends the routing information of the second access site to the first access site, so that the first access site sends the second access site to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site. Send the first data.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以通过例如信令消息等, 直接向接入站点 A发送其路由信息, 从而, 接入站点 A可以接收该路由信 息, 并根据该路由信息向接入站点 B发送数据。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B can directly send the routing information to the access station A by using, for example, a signaling message, so that the access station A can receive the routing information, and according to the route, The information is sent to the access site B.
可选地, 该第二接入站点获取该第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该第二接入站点接收移动性管理实体 MME发送的该第一接入站点的路 由信息, 其中, 该第一接入站点的路由信息是该 MME从该第一接入站点获 取的。  Optionally, the acquiring, by the second access station, the routing information of the first access site, where: the second access site receives the routing information of the first access site sent by the mobility management entity MME, where The routing information of the first access site is obtained by the MME from the first access site.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以通过例如信令消息等, 将其路由信息发送给接入站点 B的 MME, 接入站点 A的 MME将接入站点 B的路由信息转发给接入站点 A, 从而, 接入站点 A可以接收该路由信息, 并根据该路由信息向接入站点 B发送数据。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may send its routing information to the MME of the access station B by using, for example, a signaling message, and the MME of the access station A accesses the routing information of the station B. Forwarded to the access site A, the access site A can receive the routing information and send data to the access site B according to the routing information.
并且, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以将其路由信息承载于例如, 路径转换请求消息,发送给接入站点 A的 MME,从而,接入站点 B的 MME 也可以将接入站点 A的路由信息承载于例如,路径转换请求消息,发送给接 入站点 B。  In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may carry its routing information to, for example, a path switching request message, and send it to the MME of the access station A, so that the MME of the access station B may also access the access station. The routing information of A is carried, for example, in a path switching request message, and is sent to the access station B.
应理解,接入站点 B的 MME与接入站点 A的 MME可以相同, 也可以 相异, 并且, 在接入站点 B的 MME与接入站点 A的 MME可以相异的情况 下, MME彼此之间能够进行通信。 It should be understood that the MME of the access station B may be the same as the MME of the access station A, or Differently, when the MME of the access site B and the MME of the access site A can be different, the MMEs can communicate with each other.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该第二接入站点向该第一接入站点发送第 二数据, 包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the second access station sends the second data to the first access site, including:
该第二接入站点接收第二触发消息;  The second access station receives the second trigger message;
该第二接入站点根据该第二触发消息, 向该第一接入站点发送第二数 据。  The second access station sends the second data to the first access station according to the second trigger message.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以在确定接入站点 A能 够通过该公共承载发送该 UE的上行数据 (或者说, 接入站点 A确定 UE已 切换至接入站点 B )后, 向接入站点 A转发 UE的上行数据。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may determine that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer (or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access site B). After that, the uplink data of the UE is forwarded to the access station A.
同样,接入站点 A可以在确定接入站点 B能够向该 UE发送下行数据(或 者说, UE已切换至接入站点 B )后, 向接入站点 B转发 UE的下行数据。  Similarly, the access station A may forward the downlink data of the UE to the access station B after determining that the access station B can send downlink data to the UE (or the UE has switched to the access station B).
可选地, 该第二触发消息包括: 该第二基站发送的第一切换完成消息、 移动性管理实体 MME发送的第一路径转换请求响应消息或该第二接入站点 发送的第一 end marker消息。  Optionally, the second trigger message includes: a first handover complete message sent by the second base station, a first path switch request response message sent by the mobility management entity MME, or a first end marker sent by the second access station. Message.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以根据该接入站点 A发 送的切换完成消息、 MME发送的路径转换请求响应消息或接入站点 B发送 的终止符 end marker消息, 确定接入站点 A能够通过该公共承载发送该 UE 的上行数据, 或者说, 接入站点 A确定 UE已切换至接入站点 B。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may be determined according to the handover complete message sent by the access site A, the path conversion request response message sent by the MME, or the terminator end marker message sent by the access station B. The access station A can transmit the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer, or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access station B.
同样,接入站点 A可以根据 MME发送的路径转换请求消息, 确定接入 站点 B能够向该 UE发送下行数据, 或者说, UE已切换至接入站点 B。  Similarly, the access station A can determine that the access station B can send downlink data to the UE according to the path switching request message sent by the MME, or the UE has switched to the access station B.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the method further includes:
该第二接入站点确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至第三接 入站点;  The second access station determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access station to the third access site;
该第二接入站点向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 以便于该第三接入站 点向该目标移动设备转发该第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网关设备 通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据; 和 /或  The second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is that the first gateway device passes The public carrier transmits data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site; and/or
该第二接入站点接收该第三接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备的第 三数据, 并通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据。  The second access station receives the third data sent by the third access station from the target mobile device, and forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer.
具体地说, 例如, 当 UE继续在系统中移动时, 存在当前服务小区 (或 接入站点 B ) 的通信质量降低或不能继续为该 UE服务的情况, 从而需要执 行切换流程, UE的移动性(或者说, 切换)可以通过 UE的测量和上报来 实现, 即, 接入站点 B可以根据来自 UE的测量上报消息, 来控制该 UE的 切换。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 上述过程及方法可以与现有技术相同, 这 里, 为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。 Specifically, for example, when the UE continues to move in the system, there is a current serving cell (or If the communication quality of the access station B is reduced or the service cannot be continued for the UE, the handover procedure needs to be performed. The mobility (or handover) of the UE can be implemented by the measurement and reporting of the UE, that is, the access site. B can control the handover of the UE according to the measurement report message from the UE. Further, in the embodiment of the present invention, the above-described processes and methods may be the same as those in the prior art, and the description thereof will be omitted herein to avoid redundancy.
现有技术中, MTC小区和传统小区(非 MTC小区)可能具有相同的载 频 (也可以称为中心频点), 但带宽上存在很大的差异, 例如, 传统小区的 带宽为 20MHz, 而 MTC小区的带宽通常为 1.4MHz。 目前, 对系统小区测 量, 例如, RRM 测量是通过以下方式实现, 即, 基站为用户设备配置测量 使用的参数, 即, "测量对象( Measurement Object )" , 以使用户设备根据该 测量对象对系统小区的测量。 一个载频只会配置一个唯一的 "测量对象", 并且, 该 "测量对象" 中包含用于指示测量使用的带宽的参数, 即, "测量 带宽"。 用户设备根据该测量带宽对该载频上各小区进行测量。 然而, 因为 MTC小区是窄带的, 如果要保证 MTC小区的测量, 则只能将测量带宽设定 为窄带宽,但是,如果用户设备还需要测量该载频上的其他小区(传统小区), 则该窄带宽的测量带宽会影响该传统小区的测量效果。 同样, 如果为了确保 对传统小区的测量效果而使用宽带宽的测量带宽, 则会影响该 MTC小区的 测量效果。  In the prior art, the MTC cell and the legacy cell (non-MTC cell) may have the same carrier frequency (which may also be referred to as a center frequency point), but there is a big difference in bandwidth. For example, the bandwidth of the traditional cell is 20 MHz. The bandwidth of an MTC cell is typically 1.4 MHz. Currently, for system cell measurement, for example, RRM measurement is implemented by, for example, a parameter used by a base station to configure measurement for a user equipment, that is, a "measurement object", so that the user equipment according to the measurement object to the system Measurement of the cell. A carrier frequency is only configured with a unique "measurement object", and the "measurement object" contains a parameter for indicating the bandwidth used for measurement, that is, "measurement bandwidth". The user equipment measures each cell on the carrier frequency according to the measurement bandwidth. However, since the MTC cell is narrowband, if the measurement of the MTC cell is to be guaranteed, the measurement bandwidth can only be set to a narrow bandwidth, but if the user equipment also needs to measure other cells (traditional cells) on the carrier frequency, The measurement bandwidth of the narrow bandwidth affects the measurement effect of the conventional cell. Similarly, if a wide bandwidth measurement bandwidth is used to ensure measurement of a conventional cell, the measurement effect of the MTC cell is affected.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 一个载频上即配置有 MTC小区又配置 有非 MTC小区时,接入站点 Β可以为 MTC小区和非 MTC小区配置不同的 测量对象, 具体地说, 是测量带宽, 其中, 用于测量非 MTC小区的测量带 宽(第二测量带宽)的配置方法和数值可以与现有技术相似, 这里为了避免 赘述, 省略其说明。 并且, 接入站点 Β可以根据 MTC小区的带宽, 设置用 于测量该 MTC小区的测量带宽(第一测量带宽), 例如, 由于 MTC小区的 带宽通常为 1.4MHz,因此,接入站点 B可以将该第一测量带宽设为 1.4MHz, 即, 与该 MTC小区的带宽相同, 或者, 接入站点 B也可以将该第一测量带 宽的数值设为小于 MTC小区的带宽, 本发明并未特别限定。 UE在获取各 MTC小区的测量带宽 (第一测量带宽)后, 可以根据该测量带宽对各 MTC 小区进行测量, 并且, 在本发明实施例中, UE根据测量带宽对 MTC小区进 行测量的方法和过程与现有技术相似, 这里为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  On the other hand, in the embodiment of the present invention, when a carrier frequency is configured with an MTC cell and a non-MTC cell, the access station may configure different measurement objects for the MTC cell and the non-MTC cell, specifically, It is a measurement bandwidth, and the configuration method and value for measuring the measurement bandwidth (second measurement bandwidth) of the non-MTC cell may be similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy. In addition, the access station may set a measurement bandwidth (first measurement bandwidth) for measuring the MTC cell according to the bandwidth of the MTC cell. For example, since the bandwidth of the MTC cell is usually 1.4 MHz, the access station B may The first measurement bandwidth is set to be 1.4 MHz, that is, the bandwidth of the MTC cell is the same, or the access station B may set the value of the first measurement bandwidth to be smaller than the bandwidth of the MTC cell, which is not specifically limited in the present invention. . After acquiring the measurement bandwidth (the first measurement bandwidth) of each MTC cell, the UE may perform measurement on each MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method for the UE to measure the MTC cell according to the measurement bandwidth The process is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
根据本发明实施例的通信方法, 通过为同一载频上的 MTC 小区和非 MTC小区配置不同的测量带宽, 能够提高对双方的测量效果。 A communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention, by using MTC cells and non-identities on the same carrier frequency The MTC cell is configured with different measurement bandwidths, which can improve the measurement effect on both sides.
另外, 现有技术中, MTC 小区可以根据传统小区的部分资源 (具体地 说, 是时频资源) 来配置, 即该 MTC 小区虽然是窄带宽的, 但用于对该 MTC 小区进行测量的参考符号却仍沿用传统小区 (宽带宽小区) 的参考符 号 (宽带宽的参考符号), 因此, 可能影响测量效果。  In addition, in the prior art, the MTC cell may be configured according to part of resources (specifically, time-frequency resources) of the traditional cell, that is, the MTC cell is narrow bandwidth, but is used for measurement of the MTC cell. The symbols still use the reference symbols of the traditional cell (wide bandwidth cell) (wide bandwidth reference symbols), and therefore may affect the measurement effect.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以通知 UE专用于测量 MTC小区的参考符号,这里, "专用于测量 MTC小区"是指,用于对该 MTC 小区进行测量的参考符号不仍沿用传统小区的参考符号, 而是与该 MTC小 区相对应, 具体地说, 是与 MTC小区的带宽相对应。 UE在获取各 MTC小 区的参考符号后, 可以根据该参考符号对各 MTC小区进行测量, 并且, 在 本发明实施例中, UE根据参考符号对 MTC小区进行测量的方法和过程与现 有技术相似, 这里为了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may notify the UE to use the reference symbol for measuring the MTC cell. Here, "dedicated to measure the MTC cell" refers to a reference symbol used for measuring the MTC cell. The reference symbols of the legacy cell are not still used, but correspond to the MTC cell, specifically, the bandwidth of the MTC cell. After acquiring the reference symbols of the MTC cells, the UE may perform measurement on each of the MTC cells according to the reference symbols, and in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and process for the UE to measure the MTC cells according to the reference symbols are similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
根据本发明实施例的通信方法, 通过接入站点 B根据 MTC小区指示用 户设备根据与该 MTC小区相对应侧参考符号对该 MTC小区进行测量, 能 够提高对 MTC小区的测量效果。  According to the communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B instructs the user equipment to measure the MTC cell according to the reference symbol corresponding to the MTC cell according to the MTC cell, so that the measurement effect on the MTC cell can be improved.
另外, 现有技术中, 与测量非 MTC 小区的方式相同, 为了测量 MTC 小区, 用户设备需要连续地监听并测量每个子帧, 但是, MTC 小区可能仅 存在于部分子帧, 从而导致测量结果不准确。  In addition, in the prior art, in the same manner as the measurement of the non-MTC cell, in order to measure the MTC cell, the user equipment needs to continuously monitor and measure each subframe, but the MTC cell may exist only in a part of the subframe, thereby causing the measurement result not to be accurate.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以确定 MTC小区所属于 的子帧, 并通知 UE,从而, UE可以仅监听并测量包括该 MTC小区的子帧, 从而能够提高测量的准确性。  On the other hand, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B can determine the subframe to which the MTC cell belongs, and notify the UE, so that the UE can only monitor and measure the subframe including the MTC cell, thereby improving the measurement. accuracy.
接入站点 B在根据 UE的测量上报信息, 确定该 UE需要切换至接入站 点 C (第三接入点 )后, 可以发起切换流程, 以使该 UE从接入站点 B切换 至接入站点 C, 在本发明实施例中, 该切换流程与现有技术相似, 这里, 为 了避免赘述, 省略其说明。  The access station B may initiate a handover procedure after the UE needs to switch to the access site C (the third access point) according to the measurement report information of the UE, so that the UE switches from the access site B to the access site. C. In the embodiment of the present invention, the handover procedure is similar to the prior art, and the description thereof is omitted here to avoid redundancy.
在现有技术中, 在 UE切换至接入站点 C时, 接入站点 C需要将该 UE 的业务流映射至该接入站点 C的公共承载上, 特别是, 当该接入站点 C上 未设有公共承载的情况下, 该 UE的业务需要独立的 EPS承载。 从而, 可能 导致系统资源的浪费, 信令开销也较大。  In the prior art, when the UE switches to the access site C, the access site C needs to map the service flow of the UE to the public bearer of the access site C, in particular, when the access site C does not In the case of a public bearer, the UE's service requires a separate EPS bearer. As a result, system resources are wasted and signaling overhead is also large.
与此相对, 在本发明实施例中, 在接入站点 A和接入站点 C可以通信, 具体地说, 能够进行数据通信的情况下,接入站点 C可以获取指示该接入站 点 A设有能够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载的信息 (第二切换指示信息), 从而, 接入站点 C可以根据该第二切换指示信息, 确定接入站点 A设有能 够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 由于接入站点 B能够获知接入 A设有能够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载, 因此, 接入站点 B可以向指示该接入站点 A设有能够传输该 UE的数据的公共承载的信息 (第二切换指示信息)。 In contrast, in the embodiment of the present invention, when the access station A and the access station C can communicate, specifically, data communication is possible, the access station C can obtain the indication of the access station. The point A is provided with information (second handover indication information) of the common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE, so that the access station C can determine, according to the second handover indication information, that the access station A is provided with the UE capable of transmitting the UE. The common bearing of data. In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, since the access station B can learn that the access A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE, the access station B can provide the access station A with the ability to transmit the Commonly carried information of the data of the UE (second handover indication information).
并且,接入站点 A获取指示该 UE切换至接入站点 C的信息(第三切换 指示信息), 从而, 接入站点 A可以根据该第三切换指示信息, 确定 UE需 要将通过公共承载接收到的 UE的数据, 具体地说是下行数据, 发送给接入 站点 C, 以通过接入站点 C发送给 UE。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 由于接 入站点 B能够获知 UE切换至接入站点 C, 因此, 接入站点 B可以向指示该 接入站点 A发送指示该 UE切换至接入站点 C的信息(第三切换指示信息)。  And the access station A obtains information indicating that the UE is handed over to the access site C (the third handover indication information), so that the access site A can determine, according to the third handover indication information, that the UE needs to receive the public bearer. The data of the UE, specifically the downlink data, is sent to the access station C for transmission to the UE through the access station C. In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, since the access station B can learn that the UE switches to the access site C, the access station B can send information indicating that the UE switches to the access site C to the access station A. (third switching indication information).
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 该第二接入站点确定该目标移动设备从该 第一接入站点切换至第三接入站点, 包括:  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the second access station determines that the target mobile device is to be switched from the first access site to the third access site, including:
该第二接入站点接收该第一接入站点发送的第三切换指示信息, 该第三 切换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换至该第三 接入站点;  The second access station receives the third handover indication information sent by the first access station, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site. ;
该第二接入站点根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第 一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  The second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 B可以向接入站点 A发送指 示该 UE切换至接入站点 C的信息 (第三切换指示信息), 从而, 接入站点 A可以接收该第三切换指示信息, 并根据该第三切换指示信息, 确定需要将 通过公共承载接收到的 UE的数据。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station B may send information (the third handover indication information) indicating that the UE switches to the access site C to the access site A, so that the access site A can receive the The third handover indication information, and according to the third handover indication information, determining data of the UE that needs to be received through the common bearer.
应理解, 以上列举的接入站点 C获知接入站点 A设有能够传输该 UE 的数据的公共承载的方法以及接入站点 A获知该 UE切换至接入站点的方法 仅为示例性说明, 本发明并不限定于此, 例如, 接入站点也可以从上层管理 设备, 例如 MME获知上述信息。  It should be understood that the above-listed access site C knows that the access site A is provided with a common bearer capable of transmitting data of the UE, and the method for the access site A to know that the UE switches to the access site is merely an exemplary description. The invention is not limited thereto, and for example, the access station may also know the above information from an upper management device, such as an MME.
从而, 在上行时(UE向服务器发送数据), 接入站点 C可以接收该 UE 发送的数据(上行数据), 并将该上行数据转发给接入站点 A, 从而, 接入 站点 A可以通过该公共承载将该上行数据发送给网关设备(第一网关设备), 进而传输给服务器。 并且, 在下行时 (服务器向 UE发送数据), 接入站点 A可以通过该公 并将该下行数据发送给接入站点 C, 从而, 接入站点 C可以将该下行数据发 送给 UE。 Therefore, when uplink (the UE sends data to the server), the access station C can receive the data (uplink data) sent by the UE, and forward the uplink data to the access site A, so that the access site A can pass the The public bearer sends the uplink data to the gateway device (the first gateway device), and then transmits the data to the server. And, in the downlink (the server sends data to the UE), the access station A can send the downlink data to the access site C, and the access site C can send the downlink data to the UE.
在本发明实施例中,由于通过接入站点 A的公共承载发送已切换至接入 站点 C的 UE的数据, 需要建立在接入站点 A与接入站点 C能够通信的前 提下, 因此,例如,在将本发明实施例的通信方法 200适用于 LTE系统中时, 具体地说,该 LTE系统中的部分或全部接入点能够通过例如, 光纤或无线通 信资源传输数据时, 接入站点 C还可以确认是否能够与接入站点 A通信, 具体地说, 使数据层面的通信。 并且, 作为确定是否能够进行数据通信的方 法, 可以列举以下方法:  In the embodiment of the present invention, since the data of the UE that has switched to the access station C is transmitted through the public bearer of the access station A, it is required to establish that the access site A and the access site C can communicate, and thus, for example, When the communication method 200 of the embodiment of the present invention is applied to an LTE system, specifically, some or all of the access points in the LTE system can access the site C when transmitting data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource. It is also possible to confirm whether communication with the access site A can be made, specifically, at the data level. Further, as a method of determining whether or not data communication is possible, the following methods can be cited:
在本发明实施例中, 当通信系统中的部分接入站点可以通过例如, 光纤 或无线通信资源传输数据时(例如, 在具体的某一地理区域(预设区域的一 例;), 可以为该区域内的各接入点分配用于在彼此之间传输数据的通信资 源), 例如, MME或 OAM等能够管理接入站点的设备可以例如, 从电信运 营商获取能够通信的接入站点的信息, 并向各接入站点下发指示能够进行数 据通信的接入站点的信息, 从而, 各接入点可以获知能够进行数据通信的对 端接入站点。  In the embodiment of the present invention, when a part of the access stations in the communication system can transmit data through, for example, an optical fiber or a wireless communication resource (for example, in a specific geographical area (an example of a preset area), Each access point in the area allocates communication resources for transmitting data between each other. For example, a device capable of managing an access site, such as an MME or an OAM, may acquire information of an access station capable of communication, for example, from a telecommunication carrier. And transmitting, to each access station, information indicating an access station capable of data communication, so that each access point can learn the peer access station capable of data communication.
应理解, 以上列举的预设区域的实现方式仅为示例性说明, 本发明并未 限定于此, 例如, 也可以对系统内能够进行通信的接入站点(例如, 位于同 一地理区域中的部分接入站点 )进行标识, 并由具有该标识的接入点构成的 虚拟区域, 作为该预设区域。  It should be understood that the implementation manners of the preset areas listed above are merely exemplary, and the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, an access station capable of communicating in the system (for example, a part located in the same geographical area) may also be used. The access site is identified and the virtual area formed by the access point having the identifier is used as the preset area.
例如, 由于小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表能够指示系统内的各接入站 点, 因此, MME或 OAM可以将位于同一预设区域的接入站点映射在该小 区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中, 并通知各接入点, 例如, 可以通知接入点位 于某一预设区域的所有接入点在该小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中的位置, 从而包括所述接入站点 A和接入站点 C在内的受该 MME或 OAM控制的接 入点,可以根据 MME或 OAM的指示,从小区标识列表或跟踪区域列表中, 确定能够进行数据通信的对端接入站点。  For example, the MME or the OAM can map the access sites located in the same preset area to the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, and notify the eNB or the OAM. Each access point, for example, may notify a location of all access points of the access point that are located in a certain preset area in the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, thereby including the access station A and the access station C. The access point controlled by the MME or the OAM may determine, from the cell identifier list or the tracking area list, the peer access station capable of data communication according to the indication of the MME or the OAM.
再例如, MME或 OAM可以将位于同一预设区域的接入站点 (具体地 说, 是接入站点的小区标识或跟踪区域标识)映射在一个表项中, 并下发给 位于该预设区域的各接入站点, 从而, 接入站点可以确定能够与小区标识或 跟踪区域标识处于同一表项的接入站点进行数据通信。 For example, the MME or the OAM can map the access site (specifically, the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the access site) in the same preset area to an entry and send it to an entry. Each access station located in the preset area, so that the access station can determine data communication capable of being in the same entry as the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier.
可选地, 该第二接入站点向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 包括: 该第二接入站点获取该第三接入站点的路由信息;  Optionally, the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station, where: the second access station acquires routing information of the third access station;
该第二接入站点根据该第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入站点发 送该第四数据。  The second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
在本发明实施例中, 各接入站点之间可以根据路由信息来传输数据(例 如, 传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号), 因此, 接入站点 A需要获取接入 站点 C的路由信息。 并且, 在本发明实施例中, 根据传输网络层地址和 /或 隧道终端编号传输数据的方法和过程可以与现有技术相似, 这里, 为了避免 赘述, 省略其说明。  In the embodiment of the present invention, data may be transmitted between the access sites according to the routing information (for example, the transport network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number). Therefore, the access site A needs to obtain the routing information of the access site C. . Moreover, in the embodiment of the present invention, the method and the process for transmitting data according to the transmission network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number may be similar to the prior art. Here, in order to avoid redundancy, the description thereof is omitted.
可选地, 该第二接入站点获取该第三接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该第三接入站点接收该第一接入站点发送的该第三接入站点的路由信 息。  Optionally, the obtaining, by the second access station, the routing information of the third access station, the method includes: the third access station receiving, by the first access station, routing information of the third access station.
具体地说, 在本发明实施例中, 由于接入站点 B与接入站点 C在切换 流程中需要信令交互, 因此,接入站点 C可以将其路由信息发送给接入站点 B, 从而, 接入站点 B可以将接入站点 C的路由信息转发给接入站点 A。  Specifically, in the embodiment of the present invention, since the access site B and the access site C need to perform signaling interaction in the handover process, the access site C can send its routing information to the access site B, thereby The access station B can forward the routing information of the access station C to the access station A.
可选地, 该第二接入站点获取该第三接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 该第二接入站点接收 MME发送的该第三接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 该第三接入站点的路由信息是该 MME从该第三接入站点获取的。  Optionally, the acquiring, by the second access station, the routing information of the third access station, the second access station receiving the routing information of the third access station sent by the MME, where the third access The routing information of the site is obtained by the MME from the third access site.
具体地说, 接入站点 C可以将其路由信息承载于路径转换请求消息中, 发送给该接入站点 C的 MME, 从而, 并通过接入站点 A的 MME可以将该 接入站点 C的路由信息发送给接入站点 A。应理解,接入站点 C的 MME与 接入站点 A的 MME可以相同, 也可以相异, 并且, 在接入站点 C的 MME 与接入站点 A的 MME可以相异的情况下, MME彼此之间能够进行通信。  Specifically, the access station C may carry its routing information in the path switching request message, and send it to the MME of the access station C, so that the access station C can be routed through the MME of the access station A. The information is sent to access site A. It should be understood that the MME of the access site C may be the same as the MME of the access site A, or may be different, and in the case that the MME of the access site C and the MME of the access site A may be different, the MMEs are mutually different. Can communicate with each other.
可选地,在该第二接入站点接收该第三接入站点发送的来自该目标移动 设备的第三数据之前, 该方法还包括:  Optionally, before the second access station receives the third data sent by the third access station from the target mobile device, the method further includes:
该第二接入站点向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点的路由信息, 以 便于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发 送该第三数据。  The second access station sends the routing information of the second access station to the third access station, so that the third access station sends the routing information to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site. Send the third data.
同样, 在本发明实施例中, 各接入站点之间可以根据路由信息来传输数 据(例如, 传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号), 因此, 接入站点 C需要获 取接入站点 A的路由信息。 Similarly, in the embodiment of the present invention, each access station can transmit numbers according to routing information. According to (for example, the transport network layer address and/or the tunnel terminal number), therefore, the access site C needs to obtain the routing information of the access site A.
例如,接入站点 A在确定 UE已切换至接入节点 C后,可以通过信令等, 向接入站点 C发送接入站点 A的路由信息  For example, after determining that the UE has switched to the access node C, the access station A may send the routing information of the access station A to the access station C by using signaling or the like.
具体地说, 接入站点 B在于接入站点 A进行数据通信时可以保存接入 站点 A的路由信息, 并将接入站点 A的路由信息通过例如切换请求消息等 发送给接入站点 C。  Specifically, the access station B can save the routing information of the access station A when the access station A performs data communication, and send the routing information of the access station A to the access station C by, for example, a handover request message.
可选地, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 C可以在确定接入站点 A能够 通过该公共承载发送该 UE的上行数据 (或者说, 接入站点 A确定 UE已切 换至接入站点 C )后, 向接入站点 A转发 UE的上行数据。  Optionally, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station C may determine that the access station A can send the uplink data of the UE by using the common bearer (or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access site C). After that, the uplink data of the UE is forwarded to the access station A.
在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 C在向 MME发送路径切换请求消息后, In the embodiment of the present invention, after the access site C sends a path switch request message to the MME,
MME可以向接入站点 A发送指示该 UE从接入站点 B切换至接入站点 C的 指示信息, 从而, 接入站点 A可以获知 UE已切换至接入站点 C, 此时, 接 入站点 A可以向接入站点 B发送例如 end marker消息, 以指示接入站点 A 不再向接入站点 B发送 UE的下行数据,从而,接入站点 B可以向接入站点The MME may send indication information indicating that the UE switches from the access station B to the access station C to the access station A, so that the access station A can learn that the UE has switched to the access station C, and at this time, the access station A For example, an end marker message may be sent to the access station B to indicate that the access station A no longer sends the downlink data of the UE to the access station B, so that the access station B can access the access station.
C发送例如 end marker消息或切换完成消息, 从而,接入站点 C可以根据该 接入站点 B发送的切换完成消息、 MME发送的路径转换请求响应消息或接 入站点 B发送的 end marker消息, 确定接入站点 A能够通过该公共承载发 送该 UE的上行数据, 或者说, 接入站点 A确定 UE已切换至接入站点 B。 The C sends, for example, an end marker message or a handover complete message, so that the access station C can determine according to the handover complete message sent by the access station B, the path conversion request response message sent by the MME, or the end marker message sent by the access station B. The access station A can transmit the uplink data of the UE through the public bearer, or the access station A determines that the UE has switched to the access station B.
同样, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以在确定接入站点 C能够向 该 UE发送下行数据 (或者说, UE已切换至接入站点 C )后, 向接入站点 B 转发 UE的下行数据。  Similarly, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may forward the UE to the access station B after determining that the access station C can send downlink data to the UE (or the UE has switched to the access station C). Downstream data.
并且, 如上所述, 在本发明实施例中, 接入站点 A可以根据 MME发送 的路径转换请求消息,确定接入站点 C能够向该 UE发送下行数据,或者说, UE已切换至接入站点 C。  In addition, as described above, in the embodiment of the present invention, the access station A may determine, according to the path switching request message sent by the MME, that the access station C can send downlink data to the UE, or that the UE has switched to the access site. C.
本发明实施例的通信方法,通过在目标移动设备从源站点切换至目的站 点后, 继续通过设置有用于传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载的源站点传 输该目标移动设备的数据, 无需变更传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载, 从而, 能够减少因切换而产生的信令开销。  The communication method of the embodiment of the present invention, after the target mobile device is switched from the source station to the destination station, continues to transmit the data of the target mobile device through the source station provided with the common bearer for transmitting the data of the target mobile device, without changing the transmission. The common bearer of the data of the target mobile device, and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
以上,结合图 1至图 3详细说明了根据本发明实施例的通信方法,下面, 结合图 4至 5图详细说明根据本发明实施例的通信装置。 图 4示出了根据本发明实施例的通信装置 300的示意性框图。如图 4所 示, 该装置 300包括: Hereinabove, a communication method according to an embodiment of the present invention is described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 through 3. Hereinafter, a communication apparatus according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 4 to 5. FIG. 4 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 300 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 4, the apparatus 300 includes:
处理单元 310, 用于获取第二接入站点发送的第一切换指示信息, 该第 一切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承 载, 该公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数 据;  The processing unit 310 is configured to obtain the first handover indication information that is sent by the second access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site and the first gateway device have a common bearer, and the common bearer Data for transmitting at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
发送单元 320,用于向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一数据, 以便于该第二接入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第一数据; 和 /或  The sending unit 320 is configured to send the first data from the mobile device to the second access station, so that the second access station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or
接收单元 330, 用于该第一接入站点接收该第二接入站点发送的第二数 据, 以及该发送单元 320用于向该目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该 第二数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目 标移动设备相对应的数据。  The receiving unit 330 is configured to receive, by the first access station, the second data sent by the second access station, and the sending unit 320 is configured to forward the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is The first gateway device sends data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the common bearer.
可选地, 该处理单元 310还用于确定能够与该第二接入站点通信。  Optionally, the processing unit 310 is further configured to determine that the second access site can communicate with the second access site.
可选地, 该处理单元 310具体用于确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设 区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the processing unit 310 is specifically configured to determine that the second access site is in the same preset area, where each access station in the preset area can communicate with each other.
可选地, 该处理单元 310具体用于获取至少一个第一区域指示信息, 根 据该第一接入站点的小区标识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识、 小区列表和该 至少一个第一区域指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其 中, 该第一区域指示信息用于指示该小区列表中属于该第一区域指示信息所 对应的预设区域的小区标识; 或  Optionally, the processing unit 310 is specifically configured to acquire at least one first area indication information, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, the cell list, and the at least one first area. The indication information is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the first area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information in the cell list; or
用于获取至少一个第二区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点的跟踪区域 标识、 该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识、 跟踪区域标识列表和该至少一个第 二区域指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第二 区域指示信息用于指示该跟踪区域标识列表中属于该第二区域指示信息所 对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识; 或  And the at least one second area indication information is used to determine, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication information, The second access site is in the same preset area, where the second area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information in the tracking area identification list; or
用于获取至少一个第三区域指示信息, 根据该第一接入站点的小区标 识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识和该至少一个第三区域指示信息, 确定与该 第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第三区域指示信息用于指示属于 该第三区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的小区标识; 或  And the at least one third area indication information is used to determine that the second access station is located according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the at least one third area indication information. a same preset area, where the third area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information; or
用于获取至少一个第四区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点的跟踪区域 标识、 该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识和该至少一个第四区域指示信息, 确 定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第四区域指示信息用于指 示属于该第四区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识。 统 OAM获取该至少一个第一区域指示信息; 或 And acquiring at least one fourth area indication information according to the tracking area of the first access station The identifier, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, and the at least one fourth area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the fourth area indication information is used to indicate that the The tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the four area indication information. The OAM obtains the at least one first area indication information; or
用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第二区域指示信息; 或  And the acquiring the at least one second area indication information from the MME or the OAM; or
用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第三区域指示信息; 或  For acquiring the at least one third area indication information from the MME or the OAM; or
用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第四区域指示信息。  And configured to acquire the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM.
可选地, 该接收单元 330具体用于接收该第二接入站点发送的第一切换 请求消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示信息;  Optionally, the receiving unit 330 is configured to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information;
该处理单元 310具体用于从该第一切换请求消息中,获取该第一切换指 示信息。  The processing unit 310 is specifically configured to acquire the first handover indication information from the first handover request message.
可选地, 该处理单元 310还用于获取该第二接入站点的路由信息; 该发送单元 320具体用于根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接 入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一数据。  Optionally, the processing unit 310 is further configured to obtain routing information of the second access site. The sending unit 320 is specifically configured to send, according to the routing information of the second access site, the second access site. The first data of the mobile device.
可选地, 该接收单元 330还用于接收该第二接入站点发送的第一切换请 求消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第二接入站点的路由信息;  Optionally, the receiving unit 330 is further configured to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes routing information of the second access site;
该处理单元 310具体用于从该第一切换请求消息中,获取该第二接入站 点的路由信息。  The processing unit 310 is specifically configured to obtain routing information of the second access site from the first handover request message.
可选地, 该发送单元 320还用于向该第二接入站点发送该第一接入站点 的路由信息, 以便于该第二接入站点根据该第一接入站点的路由信息, 向该 第一接入站点发送该第二数据。  Optionally, the sending unit 320 is further configured to send the routing information of the first access site to the second access site, so that the second access site sends the routing information to the second access site according to the routing information of the first access site. The first access station sends the second data.
可选地, 该发送单元 320具体用于该第一接入站点向该第二接入站点发 送第一切换请求响应消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一接入 站点的路由信息, 以便于该第二接入站点从该第一切换请求响应消息中获取 该第一接入站点的路由信息。  Optionally, the sending unit 320 is specifically configured to send, by the first access station, a first handover request response message to the second access site, where the first handover request response message includes a route of the first access site. And the information, so that the second access station obtains the routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
可选地, 该发送单元 320具体用于该第一接入站点向 MME发送该第一 接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该 MME向该第二接入站点转发该第一接入站 点的路由信息。  Optionally, the sending unit 320 is specifically configured to send the routing information of the first access site to the MME by the first access station, so that the MME forwards the route of the first access site to the second access site. information.
可选地,该发送单元 320还用于向第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息, 该第二切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公 共承载, 以便于该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点, 以及 Optionally, the sending unit 320 is further configured to send the second handover indication information to the third access site, where the second handover indication information is used to indicate that the second access site and the first gateway device are provided with a public Co-bearing, to facilitate switching of the target mobile device from the first access site to the third access site, and
该第三接入站点在该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接 入站点后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该目标移动设备的第三数据, 该第二 接入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据, 和 /或  After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the third access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access The inbound station forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer, and/or
该第二接入站点在确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第 三接入站点后, 向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 该第三接入站点向该目标 移动设备转发该第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共 承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。  After determining that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the second access station sends fourth data to the third access site, where the third access site goes to the target The mobile device forwards the fourth data, where the fourth data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
可选地, 该发送单元 320还用于向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点 的小区标识或跟踪区域标识, 以便于该第三接入站点在根据该第二接入站点 的小区标识或跟踪区域标识确定该第三接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同 一预设区域之后,向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第三数据,其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the sending unit 320 is further configured to send, to the third access station, a cell identifier or a tracking area identifier of the second access station, so that the third access station is in accordance with the second access station. After the third identifier and the tracking area identifier determine that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area, send the third data from the mobile device to the second access station, where the preset area is Each access site within can communicate with each other.
可选地, 该发送单元 320还用于向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点 的路由信息, 以便于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该 第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第三数据。  Optionally, the sending unit 320 is further configured to send routing information of the second access site to the third access station, so that the third access station sends the routing information according to the second access site to the third access site. The second access station transmits third data from the mobile device.
可选地, 该处理单元 310还用于获取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 该发送单元 320还用于向该第二接入站点发送该第三接入站点的路由信 息, 以便于该第二接入站点根据第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入站 点发送第四数据。  Optionally, the processing unit 310 is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access site. The sending unit 320 is further configured to send routing information of the third access site to the second access site, to facilitate the The second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
可选地, 该发送单元 320还用于向该第二接入站点发送用于指示该目标 移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点的第三切换指示信息, 以便于该第二接入站点根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该 第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  Optionally, the sending unit 320 is further configured to send, to the second access station, third handover indication information that is used to indicate that the target mobile device has been handed over from the first access site to the third access site, so that And determining, by the second access station, the target mobile device to switch from the first access station to the third access station according to the third handover indication information.
可选地, 该处理单元 310还用于获取该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上 报信息;  Optionally, the processing unit 310 is further configured to acquire second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device.
用于根据该第二测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点 切换至该第三接入站点。 指示信息, 该第二测量指示信息包括第二目标载频的载频信息, 该第二目标 载频上配置有至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第二测量指示信息还包 括以下至少一个信息:第三测量带宽指示信息、至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指示信息; And determining, according to the second measurement reporting information, that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site. Instructing information, the second measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of a second target carrier frequency, the second target At least one machine type communication MTC cell is configured on the carrier frequency, the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
该接收单元 330还用于接收该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 该第二测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第二测量指示信息进行测量 后发送的;  The receiving unit 330 is further configured to receive the second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, where the second measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device after performing measurement according to the second measurement indication information;
其中, 该第三测量带宽指示信息用于指示第三测量带宽, 该第三测量带 宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量,该第三测量带宽与第四测量带宽相异, 该第四测量带宽用于配置在该第二目标载频上的第二非 MTC小区的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的参考符号的配置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量;  The third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, and the fourth measurement bandwidth is different. Means for configuring a second non-MTC cell on the second target carrier frequency; the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of the corresponding MTC cell, where the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the MTC cell Measurement;
该子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。  The subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
可选地, 该处理单元 310还用于确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型 通信。  Optionally, the processing unit 310 is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
可选地,该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,该接入站点为基 站设备或中继设备。  Optionally, the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, the access station being a base station device or a relay device.
可选地, 该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。  Optionally, the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
根据本发明实施例的通信装置 300可对应于本发明实施例的方法中的接 入站点 B (第一接入站点), 并且, 该通信装置 300中的各单元即模块和上 述其他操作和 /或功能分别为了实现图 1中的方法 100的相应流程,为了筒洁, 在此不再赘述。  The communication device 300 according to an embodiment of the present invention may correspond to an access site B (first access site) in the method of the embodiment of the present invention, and each unit in the communication device 300 is a module and the above other operations and/or For the purpose of implementing the corresponding process of the method 100 in FIG. 1 , the functions are not described here.
本发明实施例的通信装置,通过在目标移动设备从源站点切换至目的站 点后, 继续通过设置有用于传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载的源站点传 输该目标移动设备的数据, 无需变更传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载, 从而, 能够减少因切换而产生的信令开销。  The communication device of the embodiment of the present invention, after the target mobile device is switched from the source site to the destination site, continues to transmit the data of the target mobile device through the source site provided with the common bearer for transmitting the data of the target mobile device, without changing the transmission. The common bearer of the data of the target mobile device, and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
图 5示出了根据本发明实施例的通信装置 400的示意性框图。如图 5所 示, 该装置 400包括:  FIG. 5 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 400 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figure 5, the apparatus 400 includes:
发送单元 410, 用于向该第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息, 该第一 切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 该公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据; 接收单元 420, 用于接收该第一接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备的 第一数据, 并通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第一数据; 和 /或 该发送单元 410还用于向该第一接入站点发送第二数据, 以便于该第一 接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该第二数据是该第一网 关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的 数据。 The sending unit 410 is configured to send the first handover indication information to the first access site, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is set between the second access site and the first gateway device, where the public bearer a data for transmitting at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; a receiving unit 420, configured to receive, by the first access station, the mobile device from the target mobile device First data, and forwarding the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or the sending unit 410 is further configured to send the second data to the first access station, to facilitate the first access The site forwards the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
可选地, 该第一接入站点与该第二接入站点能够通信。  Optionally, the first access station and the second access station are capable of communicating.
可选地, 该第一接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the first access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
可选地, 该发送单元 410具体用于向该第一接入站点发送第一切换请求 消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示信息。  Optionally, the sending unit 410 is specifically configured to send a first handover request message to the first access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information.
可选地, 该装置还包括:  Optionally, the device further includes:
处理单元 430, 用于获取该第一接入站点的路由信息;  The processing unit 430 is configured to obtain routing information of the first access site.
该发送单元 410具体用于根据该第一接入站点的路由信息, 向该第一接 入站点发送该第二数据。  The sending unit 410 is specifically configured to send the second data to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site.
可选地, 该接收单元 420还用于该第二接入站点接收该第一接入站点发 送的第一切换请求响应消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一接 入站点的路由信息;  Optionally, the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive, by the second access station, a first handover request response message sent by the first access station, where the first handover request response message includes the first access site Routing information;
该处理单元 430具体用于从该第一切换请求响应消息中, 获取该第一接 入站点的路由信息。  The processing unit 430 is specifically configured to obtain routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
可选地, 该接收单元 420还用于接收移动性管理实体 MME发送的该第 一接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 该第一接入站点的路由信息是该 MME从该 第一接入站点获取的。  Optionally, the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive routing information of the first access site sent by the mobility management entity MME, where routing information of the first access site is the MME from the first access site Obtained.
可选地, 该发送单元 410还用于向该第一接入站点发送该第二接入站点 的路由信息, 以便于该第一接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该 第二接入站点发送该第一数据。  Optionally, the sending unit 410 is further configured to send the routing information of the second access site to the first access site, so that the first access site sends the routing information according to the routing information of the second access site to the first access site. The second access station sends the first data.
可选地, 该装置还包括:  Optionally, the device further includes:
处理单元 430, 用于确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至第三 接入站点;  The processing unit 430 is configured to determine that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site;
该发送单元 410还用于向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 以便于该第三 接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网 关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的 数据; 和 /或 The sending unit 410 is further configured to send fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is the first gateway device Corresponding to the target mobile device corresponding to the second access site by the public carrier Data; and/or
该接收单元 420还用于接收该第三接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备 的第三数据, 并通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据。  The receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive the third data sent by the third access station from the target mobile device, and forward the third data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer.
可选地, 该第一接入站点与该第三接入站点能够通信。  Optionally, the first access station and the third access station are capable of communicating.
可选地, 该第一接入站点与该第三接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
可选地, 该接收单元 420还用于接收该第一接入站点发送的第三切换指 示信息,该第三切换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点 切换至该第三接入站点;  Optionally, the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive, by the first access station, third handover indication information, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the Third access site;
该处理单元 430具体用于根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设 备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  The processing unit 430 is specifically configured to determine, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
可选地, 该接收单元 420还用于接收 MME发送的第三切换指示信息, 该第三切换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换至 该第三接入站点,该第三切换指示信息是该第三接入站点发送给该 MME的; 该处理单元 430具体用于根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设 备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  Optionally, the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site. The third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME. The processing unit 430 is specifically configured to determine, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the Third access site.
可选地, 该处理单元 430还用于获取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 该发送单元 410具体用于根据该第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接 入站点发送该第四数据。  Optionally, the processing unit 430 is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access station. The sending unit 410 is specifically configured to send the third access station according to routing information of the third access site. Four data.
可选地, 该接收单元 420还用于接收该第一接入站点发送的该第三接入 站点的路由信息。  Optionally, the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive routing information of the third access station sent by the first access station.
可选地, 该接收单元 420还用于接收 MME发送的该第三接入站点的路 由信息, 其中, 该第三接入站点的路由信息是该 MME从该第三接入站点获 取的。  Optionally, the receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive routing information of the third access station sent by the MME, where the routing information of the third access station is obtained by the MME from the third access station.
可选地, 该发送单元 410还用于向该第三接入站点发送该第二接入站点 的路由信息, 以便于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该 第二接入站点发送该第三数据。  Optionally, the sending unit 410 is further configured to send routing information of the second access site to the third access station, so that the third access station sends the routing information according to the second access site to the third access site. The second access station sends the third data.
可选地, 该装置还包括:  Optionally, the device further includes:
处理单元 430, 用于获取该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息; 用于根据该第一测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第二接入站点 切换至该第一接入站点。 指示信息, 该第一测量指示信息包括第一目标载频的载频信息, 该第一目标 载频上配置有至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第一测量指示信息还包 括以下至少一个信息:第一测量带宽指示信息、至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指示信息; The processing unit 430 is configured to obtain the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, and configured to determine, according to the first measurement report information, that the target mobile device is handed over from the second access site to the first access site. Instructing information, the first measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the first target carrier frequency, and the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, where the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: First measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
该接收单元 420还用于接收该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息, 该第一测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第一测量指示信息进行测量 后发送的;  The receiving unit 420 is further configured to receive the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device, where the first measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device after performing measurement according to the first measurement indication information;
其中, 该第一测量带宽指示信息用于指示第一测量带宽, 该第一测量带 宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量,该第一测量带宽与第二测量带宽相异, 该第二测量带宽用于配置在该第一目标载频上的第一非 MTC小区的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的参考符号的配置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量;  The first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a first measurement bandwidth, where the first measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, and the second measurement bandwidth is different. Means for configuring a first non-MTC cell on the first target carrier frequency; the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of a corresponding MTC cell, where a reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the MTC cell Measurement;
该子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。  The subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
可选地, 该装置还包括:  Optionally, the device further includes:
处理单元 430, 用于确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。  The processing unit 430 is configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of performing machine type communication.
可选地,该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,该接入站点为基 站设备或中继设备。  Optionally, the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, the access station being a base station device or a relay device.
可选地, 该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。  Optionally, the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
根据本发明实施例的通信装置 400可对应于本发明实施例的方法中的接 入站点 A (第二接入站点), 并且, 该通信装置 400中的各单元即模块和上 述其他操作和 /或功能分别为了实现图 3中的方法 200的相应流程,为了筒洁, 在此不再赘述。  The communication device 400 according to an embodiment of the present invention may correspond to an access site A (second access site) in the method of the embodiment of the present invention, and each unit in the communication device 400 is a module and the other operations described above and/or For the purpose of implementing the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 3, the functions are not described here.
本发明实施例的通信装置,通过在目标移动设备从源站点切换至目的站 点后, 继续通过设置有用于传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载的源站点传 输该目标移动设备的数据, 无需变更传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载, 从而, 能够减少因切换而产生的信令开销。  The communication device of the embodiment of the present invention, after the target mobile device is switched from the source site to the destination site, continues to transmit the data of the target mobile device through the source site provided with the common bearer for transmitting the data of the target mobile device, without changing the transmission. The common bearer of the data of the target mobile device, and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
以上,结合图 1至图 3详细说明了根据本发明实施例的通信方法,下面, 结合图 6至 7图详细说明根据本发明实施例的通信设备。  The communication method according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described in detail above with reference to Figs. 1 through 3. Hereinafter, a communication device according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to Figs.
图 6示出了根据本发明实施例的通信设备 500的示意性框图。如图 5所 示, 该设备 500包括: 总线 510; FIG. 6 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 500 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in FIG. 5, the device 500 includes: Bus 510;
与该总线 510相连的处理器 520;  a processor 520 coupled to the bus 510;
与该总线 510相连的存储器 530;  a memory 530 connected to the bus 510;
与该总线 510相连的收发器 540;  a transceiver 540 connected to the bus 510;
其中,该处理器 520通过该总线 510,调用该存储器 530中存储的程序, 以用于获取第二接入站点发送的第一切换指示信息, 该第一切换指示信息用 于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 该公共承载用于 传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据;  The processor 520, by using the bus 510, invokes a program stored in the memory 530, to obtain the first handover indication information sent by the second access station, where the first handover indication information is used to indicate the second connection. Providing a common bearer between the ingress station and the first gateway device, where the common bearer is used to transmit data of the at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
用于控制该收发器 540向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第一数 据, 以便于该第二接入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第一数 据; 和 /或  Controlling the transceiver 540 to send the first data from the mobile device to the second access station, so that the second access station forwards the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and Or
用于控制该收发器 540接收该第二接入站点发送的第二数据, 并控制该 收发器 540向该目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该第二数据是该第一 网关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应 的数据。  Controlling the transceiver 540 to receive the second data sent by the second access station, and controlling the transceiver 540 to forward the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is the first gateway device The public carrier transmits data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site.
可选地, 该处理器 520还用于确定能够与该第二接入站点通信。  Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to determine to be able to communicate with the second access site.
可选地,该处理器 520具体用于确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区 域, 其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the processor 520 is specifically configured to determine that the second access site is in the same preset area, where each access station in the preset area can communicate with each other.
可选地, 该处理器 520具体用于获取至少一个第一区域指示信息, 根据 该第一接入站点的小区标识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识、 小区列表和该至 少一个第一区域指示信息,确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域,其中, 该第一区域指示信息用于指示该小区列表中属于该第一区域指示信息所对 应的预设区域的小区标识; 或  Optionally, the processor 520 is specifically configured to acquire at least one first area indication information, according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, the cell list, and the at least one first area. The indication information is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the first area indication information is used to indicate a cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information in the cell list; or
用于获取至少一个第二区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点的跟踪区域 标识、 该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识、 跟踪区域标识列表和该至少一个第 二区域指示信息, 确定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第二 区域指示信息用于指示该跟踪区域标识列表中属于该第二区域指示信息所 对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识; 或  And the at least one second area indication information is used to determine, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, the tracking area identifier list, and the at least one second area indication information, The second access site is in the same preset area, where the second area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier of the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information in the tracking area identification list; or
用于获取至少一个第三区域指示信息, 根据该第一接入站点的小区标 识、 该第二接入站点的小区标识和该至少一个第三区域指示信息, 确定与该 第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第三区域指示信息用于指示属于 该第三区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的小区标识; 或 And the at least one third area indication information is used to determine that the second access station is located according to the cell identifier of the first access station, the cell identifier of the second access station, and the at least one third area indication information. a same preset area, where the third area indication information is used to indicate belonging to The third area indicates the cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the information; or
用于获取至少一个第四区域指示信息,根据该第一接入站点的跟踪区域 标识、 该第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识和该至少一个第四区域指示信息, 确 定与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该第四区域指示信息用于指 示属于该第四区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识。  And determining, by the at least one fourth area indication information, determining, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station, and the at least one fourth area indication information, The site is in the same preset area, where the fourth area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier that belongs to the preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
OAM获取该至少一个第一区域指示信息; Obtaining, by the OAM, the at least one first area indication information;
用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第二区域指示信息;  The acquiring, by the MME or the OAM, the at least one second area indication information;
用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第三区域指示信息;  And the acquiring, by the MME or the OAM, the at least one third area indication information;
用于从 MME或 OAM获取该至少一个第四区域指示信息。  And configured to acquire the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or the OAM.
可选地,该处理器 520具体用于控制该收发器 540接收该第二接入站点 发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示 信息;  Optionally, the processor 520 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 540 to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information;
用于从该第一切换请求消息中, 获取该第一切换指示信息。  The first handover indication information is obtained from the first handover request message.
可选地, 该处理器 520还用于获取该第二接入站点的路由信息; 用于控制该收发器 540根据该第二接入站点的路由信息, 向该第二接入 站点发送来自该移动设备的第一数据。  Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to obtain routing information of the second access site, and configured to control the transceiver 540 to send the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site. The first data of the mobile device.
可选地,该处理器 520具体用于控制该收发器 540接收该第二接入站点 发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求消息包括该第二接入站点 的路由信息;  Optionally, the processor 520 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 540 to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, where the first handover request message includes routing information of the second access site;
用于从该第一切换请求消息中, 获取该第二接入站点的路由信息。 可选地,该处理器 520还用于控制该收发器 540向该第二接入站点发送 该第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第二接入站点根据该第一接入站点的 路由信息, 向该第一接入站点发送该第二数据。  And obtaining, by using the first handover request message, routing information of the second access site. Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send routing information of the first access site to the second access site, so that the second access site is configured according to the first access site. Routing information, sending the second data to the first access station.
可选地,该处理器 520具体用于控制该收发器 540向该第二接入站点发 送第一切换请求响应消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一接入 站点的路由信息, 以便于该第二接入站点从该第一切换请求响应消息中获取 该第一接入站点的路由信息。  Optionally, the processor 520 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 540 to send a first handover request response message to the second access site, where the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access site. The second access station obtains the routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
可选地, 该处理器 520还用于控制该收发器 540向 MME发送该第一接 入站点的路由信息, 以便于该 MME向该第二接入站点转发该第一接入站点 的路由信息。 可选地,该处理器 520还用于控制该收发器 540向第三接入站点发送第 二切换指示信息, 该第二切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关 设备之间设有公共承载, 以便于该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该 第三接入站点, 以及 Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME forwards the routing information of the first access site to the second access site. . Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send the second handover indication information to the third access site, where the second handover indication information is used to indicate the second access site and the first gateway device. a common bearer is provided to facilitate switching of the target mobile device from the first access site to the third access site, and
该第三接入站点在该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接 入站点后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该目标移动设备的第三数据, 该第二 接入站点通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据, 和 /或  After the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the third access station sends third data from the target mobile device to the second access site, where the second access The inbound station forwards the third data to the first gateway device by using the public bearer, and/or
该第二接入站点在确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第 三接入站点后, 向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 该第三接入站点向该目标 移动设备转发该第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网关设备通过该公共 承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的数据。  After determining that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the second access station sends fourth data to the third access site, where the third access site goes to the target The mobile device forwards the fourth data, where the fourth data is data corresponding to the target mobile device that is sent by the first gateway device to the second access site by using the common bearer.
可选地,该处理器 520还用于控制该收发器 540向该第三接入站点发送 该第二接入站点的小区标识或跟踪区域标识, 以便于该第三接入站点在根据 该第二接入站点的小区标识或跟踪区域标识确定该第三接入站点与该第二 接入站点处于同一预设区域之后, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的 第三数据, 其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send, to the third access station, a cell identifier or a tracking area identifier of the second access station, so that the third access station is in accordance with the After the cell identifier or the tracking area identifier of the second access station determines that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area, send the third data from the mobile device to the second access station, where Each access station in the preset area can communicate with each other.
可选地,该处理器 520还用于控制该收发器 540向该第三接入站点发送 该第二接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的 路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送来自该移动设备的第三数据。  Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send routing information of the second access site to the third access site, so that the third access site is configured according to the second access site. Routing information, transmitting third data from the mobile device to the second access station.
可选地, 该处理器 520还用于获取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 用于控制该收发器 540向该第二接入站点发送该第三接入站点的路由信 息, 以便于该第二接入站点根据第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入站 点发送第四数据。  Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access site, and configured to control the transceiver 540 to send routing information of the third access site to the second access site, to facilitate the The second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
可选地,该处理器 520还用于控制该收发器 540向该第二接入站点发送 用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点的第 三切换指示信息, 以便于该第二接入站点根据该第三切换指示信息, 确定该 目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点。  Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to control the transceiver 540 to send, to the second access station, a third, indicating that the target mobile device has been handed over from the first access site to the third access site. And switching the indication information, so that the second access station determines, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
可选地,该处理器 520还用于获取该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报 信息;  Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to obtain second measurement report information sent by the target mobile device.
用于根据该第二测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点 切换至该第三接入站点。 可选地,该处理器 520具体用于控制该收发器 540向目标移动设备发送 至少一个第二测量指示信息, 该第二测量指示信息包括第二目标载频的载频 信息, 该第二目标载频上配置有至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第二 测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个信息: 第三测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个 参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指示信息; And determining, according to the second measurement reporting information, that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site. Optionally, the processor 520 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 540 to send at least one second measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the second measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the second target carrier frequency, the second target At least one machine type communication MTC cell is configured on the carrier frequency, the second measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: a third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
用于控制该收发器 540接收该目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 该第二测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第二测量指示信息进行测量 后发送的;  The second measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the second measurement indication information, and is sent by the target mobile device.
其中, 该第三测量带宽指示信息用于指示第三测量带宽, 该第三测量带 宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量,该第三测量带宽与第四测量带宽相异, 该第四测量带宽用于配置在该第二目标载频上的第二非 MTC小区的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的参考符号的配置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量;  The third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a third measurement bandwidth, where the third measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, and the fourth measurement bandwidth is different. Means for configuring a second non-MTC cell on the second target carrier frequency; the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of the corresponding MTC cell, where the reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the MTC cell Measurement;
该子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。  The subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
可选地,该处理器 520还用于确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通 信。  Optionally, the processor 520 is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
可选地,该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,该接入站点包括 基站设备和 /或中继设备。  Optionally, the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, the access station comprising a base station device and/or a relay device.
可选地, 该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。  Optionally, the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
处理器 520控制通信设备 500的操作,处理器 520还可以称为 CPU。存 储器 530可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器, 并向处理器 520提供指令 和数据。 存储器 530 的一部分还可以包括非易失行随机存取存储器 ( NVRAM )。具体的应用中,通信设备 500可以嵌入或者本身可以就是例如 移动电话之类的无线通信设备, 还可以包括容纳发射电路和接收电路的载 体, 以允许通信设备 500和远程位置之间进行数据发射和接收。 发射电路和 接收电路可以耦合到天线。 通信设备 500的各个组件通过总线(也可以称为 总线系统) 510耦合在一起, 其中, 总线 510除包括数据总线之外, 还包括 电源总线、 控制总线和状态信号总线。 但是为了清楚明起见, 在图中将各种 总线都标为总线 510。 通信设备 500还可以包括用于处理信号的处理单元、 此外还包括功率控制器、 解码处理器。 具体的不同产品中解码器可能与处理 单元集成为一体。 辑框图。 处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器, 解码器等。 结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理 器执行完成, 或者用解码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。 软件模 块可以位于随机存储器, 闪存、 只读存储器, 可编程只读存储器或者电可擦 写可编程存储器、 寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。 该存储介质位于存储 器 530, 解码单元或者处理单元读取存储器 530中的信息, 结合其硬件完成 上述方法的步骤。 Processor 520 controls the operation of communication device 500, which may also be referred to as a CPU. Memory 530 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 520. A portion of memory 530 may also include non-volatile line random access memory (NVRAM). In a particular application, the communication device 500 can embed or itself be a wireless communication device such as a mobile telephone, and can also include a carrier that houses the transmitting circuitry and the receiving circuitry to allow for data transmission between the communications device 500 and the remote location. receive. The transmit and receive circuits can be coupled to the antenna. The various components of communication device 500 are coupled together by a bus (also referred to as a bus system) 510, which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for the sake of clarity, various buses are labeled as bus 510 in the figure. The communication device 500 can also include a processing unit for processing signals, and further includes a power controller, a decoding processor. The decoder in a specific different product may be integrated with the processing unit. Block diagram. The processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can be any conventional processor, decoder or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as hardware processor execution completion, or performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software modules can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like. The storage medium is located in the memory 530, and the decoding unit or the processing unit reads the information in the memory 530, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with the hardware thereof.
应理解,在本发明实施例中,该处理器 520可以是中央处理单元( Central Processing Unit, 筒称为 "CPU" ), 该处理器 520还可以是其他通用处理器、 数字信号处理器(DSP )、专用集成电路(ASIC )、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA ) 或者其他可编程逻辑器件、 分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、 分立硬件组件等。 通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。  It should be understood that, in the embodiment of the present invention, the processor 520 may be a central processing unit (a central processing unit), and the processor 520 may also be another general-purpose processor, a digital signal processor (DSP). ), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), off-the-shelf programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, and the like. The general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
在实现过程中, 上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器 520中的硬件的集成 逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤 可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成, 或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组 合执行完成。 软件模块可以位于随机存储器, 闪存、 只读存储器, 可编程只 读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、 寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。 该存储介质位于存储器 530, 处理器 520读取存储器 530中的信息, 结合其 硬件完成上述方法的步骤。 为避免重复, 这里不再详细描述。  In the implementation process, each step of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 520 or an instruction in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software modules can be located in random memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, etc., which are well established in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory 530. The processor 520 reads the information in the memory 530 and combines the hardware to perform the steps of the above method. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
根据本发明实施例的通信设备 500可对应于本发明实施例的方法中的接 入站点 B (第一接入站点), 并且, 该通信设备 500中的各单元即模块和上 述其他操作和 /或功能分别为了实现图 1中的方法 100的相应流程,为了筒洁, 在此不再赘述。  The communication device 500 according to an embodiment of the present invention may correspond to an access station B (first access site) in the method of the embodiment of the present invention, and each unit in the communication device 500 is a module and the other operations described above and/or For the purpose of implementing the corresponding process of the method 100 in FIG. 1 , the functions are not described here.
本发明实施例的通信设备,通过在目标移动设备从源站点切换至目的站 点后, 继续通过设置有用于传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载的源站点传 输该目标移动设备的数据, 无需变更传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载, 从而, 能够减少因切换而产生的信令开销。  The communication device of the embodiment of the present invention continues to transmit data of the target mobile device through a source station provided with a common bearer for transmitting data of the target mobile device after the target mobile device is switched from the source site to the destination site, without changing the transmission. The common bearer of the data of the target mobile device, and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
图 7示出了根据本发明实施例的通信设备 600的示意性框图。如图 7所 示, 该设备 600包括:  FIG. 7 shows a schematic block diagram of a communication device 600 in accordance with an embodiment of the present invention. As shown in Figure 7, the device 600 includes:
总线 610; 与该总线 610相连的处理器 620; Bus 610; a processor 620 connected to the bus 610;
与该总线 610相连的存储器 630;  a memory 630 connected to the bus 610;
与该总线 610相连的收发器 640;  a transceiver 640 connected to the bus 610;
其中,该处理器 620通过该总线 610,调用该存储器 630中存储的程序, 以用于控制该收发器 640向该第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息, 该第一 切换指示信息用于指示该第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 该公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据; 用于控制该收发器 640接收该第一接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备 的第一数据, 并控制该收发器 640通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该 第一数据; 和 /或  The processor 620, by using the bus 610, invokes a program stored in the memory 630, and is configured to control the transceiver 640 to send first handover indication information to the first access site, where the first handover indication information is used. And indicating that the second access site and the first gateway device are provided with a common bearer for transmitting data of the at least one mobile device including the target mobile device; and controlling the transceiver 640 to receive the first Receiving, by the access station, first data from the target mobile device, and controlling the transceiver 640 to forward the first data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer; and/or
用于控制该收发器 640向该第一接入站点发送第二数据, 以便于该第一 接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第二数据, 其中, 该第二数据是该第一网 关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的 数据。  Controlling the transceiver 640 to send the second data to the first access station, so that the first access station forwards the second data to the target mobile device, where the second data is the first gateway device Data corresponding to the target mobile device transmitted to the second access site by the public bearer.
可选地, 该第一接入站点与该第二接入站点能够通信。  Optionally, the first access station and the second access station are capable of communicating.
可选地, 该第一接入站点与该第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the first access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
可选地,该处理器 620具体用于控制该收发器 640向该第一接入站点发 送第一切换请求消息,其中,该第一切换请求消息包括该第一切换指示信息。  Optionally, the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to send a first handover request message to the first access site, where the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information.
可选地, 该处理器 620还用于获取该第一接入站点的路由信息; 用于控制该收发器 640根据该第一接入站点的路由信息, 向该第一接入 站点发送该第二数据。  Optionally, the processor 620 is further configured to obtain routing information of the first access station, and configured to control the transceiver 640 to send the first access station according to routing information of the first access site. Two data.
可选地,该处理器 620具体用于控制该收发器 640接收该第一接入站点 发送的第一切换请求响应消息, 其中, 该第一切换请求响应消息包括该第一 接入站点的路由信息;  Optionally, the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the first handover request response message sent by the first access station, where the first handover request response message includes a route of the first access site. Information
用于从该第一切换请求响应消息中, 获取该第一接入站点的路由信息。 可选地,该处理器 620具体用于控制该收发器 640接收移动性管理实体 MME发送的该第一接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 该第一接入站点的路由信 息是该 MME从该第一接入站点获取的。  And the routing information of the first access site is obtained from the first handover request response message. Optionally, the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the routing information of the first access site sent by the mobility management entity MME, where the routing information of the first access site is the MME from the Obtained by the first access site.
可选地,该处理器 620还用于控制该收发器 640向该第一接入站点发送 该第二接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第一接入站点根据该第二接入站点的 路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送该第一数据。 Optionally, the processor 620 is further configured to control the transceiver 640 to send routing information of the second access site to the first access site, so that the first access site is configured according to the second access site. Routing information, sending the first data to the second access station.
可选地,该处理器 620还用于确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点切 换至第三接入站点;  Optionally, the processor 620 is further configured to determine that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site;
用于控制该收发器 640向该第三接入站点发送第四数据, 以便于该第三 接入站点向该目标移动设备转发该第四数据, 其中, 该第四数据是该第一网 关设备通过该公共承发送给该第二接入站点的与该目标移动设备相对应的 数据; 和 /或  Controlling the transceiver 640 to send fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, where the fourth data is the first gateway device Data corresponding to the target mobile device transmitted to the second access site by the common carrier; and/or
用于控制该收发器 640接收该第三接入站点发送的来自该目标移动设备 的第三数据, 并通过该公共承载向该第一网关设备转发该第三数据。  The transceiver 640 is configured to receive the third data sent by the third access station from the target mobile device, and forward the third data to the first gateway device by using the common bearer.
可选地, 该第一接入站点与该第三接入站点能够通信。  Optionally, the first access station and the third access station are capable of communicating.
可选地, 该第一接入站点与该第三接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 该预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。  Optionally, the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, where each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
可选地,该处理器 620还用于控制该收发器 640接收该第一接入站点发 送的第三切换指示信息, 该第三切换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从 该第一接入站点切换至该第三接入站点;  Optionally, the processor 620 is further configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the third handover indication information sent by the first access station, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has received the first connection. The inbound site switches to the third access site;
用于根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点 切换至该第三接入站点。  And determining, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site.
可选地, 该处理器 620具体用于控制该收发器 640接收 MME发送的第 三切换指示信息, 该第三切换指示信息用于指示该目标移动设备已从该第一 接入站点切换至该第三接入站点, 该第三切换指示信息是该第三接入站点发 送给该 MME的;  Optionally, the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the third handover indication information that is sent by the MME, where the third handover indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the a third access station, where the third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME;
用于根据该第三切换指示信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第一接入站点 切换至该第三接入站点。  And determining, according to the third handover indication information, that the target mobile device is handed over from the first access site to the third access site.
可选地, 该处理器 620还用于获取该第三接入站点的路由信息; 用于控制该收发器 640根据该第三接入站点的路由信息, 向该第三接入 站点发送该第四数据。  Optionally, the processor 620 is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access station, and configured to control the transceiver 640 to send the third access station according to routing information of the third access site. Four data.
可选地,该处理器 620具体用于控制该收发器 640接收该第一接入站点 发送的该第三接入站点的路由信息。  Optionally, the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive routing information of the third access station sent by the first access station.
可选地, 该处理器 620具体用于控制该收发器 640接收 MME发送的该 第三接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 该第三接入站点的路由信息是该 MME从 该第三接入站点获取的。 可选地,该处理器 620还用于控制该收发器 640向该第三接入站点发送 该第二接入站点的路由信息, 以便于该第三接入站点根据该第二接入站点的 路由信息, 向该第二接入站点发送该第三数据。 Optionally, the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to receive the routing information of the third access site that is sent by the MME, where the routing information of the third access site is the third access of the MME. Site acquired. Optionally, the processor 620 is further configured to control the transceiver 640 to send routing information of the second access site to the third access site, so that the third access site is configured according to the second access site. Routing information, sending the third data to the second access station.
可选地,该处理器 620还用于获取该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报 信息;  Optionally, the processor 620 is further configured to obtain the first measurement report information sent by the target mobile device.
用于根据该第一测量上报信息,确定该目标移动设备从该第二接入站点 切换至该第一接入站点。  And determining, according to the first measurement reporting information, that the target mobile device is handed over from the second access site to the first access site.
可选地,该处理器 620具体用于控制该收发器 640向目标移动设备发送 至少一个第一测量指示信息, 该第一测量指示信息包括第一目标载频的载频 信息, 该第一目标载频上配置有至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 该第一 测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个信息: 第一测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个 参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指示信息;  Optionally, the processor 620 is specifically configured to control the transceiver 640 to send at least one first measurement indication information to the target mobile device, where the first measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the first target carrier frequency, the first target At least one machine type communication MTC cell is configured on the carrier frequency, the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following: first measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
用于控制该收发器 640接收该目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息, 该第一测量上报信息是该目标移动设备根据该第一测量指示信息进行测量 后发送的;  The first measurement report information is sent by the target mobile device according to the first measurement indication information, and is sent by the target mobile device.
其中, 该第一测量带宽指示信息用于指示第一测量带宽, 该第一测量带 宽用于该至少一个 MTC小区的测量,该第一测量带宽与第二测量带宽相异, 该第二测量带宽用于配置在该第一目标载频上的第一非 MTC小区的测量; 该参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区的参考符号的配置, 该 MTC小区的参考符号用于该 MTC小区的测量;  The first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate a first measurement bandwidth, where the first measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth is different from the second measurement bandwidth, and the second measurement bandwidth is different. Means for configuring a first non-MTC cell on the first target carrier frequency; the reference symbol indication information is used to indicate a configuration of a reference symbol of a corresponding MTC cell, where a reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for the MTC cell Measurement;
该子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。  The subframe indication information is used to indicate a subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
可选地,该处理器 620还用于确定该目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通 信。  Optionally, the processor 620 is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
可选地, 其特征在于, 该移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备, 该 接入站点包括基站设备和 /或中继设备。  Optionally, the mobile device comprises a user equipment and/or a mobile relay device, and the access station comprises a base station device and/or a relay device.
可选地,其特征在于,该路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编 号。  Optionally, the routing information comprises a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
处理器 620控制通信设备 600的操作,处理器 620还可以称为 CPU。存 储器 630可以包括只读存储器和随机存取存储器, 并向处理器 620提供指令 和数据。 存储器 630 的一部分还可以包括非易失行随机存取存储器 ( NVRAM )。具体的应用中,通信设备 600可以嵌入或者本身可以就是例如 移动电话之类的无线通信设备, 还可以包括容纳发射电路和接收电路的载 体, 以允许通信设备 600和远程位置之间进行数据发射和接收。 发射电路和 接收电路可以耦合到天线。 通信设备 600的各个组件通过总线(也可以称为 总线系统) 610耦合在一起, 其中, 总线 610除包括数据总线之外, 还包括 电源总线、 控制总线和状态信号总线。 但是为了清楚明起见, 在图中将各种 总线都标为总线 610。 通信设备 600还可以包括用于处理信号的处理单元、 此外还包括功率控制器、 解码处理器。 具体的不同产品中解码器可能与处理 单元集成为一体。 辑框图。 处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器, 解码器等。 结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤可以直接体现为硬件处理 器执行完成, 或者用解码处理器中的硬件及软件模块组合执行完成。 软件模 块可以位于随机存储器, 闪存、 只读存储器, 可编程只读存储器或者电可擦 写可编程存储器、 寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。 该存储介质位于存储 器 630, 解码单元或者处理单元读取存储器 630中的信息, 结合其硬件完成 上述方法的步骤。 The processor 620 controls the operation of the communication device 600, which may also be referred to as a CPU. Memory 630 can include read only memory and random access memory and provides instructions and data to processor 620. A portion of the memory 630 may also include non-volatile line random access memory (NVRAM). In a particular application, the communication device 600 can be embedded or itself can be, for example A wireless communication device, such as a mobile telephone, may also include a carrier that houses the transmitting circuitry and the receiving circuitry to allow for data transmission and reception between the communications device 600 and the remote location. The transmit and receive circuits can be coupled to the antenna. The various components of communication device 600 are coupled together by a bus (also referred to as a bus system) 610, which in addition to the data bus includes a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for the sake of clarity, various buses are labeled as bus 610 in the figure. The communication device 600 can also include a processing unit for processing signals, and further includes a power controller, a decoding processor. The decoder in a specific different product may be integrated with the processing unit. Block diagram. The processor can be a microprocessor or the processor can be any conventional processor, decoder or the like. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as hardware processor execution completion, or performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the decoding processor. The software modules can be located in a conventional storage medium such as random access memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, and the like. The storage medium is located in the memory 630, and the decoding unit or the processing unit reads the information in the memory 630, and completes the steps of the above method in combination with the hardware thereof.
应理解,在本发明实施例中,该处理器 620可以是中央处理单元( Central Processing Unit, 筒称为 "CPU" ), 该处理器 620还可以是其他通用处理器、 数字信号处理器(DSP )、专用集成电路(ASIC )、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA ) 或者其他可编程逻辑器件、 分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、 分立硬件组件等。 通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。  It should be understood that, in the embodiment of the present invention, the processor 620 may be a central processing unit (a central processing unit, referred to as a "CPU"), and the processor 620 may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP). ), application specific integrated circuits (ASICs), off-the-shelf programmable gate arrays (FPGAs) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, and the like. The general purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor or any conventional processor or the like.
在实现过程中,上述方法的各步骤可以通过处理器 620中的硬件的集成 逻辑电路或者软件形式的指令完成。 结合本发明实施例所公开的方法的步骤 可以直接体现为硬件处理器执行完成, 或者用处理器中的硬件及软件模块组 合执行完成。 软件模块可以位于随机存储器, 闪存、 只读存储器, 可编程只 读存储器或者电可擦写可编程存储器、 寄存器等本领域成熟的存储介质中。 该存储介质位于存储器 630, 处理器 620读取存储器 630中的信息, 结合其 硬件完成上述方法的步骤。 为避免重复, 这里不再详细描述。  In an implementation process, the steps of the above method may be completed by an integrated logic circuit of hardware in the processor 620 or an instruction in the form of software. The steps of the method disclosed in the embodiments of the present invention may be directly implemented as a hardware processor, or may be performed by a combination of hardware and software modules in the processor. The software modules can be located in random memory, flash memory, read only memory, programmable read only memory or electrically erasable programmable memory, registers, etc., which are well established in the art. The storage medium is located in the memory 630. The processor 620 reads the information in the memory 630 and combines the hardware to complete the steps of the above method. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
根据本发明实施例的通信设备 600可对应于本发明实施例的方法中的接 入站点 A (第二接入站点), 并且, 该通信设备 600中的各单元即模块和上 述其他操作和 /或功能分别为了实现图 3中的方法 200的相应流程,为了筒洁, 在此不再赘述。 The communication device 600 according to the embodiment of the present invention may correspond to the access site A (second access site) in the method of the embodiment of the present invention, and each unit in the communication device 600 is a module and the above other operations and/or Or function to achieve the corresponding process of the method 200 in FIG. 3, respectively, in order to clean, I will not repeat them here.
本发明实施例的通信设备,通过在目标移动设备从源站点切换至目的站 点后, 继续通过设置有用于传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载的源站点传 输该目标移动设备的数据, 无需变更传输目标移动设备的数据的公共承载, 从而, 能够减少因切换而产生的信令开销。  The communication device of the embodiment of the present invention continues to transmit data of the target mobile device through a source station provided with a common bearer for transmitting data of the target mobile device after the target mobile device is switched from the source site to the destination site, without changing the transmission. The common bearer of the data of the target mobile device, and thus, the signaling overhead caused by the handover can be reduced.
应理解, 本文中术语 "和 /或", 仅仅是一种描述关联对象的关联关系, 表示可以存在三种关系, 例如, A和 /或 B, 可以表示: 单独存在 A, 同时存 在 A和 B, 单独存在 B这三种情况。 另外, 本文中字符 "/" , 一般表示前后 关联对象是一种 "或" 的关系。  It should be understood that the term "and/or" in this context is merely an association describing the associated object, indicating that there may be three relationships, for example, A and / or B, which may represent: A exists separately, and A and B exist simultaneously There are three cases of B alone. In addition, the character "/" in this article generally indicates that the context object is an "or" relationship.
应理解, 在本发明的各种实施例中, 上述各过程的序号的大小并不意味 着执行顺序的先后, 各过程的执行顺序应以其功能和内在逻辑确定, 而不应 对本发明实施例的实施过程构成任何限定。  It should be understood that, in various embodiments of the present invention, the size of the sequence numbers of the above processes does not mean the order of execution, and the order of execution of each process should be determined by its function and internal logic, and should not be taken to the embodiments of the present invention. The implementation process constitutes any limitation.
本领域普通技术人员可以意识到, 结合本文中所公开的实施例描述的各 示例的单元及算法步骤, 能够以电子硬件、 或者计算机软件和电子硬件的结 合来实现。 这些功能究竟以硬件还是软件方式来执行, 取决于技术方案的特 定应用和设计约束条件。 专业技术人员可以对每个特定的应用来使用不同方 法来实现所描述的功能, 但是这种实现不应认为超出本发明的范围。  Those of ordinary skill in the art will appreciate that the elements and algorithm steps of the various examples described in connection with the embodiments disclosed herein can be implemented in a combination of electronic hardware or computer software and electronic hardware. Whether these functions are performed in hardware or software depends on the specific application and design constraints of the solution. A person skilled in the art can use different methods for implementing the described functions for each particular application, but such implementation should not be considered to be beyond the scope of the present invention.
所属领域的技术人员可以清楚地了解到, 为描述的方便和筒洁, 上述描 述的系统、 装置和单元的具体工作过程, 可以参考前述方法实施例中的对应 过程, 在此不再赘述。  It will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, for the convenience of the description and the cleaning process, the specific operation of the system, the device and the unit described above may be referred to the corresponding processes in the foregoing method embodiments, and details are not described herein again.
在本申请所提供的几个实施例中, 应该理解到, 所揭露的系统、 装置和 方法, 可以通过其它的方式实现。 例如, 以上所描述的装置实施例仅仅是示 意性的, 例如, 所述单元的划分, 仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分, 实际实现时可 以有另外的划分方式, 例如多个单元或组件可以结合或者可以集成到另一个 系统, 或一些特征可以忽略, 或不执行。 另一点, 所显示或讨论的相互之间 的耦合或直接耦合或通信连接可以是通过一些接口, 装置或单元的间接耦合 或通信连接, 可以是电性, 机械或其它的形式。  In the several embodiments provided herein, it should be understood that the disclosed systems, devices, and methods may be implemented in other ways. For example, the device embodiments described above are merely illustrative. For example, the division of the unit is only a logical function division. In actual implementation, there may be another division manner, for example, multiple units or components may be combined or Can be integrated into another system, or some features can be ignored, or not executed. In addition, the coupling or direct coupling or communication connection shown or discussed may be an indirect coupling or communication connection through some interface, device or unit, and may be electrical, mechanical or otherwise.
所述作为分离部件说明的单元可以是或者也可以不是物理上分开的,作 为单元显示的部件可以是或者也可以不是物理单元, 即可以位于一个地方, 或者也可以分布到多个网络单元上。可以根据实际的需要选择其中的部分或 者全部单元来实现本实施例方案的目的。 另外, 在本发明各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元 中, 也可以是各个单元单独物理存在, 也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一 个单元中。 The units described as separate components may or may not be physically separated, and the components displayed as units may or may not be physical units, that is, may be located in one place, or may be distributed to multiple network units. Some or all of the units may be selected according to actual needs to achieve the purpose of the solution of the embodiment. In addition, each functional unit in each embodiment of the present invention may be integrated into one processing unit, or each unit may exist physically separately, or two or more units may be integrated into one unit.
所述功能如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使 用时, 可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。 基于这样的理解, 本发明 的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的部 分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来,该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质 中, 包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机, 服务器, 或者网络设备等)执行本发明各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。 而前 述的存储介质包括: U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器( ROM, Read-Only Memory )、 随机存取存储器(RAM, Random Access Memory ), 磁碟或者光盘等各种可 以存储程序代码的介质。  The functions, if implemented in the form of software functional units and sold or used as separate products, may be stored in a computer readable storage medium. Based on such understanding, the technical solution of the present invention, which is essential to the prior art or part of the technical solution, may be embodied in the form of a software product stored in a storage medium, including The instructions are used to cause a computer device (which may be a personal computer, server, or network device, etc.) to perform all or part of the steps of the methods described in various embodiments of the present invention. The foregoing storage medium includes: a U disk, a mobile hard disk, a read-only memory (ROM), a random access memory (RAM), a magnetic disk or an optical disk, and the like, which can store program codes. .
以上所述, 仅为本发明的具体实施方式, 但本发明的保护范围并不局限 于此, 任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本发明揭露的技术范围内, 可轻易 想到变化或替换, 都应涵盖在本发明的保护范围之内。 因此, 本发明的保护 范围应以所述权利要求的保护范围为准。  The above is only the specific embodiment of the present invention, but the scope of the present invention is not limited thereto, and any person skilled in the art can easily think of changes or substitutions within the technical scope of the present invention. It should be covered by the scope of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the invention should be determined by the scope of the appended claims.

Claims

权利要求 Rights request
1、 一种通信方法, 其特征在于, 所述方法包括: 1. A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
接入站点中的第一接入站点获取第二接入站点发送的第一切换指示信 息, 所述第一切换指示信息用于指示所述第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间 设有公共承载,所述公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移 动设备的数据; The first access site among the access sites obtains the first switching instruction information sent by the second access site, and the first switching instruction information is used to indicate that there is a switch between the second access site and the first gateway device. A public bearer, the public bearer is used to transmit data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
所述第一接入站点向所述第二接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第一 数据, 以便于所述第二接入站点通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发 所述第一数据; 和 /或 The first access site sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, so that the second access site forwards the first data to the first gateway device through the public bearer. first data; and/or
所述第一接入站点接收所述第二接入站点发送的第二数据, 并向所述目 标移动设备转发所述第二数据, 其中, 所述第二数据是所述第一网关设备通 过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标移动设备相对应的数 据。 The first access site receives the second data sent by the second access site, and forwards the second data to the target mobile device, wherein the second data is obtained by the first gateway device. The public carries data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site.
2、 根据权利要求 1所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方法还包括: 所述第一接入站点确定能够与所述第二接入站点通信。 2. The method according to claim 1, wherein the method further includes: determining that the first access station can communicate with the second access station.
3、 根据权利要求 2所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点确定 能够与所述第二接入站点通信, 包括: 3. The method according to claim 2, wherein the first access site determines that it can communicate with the second access site, including:
所述第一接入站点确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 The first access station is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the access stations in the preset area are able to communicate with each other.
4、 根据权利要求 3所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点确定 所述第二接入站点处于预设区域包括: 4. The method according to claim 3, wherein the first access station determining that the second access station is in a preset area includes:
所述第一接入站点获取至少一个第一区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入 站点的小区标识、 所述第二接入站点的小区标识、 小区列表和所述至少一个 第一区域指示信息, 确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所 述第一区域指示信息用于指示所述小区列表中属于所述第一区域指示信息 所对应的预设区域的小区标识; 或 The first access station obtains at least one first area indication information according to the cell identity of the first access station, the cell identity of the second access station, the cell list and the at least one first region indication. information, determining that it is in the same preset area as the second access site, wherein the first area indication information is used to indicate cells in the cell list that belong to the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information. logo; or
所述第一接入站点获取至少一个第二区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入 站点的跟踪区域标识、 所述第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识、 跟踪区域标识列 表和所述至少一个第二区域指示信息,确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预 设区域, 其中, 所述第二区域指示信息用于指示所述跟踪区域标识列表中属 于所述第二区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识; 或 所述第一接入站点获取至少一个第三区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入 站点的小区标识、所述第二接入站点的小区标识和所述至少一个第三区域指 示信息, 确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述第三区域 指示信息用于指示属于所述第三区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的小区标 识; 或 The first access station obtains at least one second area indication information based on the tracking area identifier of the first access site, the tracking area identifier of the second access site, the tracking area identifier list and the at least one The second area indication information is determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, wherein the second area indication information is used to indicate that the tracking area identification list belongs to the second area indication information corresponding to the tracking area identifier of the preset area; or The first access station acquires at least one third area indication information, and determines based on the cell identity of the first access station, the cell identity of the second access station and the at least one third region indication information. Being in the same preset area as the second access site, wherein the third area indication information is used to indicate the cell identity belonging to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information; or
所述第一接入站点获取至少一个第四区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入 站点的跟踪区域标识、所述第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识和所述至少一个第 四区域指示信息, 确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述 第四区域指示信息用于指示属于所述第四区域指示信息所对应的预设区域 的跟踪区域标识。 The first access station obtains at least one fourth area indication information according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station and the at least one fourth area indication information. , determine that it is in the same preset area as the second access station, wherein the fourth area indication information is used to indicate a tracking area identifier belonging to the preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
5、 根据权利要求 4所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点获取 至少一个第一区域指示信息, 包括: 5. The method according to claim 4, characterized in that the first access station obtains at least one first area indication information, including:
第一接入站点从移动管理实体 MME或运营管理系统 OAM获取所述至 少一个第一区域指示信息; The first access station obtains the at least one first area indication information from the mobility management entity MME or the operation management system OAM;
所述第一接入站点获取至少一个第二区域指示信息, 包括: The first access station obtains at least one second area indication information, including:
第一接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取所述至少一个第二区域指示信息; 所述第一接入站点获取至少一个第三区域指示信息, 包括: The first access station obtains the at least one second area indication information from the MME or OAM; the first access station obtains at least one third area indication information, including:
第一接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取所述至少一个第三区域指示信息; 所述第一接入站点获取至少一个第四区域指示信息, 包括: The first access station obtains the at least one third area indication information from the MME or OAM; the first access station obtains at least one fourth area indication information, including:
第一接入站点从 MME或 OAM获取所述至少一个第四区域指示信息。 The first access station obtains the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or OAM.
6、 根据权利要求 1至 5中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一 接入站点获取第二接入站点发送的第一切换指示信息包括: 6. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 5, characterized in that, the first access station obtaining the first handover instruction information sent by the second access station includes:
所述第一接入站点接收所述第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其 中, 所述第一切换请求消息包括所述第一切换指示信息; The first access station receives a first handover request message sent by the second access station, wherein the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information;
所述第一接入站点从所述第一切换请求消息中, 获取所述第一切换指示 信息。 The first access station obtains the first handover indication information from the first handover request message.
7、 根据权利要求 1至 6中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一 接入站点向所述第二接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第一数据, 包括: 所述第一接入站点获取所述第二接入站点的路由信息; 7. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that: the first access site sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, including: The first access station obtains routing information of the second access station;
所述第一接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第二接入 站点发送来自所述移动设备的第一数据。 The first access site sends the first data from the mobile device to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
8、 根据权利要求 7所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点获取 所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 8. The method according to claim 7, wherein the first access station obtains the routing information of the second access station, including:
所述第一接入站点接收所述第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其 中, 所述第一切换请求消息包括所述第二接入站点的路由信息; The first access station receives a first handover request message sent by the second access station, wherein the first handover request message includes routing information of the second access station;
所述第一接入站点从所述第一切换请求消息中, 获取所述第二接入站点 的路由信息。 The first access station obtains the routing information of the second access station from the first handover request message.
9、 根据权利要求 1至 8中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述第 一接入站点接收所述第二接入站点发送的第二数据之前, 所述方法还包括: 所述第一接入站点向所述第二接入站点发送所述第一接入站点的路由 信息, 以便于所述第二接入站点根据所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 向所述 第一接入站点发送所述第二数据。 9. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 8, characterized in that, before the first access station receives the second data sent by the second access station, the method further includes: The first access station sends the routing information of the first access station to the second access station, so that the second access station sends the routing information to the first access station according to the routing information of the first access station. The first access station sends the second data.
10、 根据权利要求 9所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点向所 述第二接入站点发送所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 10. The method according to claim 9, wherein the first access station sends the routing information of the first access station to the second access station, including:
所述第一接入站点向所述第二接入站点发送第一切换请求响应消息, 其 中, 所述第一切换请求响应消息包括所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于 所述第二接入站点从所述第一切换请求响应消息中获取所述第一接入站点 的路由信息。 The first access station sends a first handover request response message to the second access station, wherein the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access station, so as to facilitate the The second access station obtains the routing information of the first access station from the first handover request response message.
11、 根据权利要求 9所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点向所 述第二接入站点发送所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 11. The method according to claim 9, wherein the first access station sends the routing information of the first access station to the second access station, including:
所述第一接入站点向 MME发送所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于 所述 MME向所述第二接入站点转发所述第一接入站点的路由信息。 The first access site sends the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME forwards the routing information of the first access site to the second access site.
12、 根据权利要求 1至 11 中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方 法还包括: 12. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 11, characterized in that the method further includes:
所述第一接入站点向第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息, 所述第二切 换指示信息用于指示所述第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 以便于所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点, 以 及 The first access site sends second handover instruction information to the third access site, where the second handover instruction information is used to indicate that a common bearer is provided between the second access site and the first gateway device, so that switching the target mobile device from the first access site to the third access site, and
所述第三接入站点在所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至所 述第三接入站点后, 向所述第二接入站点发送来自所述目标移动设备的第三 数据, 所述第二接入站点通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发所述第 三数据, 和 /或 所述第二接入站点在确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换 至所述第三接入站点后, 向所述第三接入站点发送第四数据, 所述第三接入 站点向所述目标移动设备转发所述第四数据, 其中, 所述第四数据是所述第 一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标移动设 备相对应的数据。 The third access site sends the third access point from the target mobile device to the second access site after the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site. data, the second access site forwards the third data to the first gateway device through the public bearer, and/or After determining that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the second access site sends fourth data to the third access site, and the third access site The access site forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, wherein the fourth data is the information related to the target mobile device that the first gateway device sends to the second access site through the public bearer. Data corresponding to the device.
13、 根据权利要求 12所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方法还包括: 所述第一接入站点向所述第三接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的小区 标识或跟踪区域标识, 以便于所述第三接入站点在根据所述第二接入站点的 小区标识或跟踪区域标识确定所述第三接入站点与所述第二接入站点处于 同一预设区域之后, 向所述第二接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第三数 据, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 13. The method of claim 12, further comprising: the first access station sending the cell identifier or tracking area of the second access station to the third access station. identification, so that after the third access station determines that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area according to the cell ID or tracking area ID of the second access station, Send third data from the mobile device to the second access site, wherein each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
14、根据权利要求 12或 13所述的方法,其特征在于,所述方法还包括: 所述第一接入站点向所述第三接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的路由 信息, 以便于所述第三接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述 第二接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第三数据。 14. The method according to claim 12 or 13, characterized in that the method further includes: the first access station sending the routing information of the second access station to the third access station, So that the third access station sends the third data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
15、 根据权利要求 12至 14中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方 法还包括: 15. The method according to any one of claims 12 to 14, characterized in that the method further includes:
所述第一接入站点获取所述第三接入站点的路由信息; The first access station obtains routing information of the third access station;
所述第一接入站点向所述第二接入站点发送所述第三接入站点的路由 信息, 以便于所述第二接入站点根据第三接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第三 接入站点发送第四数据。 The first access station sends the routing information of the third access station to the second access station, so that the second access station sends the routing information to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station. The third access station sends the fourth data.
16、 根据权利要求 12至 15中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方 法还包括: 16. The method according to any one of claims 12 to 15, characterized in that the method further includes:
所述第一接入站点向所述第二接入站点发送用于指示所述目标移动设 备已从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点的第三切换指示信息, 以 便于所述第二接入站点根据所述第三切换指示信息,确定所述目标移动设备 从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 The first access site sends to the second access site third handover indication information indicating that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site, so that At the second access site, it is determined that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site according to the third handover instruction information.
17、 根据权利要求 12至 16中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述 第一接入站点向所述第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息之前,所述方法还 包括: 17. The method according to any one of claims 12 to 16, characterized in that, before the first access station sends the second handover instruction information to the third access station, the method further includes: :
所述第一接入站点获取所述目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息; 所述第一接入站点根据所述第二测量上报信息,确定所述目标移动设备 从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 The first access station obtains the second measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device; The first access site determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site based on the second measurement reporting information.
18、 根据权利要求 17所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点获 取所述目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 包括: 18. The method according to claim 17, wherein the first access station obtains the second measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, including:
所述第一接入站点向目标移动设备发送至少一个第二测量指示信息, 所 述第二测量指示信息包括第二目标载频的载频信息, 所述第二目标载频上配 置有至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 所述第二测量指示信息还包括以下 至少一个信息: 第三测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少 一个子帧指示信息; The first access station sends at least one second measurement indication information to the target mobile device, the second measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of a second target carrier frequency, and the second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one In the machine type communication MTC cell, the second measurement indication information also includes at least one of the following information: third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
所述第一接入站点接收所述目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 所 述第二测量上报信息是所述目标移动设备根据所述第二测量指示信息进行 测量后发送的; The first access station receives the second measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, and the second measurement reporting information is sent by the target mobile device after measuring according to the second measurement indication information;
其中, 所述第三测量带宽指示信息用于指示第三测量带宽, 所述第三测 量带宽用于所述至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 所述第三测量带宽与第四测量 带宽相异,所述第四测量带宽用于配置在所述第二目标载频上的第二非 MTC 小区的测量; Wherein, the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the third measurement bandwidth, the third measurement bandwidth is used for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, so The fourth measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of a second non-MTC cell configured on the second target carrier frequency;
所述参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC 小区的参考符号的配 置, 所述 MTC小区的参考符号用于所述 MTC小区的测量; The reference symbol indication information is used to indicate the configuration of the reference symbols of the corresponding MTC cell, and the reference symbols of the MTC cell are used for measurement of the MTC cell;
所述子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 The subframe indication information is used to indicate the subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
19、 根据权利要求 1至 18中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方 法还包括: 19. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 18, characterized in that the method further includes:
所述第一接入站点确定所述目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。 The first access site determines that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communications.
20、 根据权利要求 1至 19中任一项中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,所述接入站点包括基站设备 和 /或中继设备。 20. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 19, wherein the mobile device includes user equipment and/or mobile relay equipment, and the access site includes base station equipment and/or or relay equipment.
21、根据权利要求 7至 11、 14或 15中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于, 所述路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。 21. The method according to any one of claims 7 to 11, 14 or 15, characterized in that the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
22、 一种通信方法, 其特征在于, 所述方法包括: 22. A communication method, characterized in that the method includes:
接入站点中的第二接入站点向所述第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信 息, 所述第一切换指示信息用于指示所述第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间 设有公共承载,所述公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移 动设备的数据; The second access site among the access sites sends first switching instruction information to the first access site. The first switching instruction information is used to instruct the establishment of a switch between the second access site and the first gateway device. There is a public bearer, which is used to transmit at least one mobile device including the target mobile device. data of mobile equipment;
所述第二接入站点接收所述第一接入站点发送的来自所述目标移动设 备的第一数据, 并通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发所述第一数 据; 和 /或 The second access site receives the first data from the target mobile device sent by the first access site, and forwards the first data to the first gateway device through the public bearer; and/ or
所述第二接入站点向所述第一接入站点发送第二数据, 以便于所述第一 接入站点向所述目标移动设备转发所述第二数据, 其中, 所述第二数据是所 述第一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标移 动设备相对应的数据。 The second access site sends second data to the first access site, so that the first access site forwards the second data to the target mobile device, wherein the second data is The first gateway device sends data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the public bearer.
23、 根据权利要求 22所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点与 所述第二接入站点能够通信。 23. The method according to claim 22, characterized in that the first access site and the second access site can communicate.
24、 根据权利要求 22或 23所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站 点与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各接入 站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 24. The method according to claim 22 or 23, characterized in that the first access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, wherein each access site in the preset area Sites are able to communicate with each other.
25、 根据权利要求 22至 24中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述向 所述第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息包括: 25. The method according to any one of claims 22 to 24, wherein sending the first handover instruction information to the first access station includes:
向所述第一接入站点发送第一切换请求消息, 其中, 所述第一切换请求 消息包括所述第一切换指示信息。 Send a first switching request message to the first access station, where the first switching request message includes the first switching indication information.
26、 根据权利要求 22至 25中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第 二接入站点向所述第一接入站点发送第二数据, 包括: 26. The method according to any one of claims 22 to 25, characterized in that the second access site sends second data to the first access site, including:
所述第二接入站点获取所述第一接入站点的路由信息; The second access site obtains routing information of the first access site;
所述第二接入站点根据所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第一接入 站点发送所述第二数据。 The second access station sends the second data to the first access station according to the routing information of the first access station.
27、 根据权利要求 26所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二接入站点获 取所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 27. The method according to claim 26, wherein the second access site obtains the routing information of the first access site, including:
所述第二接入站点接收所述第一接入站点发送的第一切换请求响应消 息, 其中, 所述第一切换请求响应消息包括所述第一接入站点的路由信息; 所述第二接入站点从所述第一切换请求响应消息中,获取所述第一接入 站点的路由信息。 The second access station receives a first handover request response message sent by the first access station, wherein the first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access station; the second access station The access station obtains the routing information of the first access station from the first handover request response message.
28、 根据权利要求 26所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二接入站点获 取所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 28. The method according to claim 26, wherein the second access site obtains the routing information of the first access site, including:
所述第二接入站点接收移动性管理实体 MME发送的所述第一接入站点 的路由信息, 其中, 所述第一接入站点的路由信息是所述 MME从所述第一 接入站点获取的。 The second access station receives the first access station sent by the mobility management entity MME. The routing information of the first access site is obtained by the MME from the first access site.
29、 根据权利要求 22至 28中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述 第二接入站点接收所述第一接入站点发送的来自所述目标移动设备的第一 数据之前, 所述方法还包括: 29. The method according to any one of claims 22 to 28, characterized in that, before the second access station receives the first data from the target mobile device sent by the first access station, , the method also includes:
所述第二接入站点向所述第一接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的路由 信息, 以便于所述第一接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述 第二接入站点发送所述第一数据。 The second access station sends the routing information of the second access station to the first access station, so that the first access station sends the routing information to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station. The second access station sends the first data.
30、 根据权利要求 22至 29中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方 法还包括: 30. The method according to any one of claims 22 to 29, characterized in that the method further includes:
所述第二接入站点确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至 第三接入站点; The second access site determines that the target mobile device is switched from the first access site to a third access site;
所述第二接入站点向所述第三接入站点发送第四数据, 以便于所述第三 接入站点向所述目标移动设备转发所述第四数据, 其中, 所述第四数据是所 述第一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标移 动设备相对应的数据; 和 /或 The second access station sends fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, wherein the fourth data is The data corresponding to the target mobile device sent by the first gateway device to the second access site through the public bearer; and/or
所述第二接入站点接收所述第三接入站点发送的来自所述目标移动设 备的第三数据, 并通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发所述第三数 据。 The second access site receives the third data from the target mobile device sent by the third access site, and forwards the third data to the first gateway device through the public bearer.
31、 根据权利要求 30所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点与 所述第三接入站点能够通信。 31. The method according to claim 30, characterized in that the first access site and the third access site can communicate.
32、 根据权利要求 30或 31所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站 点与所述第三接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各接入 站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 32. The method according to claim 30 or 31, characterized in that, the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, wherein each access site in the preset area Sites are able to communicate with each other.
33、 根据权利要求 30至 32中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第 二接入站点确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至第三接入站 点, 包括: 33. The method according to any one of claims 30 to 32, wherein the second access site determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to a third access site, include:
所述第二接入站点接收所述第一接入站点发送的第三切换指示信息, 所 述第三切换指示信息用于指示所述目标移动设备已从所述第一接入站点切 换至所述第三接入站点; The second access station receives the third switching indication information sent by the first access station, and the third switching indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access station to the The third access site;
所述第二接入站点根据所述第三切换指示信息,确定所述目标移动设备 从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 The second access site determines the target mobile device based on the third handover instruction information. Switch from the first access site to the third access site.
34、 根据权利要求 30至 32中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第 二接入站点确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至第三接入站 点, 包括: 34. The method according to any one of claims 30 to 32, characterized in that, the second access site determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to a third access site, include:
所述第二接入站点接收 MME发送的第三切换指示信息, 所述第三切换 指示信息用于指示所述目标移动设备已从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第 三接入站点, 所述第三切换指示信息是所述第三接入站点发送给所述 MME 的; The second access site receives third handover instruction information sent by the MME, and the third handover instruction information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site. , the third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME;
所述第二接入站点根据所述第三切换指示信息,确定所述目标移动设备 从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 The second access site determines that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site based on the third handover indication information.
35、 根据权利要求 30至 34中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第 二接入站点向所述第三接入站点发送第四数据, 包括: 35. The method according to any one of claims 30 to 34, characterized in that the second access site sends fourth data to the third access site, including:
所述第二接入站点获取所述第三接入站点的路由信息; The second access site obtains routing information of the third access site;
所述第二接入站点根据所述第三接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第三接入 站点发送所述第四数据。 The second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
36、 根据权利要求 35所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二接入站点获 取所述第三接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 36. The method of claim 35, wherein the second access site obtains the routing information of the third access site, including:
所述第三接入站点接收所述第一接入站点发送的所述第三接入站点的 路由信息。 The third access station receives the routing information of the third access station sent by the first access station.
37、 根据权利要求 35所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二接入站点获 取所述第三接入站点的路由信息, 包括: 37. The method according to claim 35, wherein the second access site obtains the routing information of the third access site, including:
所述第二接入站点接收 MME发送的所述第三接入站点的路由信息, 其 中,所述第三接入站点的路由信息是所述 MME从所述第三接入站点获取的。 The second access site receives the routing information of the third access site sent by the MME, where the routing information of the third access site is obtained by the MME from the third access site.
38、 根据权利要求 30至 37中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述 第二接入站点接收所述第三接入站点发送的来自所述目标移动设备的第三 数据之前, 所述方法还包括: 38. The method according to any one of claims 30 to 37, characterized in that, before the second access station receives the third data from the target mobile device sent by the third access station, , the method also includes:
所述第二接入站点向所述第三接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的路由 信息, 以便于所述第三接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述 第二接入站点发送所述第三数据。 The second access station sends the routing information of the second access station to the third access station, so that the third access station sends the routing information to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station. The second access station sends the third data.
39、 根据权利要求 22至 38中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 在所述 第二接入站点向所述第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息之前,所述方法还 包括: 39. The method according to any one of claims 22 to 38, characterized in that, before the second access station sends the first handover instruction information to the first access station, the method further include:
所述第二接入站点获取所述目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息; 所述第二接入站点根据所述第一测量上报信息,确定所述目标移动设备 从所述第二接入站点切换至所述第一接入站点。 The second access station obtains the first measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device; the second access station determines that the target mobile device obtains the first measurement reporting information from the second access station based on the first measurement reporting information. The site is switched to the first access site.
40、 根据权利要求 39所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述第二接入站点获 取所述目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息, 包括: 40. The method according to claim 39, characterized in that the second access site obtains the first measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, including:
所述第二接入站点向目标移动设备发送至少一个第一测量指示信息, 所 述第一测量指示信息包括第一目标载频的载频信息, 所述第一目标载频上配 置有至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 所述第一测量指示信息还包括以下 至少一个信息: 第一测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少 一个子帧指示信息; The second access station sends at least one first measurement indication information to the target mobile device, the first measurement indication information includes carrier frequency information of the first target carrier frequency, and the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one In the machine type communication MTC cell, the first measurement indication information further includes at least one of the following information: first measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, and at least one subframe indication information;
所述第二接入站点接收所述目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息, 所 述第一测量上报信息是所述目标移动设备根据所述第一测量指示信息进行 测量后发送的; The second access station receives the first measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, and the first measurement reporting information is sent by the target mobile device after measuring according to the first measurement indication information;
其中, 所述第一测量带宽指示信息用于指示第一测量带宽, 所述第一测 量带宽用于所述至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 所述第一测量带宽与第二测量 带宽相异,所述第二测量带宽用于配置在所述第一目标载频上的第一非 MTC 小区的测量; Wherein, the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the first measurement bandwidth, the first measurement bandwidth is used for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth and the second measurement bandwidth are different, so The second measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the first non-MTC cell configured on the first target carrier frequency;
所述参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC 小区的参考符号的配 置, 所述 MTC小区的参考符号用于所述 MTC小区的测量; The reference symbol indication information is used to indicate the configuration of the reference symbols of the corresponding MTC cell, and the reference symbols of the MTC cell are used for measurement of the MTC cell;
所述子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 The subframe indication information is used to indicate the subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
41、 根据权利要求 22至 40中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在于, 所述方 法还包括: 41. The method according to any one of claims 22 to 40, characterized in that the method further includes:
所述第二接入站点确定所述目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。 The second access site determines that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communications.
42、根据权利要求 22至 41中任一项中任一项所述的方法,其特征在于, 所述移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,所述接入站点包括基站设备 和 /或中继设备。 42. The method according to any one of claims 22 to 41, characterized in that: the mobile device includes user equipment and/or mobile relay equipment, and the access site includes base station equipment and/or or relay equipment.
43、 根据权利要求 26至 29、 35至 38中任一项所述的方法, 其特征在 于, 所述路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。 43. The method according to any one of claims 26 to 29 and 35 to 38, characterized in that the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
44、 一种通信装置, 其特征在于, 所述装置包括: 44. A communication device, characterized in that the device includes:
处理单元, 用于获取第二接入站点发送的第一切换指示信息, 所述第一 切换指示信息用于指示所述第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承 载, 所述公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数 据; A processing unit, configured to obtain the first handover instruction information sent by the second access station, the first The handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is provided between the second access site and the first gateway device, and the common bearer is used to transmit data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
发送单元, 用于向所述第二接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第一数 据, 以便于所述第二接入站点通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发所 述第一数据; 和 /或 A sending unit, configured to send the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, so that the second access site forwards the first data to the first gateway device through the public bearer. data; and/or
接收单元, 用于所述第一接入站点接收所述第二接入站点发送的第二数 所述第二数据是所述第一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站 点的与所述目标移动设备相对应的数据。 A receiving unit, configured for the first access station to receive the second number of the second data sent by the second access station. The second data is sent by the first gateway device to the second access station through the public bearer. The site's data corresponding to the target mobile device.
45、 根据权利要求 44所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处理单元还用于 确定能够与所述第二接入站点通信。 45. The device according to claim 44, wherein the processing unit is further configured to determine that communication with the second access site is possible.
46、 根据权利要求 45所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处理单元具体用 于确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各 接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 46. The device according to claim 45, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to determine that the second access station is in the same preset area, wherein each access station in the preset area Able to communicate with each other.
47、 根据权利要求 46所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处理单元具体用 于获取至少一个第一区域指示信息, 根据所述第一接入站点的小区标识、 所 述第二接入站点的小区标识、 小区列表和所述至少一个第一区域指示信息, 确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述第一区域指示信息 用于指示所述小区列表中属于所述第一区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的 小区标识; 或 47. The device according to claim 46, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to obtain at least one first area indication information, according to the cell identifier of the first access site, the second access site The cell identifier, the cell list and the at least one first area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access site, where the first area indication information is used to indicate that the cell list belongs to The cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information; or
用于获取至少一个第二区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入站点的跟踪区 域标识、 所述第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识、 跟踪区域标识列表和所述至少 一个第二区域指示信息,确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域,其中, 所述第二区域指示信息用于指示所述跟踪区域标识列表中属于所述第二区 域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识; 或 Used to obtain at least one second area indication information, based on the tracking area identification of the first access site, the tracking area identification of the second access site, the tracking area identification list and the at least one second area indication information. , determined to be in the same preset area as the second access site, wherein the second area indication information is used to indicate that the tracking area identification list belongs to the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information. tracking area identifier; or
用于获取至少一个第三区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入站点的小区标 识、 所述第二接入站点的小区标识和所述至少一个第三区域指示信息, 确定 与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述第三区域指示信息用于 指示属于所述第三区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的小区标识; 或 for obtaining at least one third area indication information, and determining, according to the cell identification of the first access station, the cell identification of the second access station and the at least one third area indication information, the information related to the second access station. The access stations are in the same preset area, wherein the third area indication information is used to indicate the cell identity belonging to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information; or
用于获取至少一个第四区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入站点的跟踪区 域标识、所述第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识和所述至少一个第四区域指示信 息, 确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述第四区域指示 信息用于指示属于所述第四区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标 识。 Used to obtain at least one fourth area indication information, according to the tracking area of the first access station The domain identifier, the tracking area identifier of the second access station and the at least one fourth area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access station, where the fourth area indication information is Indicates a tracking area identifier belonging to the preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
48、 根据权利要求 47所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处理单元具体用 于从移动管理实体 MME或运营管理系统 OAM获取所述至少一个第一区域 指示信息; 或 48. The device according to claim 47, wherein the processing unit is specifically configured to obtain the at least one first area indication information from the mobility management entity MME or the operation management system OAM; or
用于从 MME或 OAM获取所述至少一个第二区域指示信息; 或 用于从 MME或 OAM获取所述至少一个第三区域指示信息; 或 用于从 MME或 OAM获取所述至少一个第四区域指示信息。 For obtaining the at least one second area indication information from the MME or OAM; or for obtaining the at least one third area indication information from the MME or OAM; or for obtaining the at least one fourth area from the MME or OAM Instructions.
49、 根据权利要求 44至 48中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述接 收单元具体用于接收所述第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 所 述第一切换请求消息包括所述第一切换指示信息; 49. The device according to any one of claims 44 to 48, characterized in that the receiving unit is specifically configured to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, wherein the first The handover request message includes the first handover indication information;
所述处理单元具体用于从所述第一切换请求消息中,获取所述第一切换 指示信息。 The processing unit is specifically configured to obtain the first switching indication information from the first switching request message.
50、 根据权利要求 44至 49中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处 理单元还用于获取所述第二接入站点的路由信息; 50. The device according to any one of claims 44 to 49, characterized in that the processing unit is also used to obtain routing information of the second access site;
所述发送单元具体用于根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第二 接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第一数据。 The sending unit is specifically configured to send the first data from the mobile device to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
51、 根据权利要求 50所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述接收单元还用于 接收所述第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 所述第一切换请求 消息包括所述第二接入站点的路由信息; 51. The device according to claim 50, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to receive a first handover request message sent by the second access station, wherein the first handover request message includes the Routing information of the second access site;
所述处理单元具体用于从所述第一切换请求消息中,获取所述第二接入 站点的路由信息。 The processing unit is specifically configured to obtain the routing information of the second access site from the first handover request message.
52、 根据权利要求 44至 51中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发 送单元还用于向所述第二接入站点发送所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便 于所述第二接入站点根据所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第一接入站 点发送所述第二数据。 52. The device according to any one of claims 44 to 51, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send the routing information of the first access station to the second access station, so as to facilitate The second access station sends the second data to the first access station according to the routing information of the first access station.
53、 根据权利要求 52所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发送单元具体用 于所述第一接入站点向所述第二接入站点发送第一切换请求响应消息, 其 中, 所述第一切换请求响应消息包括所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于 所述第二接入站点从所述第一切换请求响应消息中获取所述第一接入站点 的路由信息。 53. The apparatus according to claim 52, wherein the sending unit is specifically configured to send the first handover request response message from the first access station to the second access station, wherein, the first access station A handover request response message includes the routing information of the first access station, so as to facilitate The second access station obtains the routing information of the first access station from the first handover request response message.
54、 根据权利要求 52所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发送单元具体用 于所述第一接入站点向 MME发送所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于所 述 MME向所述第二接入站点转发所述第一接入站点的路由信息。 54. The apparatus according to claim 52, wherein the sending unit is specifically configured to send the routing information of the first access station to the MME by the first access station, so that the MME can send the routing information to the MME. The second access station forwards the routing information of the first access station.
55、 根据权利要求 44至 54中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发 送单元还用于向第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息, 所述第二切换指示信 息用于指示所述第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 以便于所 述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点, 以及 55. The device according to any one of claims 44 to 54, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send second switching instruction information to a third access station, and the second switching instruction information is used to Instructing that a common bearer is provided between the second access site and the first gateway device to facilitate handover of the target mobile device from the first access site to the third access site, and
所述第三接入站点在所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至所 述第三接入站点后, 向所述第二接入站点发送来自所述目标移动设备的第三 数据, 所述第二接入站点通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发所述第 三数据, 和 /或 The third access site sends the third access point from the target mobile device to the second access site after the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site. data, the second access site forwards the third data to the first gateway device through the public bearer, and/or
所述第二接入站点在确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换 至所述第三接入站点后, 向所述第三接入站点发送第四数据, 所述第三接入 站点向所述目标移动设备转发所述第四数据, 其中, 所述第四数据是所述第 一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标移动设 备相对应的数据。 After determining that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the second access site sends fourth data to the third access site, and the third access site The access site forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, wherein the fourth data is the information related to the target mobile device that the first gateway device sends to the second access site through the public bearer. Data corresponding to the device.
56、 根据权利要求 55所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发送单元还用于 向所述第三接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的小区标识或跟踪区域标识, 以 便于所述第三接入站点在根据所述第二接入站点的小区标识或跟踪区域标 识确定所述第三接入站点与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域之后, 向所 述第二接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第三数据, 其中, 所述预设区域内 的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 56. The device according to claim 55, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send the cell identifier or tracking area identifier of the second access station to the third access station, so as to facilitate the After the third access station determines that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area according to the cell identity or tracking area identity of the second access station, the third access station sends a signal to the second access station. The access site sends the third data from the mobile device, wherein each access site in the preset area can communicate with each other.
57、 根据权利要求 55或 56所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发送单元还 用于向所述第三接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 以便于所述第 三接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第二接入站点发送来 自所述移动设备的第三数据。 57. The device according to claim 55 or 56, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send the routing information of the second access site to the third access site, so as to facilitate the third access site. The access station sends the third data from the mobile device to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
58、 根据权利要求 55至 57中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处 理单元还用于获取所述第三接入站点的路由信息; 58. The device according to any one of claims 55 to 57, characterized in that the processing unit is also used to obtain routing information of the third access site;
所述发送单元还用于向所述第二接入站点发送所述第三接入站点的路 由信息, 以便于所述第二接入站点根据第三接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第 三接入站点发送第四数据。 The sending unit is also configured to send the path of the third access site to the second access site. information, so that the second access station sends the fourth data to the third access station according to the routing information of the third access station.
59、 根据权利要求 55至 58中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发 送单元还用于向所述第二接入站点发送用于指示所述目标移动设备已从所 述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点的第三切换指示信息, 以便于所述 第二接入站点根据所述第三切换指示信息,确定所述目标移动设备从所述第 一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 59. The apparatus according to any one of claims 55 to 58, characterized in that the sending unit is further configured to send to the second access site a message indicating that the target mobile device has been transferred from the second access site. Third handover instruction information for an access station to switch to the third access site, so that the second access station determines, according to the third handover instruction information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access station to the third access station. The inbound site switches to the third access site.
60、 根据权利要求 55至 59中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处 理单元还用于获取所述目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息; 60. The device according to any one of claims 55 to 59, wherein the processing unit is further configured to obtain the second measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device;
用于根据所述第二测量上报信息,确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接 入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 Used to determine, according to the second measurement reporting information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
61、 根据权利要求 60所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发送单元还用于 向目标移动设备发送至少一个第二测量指示信息, 所述第二测量指示信息包 括第二目标载频的载频信息, 所述第二目标载频上配置有至少一个机器类型 通信 MTC小区, 所述第二测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个信息: 第三测 量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指示信息; 所述接收单元还用于接收所述目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 所述第二测量上报信息是所述目标移动设备根据所述第二测量指示信息进 行测量后发送的; 61. The apparatus according to claim 60, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send at least one second measurement indication information to the target mobile device, and the second measurement indication information includes a carrier of the second target carrier frequency. frequency information, the second target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, and the second measurement indication information also includes at least one of the following information: third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, at least One subframe indication information; The receiving unit is also configured to receive second measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, where the second measurement reporting information is that the target mobile device performs measurements based on the second measurement indication information. sent later;
其中, 所述第三测量带宽指示信息用于指示第三测量带宽, 所述第三测 量带宽用于所述至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 所述第三测量带宽与第四测量 带宽相异,所述第四测量带宽用于配置在所述第二目标载频上的第二非 MTC 小区的测量; Wherein, the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the third measurement bandwidth, the third measurement bandwidth is used for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, so The fourth measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of a second non-MTC cell configured on the second target carrier frequency;
所述参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC 小区的参考符号的配 置, 所述 MTC小区的参考符号用于所述 MTC小区的测量; The reference symbol indication information is used to indicate the configuration of the reference symbols of the corresponding MTC cell, and the reference symbols of the MTC cell are used for measurement of the MTC cell;
所述子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 The subframe indication information is used to indicate the subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
62、 根据权利要求 44至 61中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处 理单元还用于确定所述目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。 62. The apparatus according to any one of claims 44 to 61, wherein the processing unit is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
63、根据权利要求 44至 62中任一项中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于, 所述移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,所述接入站点包括基站设备 和 /或中继设备。 63. The apparatus according to any one of claims 44 to 62, wherein the mobile equipment includes user equipment and/or mobile relay equipment, and the access site includes base station equipment and/or or relay equipment.
64、 根据权利要求 50至 54、 57或 58中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在 于, 所述路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。 64. The device according to any one of claims 50 to 54, 57 or 58, wherein the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
65、 一种通信装置, 其特征在于, 所述装置包括: 65. A communication device, characterized in that the device includes:
发送单元, 用于向所述第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息, 所述第一 切换指示信息用于指示所述第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承 载, 所述公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数 据; A sending unit, configured to send first switching instruction information to the first access site, where the first switching instruction information is used to indicate that a common bearer is provided between the second access site and the first gateway device, so The public bearer is used to transmit data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
接收单元, 用于接收所述第一接入站点发送的来自所述目标移动设备的 第一数据, 并通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发所述第一数据; 和 /或 A receiving unit configured to receive the first data from the target mobile device sent by the first access site, and forward the first data to the first gateway device through the public bearer; and/or
所述发送单元还用于向所述第一接入站点发送第二数据, 以便于所述第 一接入站点向所述目标移动设备转发所述第二数据, 其中, 所述第二数据是 所述第一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标 移动设备相对应的数据。 The sending unit is also configured to send second data to the first access site, so that the first access site forwards the second data to the target mobile device, wherein the second data is The first gateway device sends data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the public bearer.
66、 根据权利要求 65所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点与 所述第二接入站点能够通信。 66. The device according to claim 65, wherein the first access site and the second access site are capable of communicating.
67、 根据权利要求 65或 66所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站 点与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各接入 站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 67. The device according to claim 65 or 66, wherein the first access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, wherein each access site in the preset area Sites are able to communicate with each other.
68、 根据权利要求 65至 67中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发 送单元具体用于向所述第一接入站点发送第一切换请求消息, 其中, 所述第 一切换请求消息包括所述第一切换指示信息。 68. The device according to any one of claims 65 to 67, characterized in that the sending unit is specifically configured to send a first handover request message to the first access station, wherein the first handover The request message includes the first switching indication information.
69、 根据权利要求 65至 68中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装 置还包括: 69. The device according to any one of claims 65 to 68, characterized in that the device further includes:
处理单元, 用于获取所述第一接入站点的路由信息; A processing unit, configured to obtain routing information of the first access site;
所述发送单元具体用于根据所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第一 接入站点发送所述第二数据。 The sending unit is specifically configured to send the second data to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site.
70、 根据权利要求 69所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述接收单元还用于 所述第二接入站点接收所述第一接入站点发送的第一切换请求响应消息, 其 中, 所述第一切换请求响应消息包括所述第一接入站点的路由信息; 70. The apparatus according to claim 69, wherein the receiving unit is further configured for the second access station to receive the first handover request response message sent by the first access station, wherein: The first handover request response message includes routing information of the first access station;
所述处理单元具体用于从所述第一切换请求响应消息中, 获取所述第一 接入站点的路由信息。 The processing unit is specifically configured to obtain the first switching request response message from the first switching request response message. Access site routing information.
71、 根据权利要求 69所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述接收单元还用于 接收移动性管理实体 MME发送的所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 所 述第一接入站点的路由信息是所述 MME从所述第一接入站点获取的。 71. The apparatus according to claim 69, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to receive the routing information of the first access site sent by the mobility management entity MME, wherein the first access site The routing information is obtained by the MME from the first access site.
72、 根据权利要求 65至 71中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发 送单元还用于向所述第一接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 以便 于所述第一接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第二接入站 点发送所述第一数据。 72. The device according to any one of claims 65 to 71, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send the routing information of the second access site to the first access site, so as to facilitate The first access station sends the first data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
73、 根据权利要求 65至 72中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装 置还包括: 73. The device according to any one of claims 65 to 72, characterized in that the device further includes:
处理单元, 用于确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至第三 接入站点; A processing unit, configured to determine that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site;
所述发送单元还用于向所述第三接入站点发送第四数据, 以便于所述第 三接入站点向所述目标移动设备转发所述第四数据, 其中, 所述第四数据是 所述第一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标 移动设备相对应的数据; 和 /或 The sending unit is also configured to send fourth data to the third access site, so that the third access site forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, wherein the fourth data is The data corresponding to the target mobile device sent by the first gateway device to the second access site through the public bearer; and/or
所述接收单元还用于接收所述第三接入站点发送的来自所述目标移动 设备的第三数据, 并通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发所述第三数 据。 The receiving unit is further configured to receive third data from the target mobile device sent by the third access site, and forward the third data to the first gateway device through the public bearer.
74、 根据权利要求 73所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点与 所述第三接入站点能够通信。 74. The device according to claim 73, wherein the first access site and the third access site are capable of communicating.
75、 根据权利要求 73或 74所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站 点与所述第三接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各接入 站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 75. The device according to claim 73 or 74, wherein the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, wherein each access site in the preset area Sites are able to communicate with each other.
76、 根据权利要求 73至 75中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述接 收单元还用于接收所述第一接入站点发送的第三切换指示信息,所述第三切 换指示信息用于指示所述目标移动设备已从所述第一接入站点切换至所述 第三接入站点; 76. The device according to any one of claims 73 to 75, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to receive third switching instruction information sent by the first access station, the third switching instruction Information used to indicate that the target mobile device has been handed over from the first access site to the third access site;
所述处理单元具体用于根据所述第三切换指示信息,确定所述目标移动 设备从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 The processing unit is specifically configured to determine, according to the third switching instruction information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
77、 根据权利要求 73至 75中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述接 收单元还用于接收 MME发送的第三切换指示信息, 所述第三切换指示信息 用于指示所述目标移动设备已从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站 点, 所述第三切换指示信息是所述第三接入站点发送给所述 MME的; 77. The device according to any one of claims 73 to 75, characterized in that the interface The receiving unit is also configured to receive third switching indication information sent by the MME, where the third switching indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site, so The third handover indication information is sent by the third access station to the MME;
所述处理单元具体用于根据所述第三切换指示信息,确定所述目标移动 设备从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 The processing unit is specifically configured to determine, according to the third switching instruction information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
78、 根据权利要求 73至 77中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述处 理单元还用于获取所述第三接入站点的路由信息; 78. The device according to any one of claims 73 to 77, characterized in that the processing unit is also used to obtain routing information of the third access site;
所述发送单元具体用于根据所述第三接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第三 接入站点发送所述第四数据。 The sending unit is specifically configured to send the fourth data to the third access site according to the routing information of the third access site.
79、 根据权利要求 78所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述接收单元还用于 接收所述第一接入站点发送的所述第三接入站点的路由信息。 79. The apparatus according to claim 78, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to receive the routing information of the third access station sent by the first access station.
80、 根据权利要求 78所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述接收单元还用于 接收 MME发送的所述第三接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 所述第三接入站点 的路由信息是所述 MME从所述第三接入站点获取的。 80. The apparatus according to claim 78, wherein the receiving unit is further configured to receive the routing information of the third access site sent by the MME, wherein the routing information of the third access site is The MME obtains it from the third access site.
81、 根据权利要求 73至 80中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发 送单元还用于向所述第三接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 以便 于所述第三接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第二接入站 点发送所述第三数据。 81. The device according to any one of claims 73 to 80, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send the routing information of the second access site to the third access site, so as to facilitate The third access station sends the third data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
82、 根据权利要求 65至 81中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装 置还包括: 82. The device according to any one of claims 65 to 81, characterized in that the device further includes:
处理单元, 用于获取所述目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息; 用于根据所述第一测量上报信息,确定所述目标移动设备从所述第二接 入站点切换至所述第一接入站点。 A processing unit, configured to obtain the first measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device; and configured to determine, based on the first measurement reporting information, that the target mobile device switches from the second access site to the first access site.
83、 根据权利要求 82所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述发送单元还用于 向目标移动设备发送至少一个第一测量指示信息, 所述第一测量指示信息包 括第一目标载频的载频信息, 所述第一目标载频上配置有至少一个机器类型 通信 MTC小区, 所述第一测量指示信息还包括以下至少一个信息: 第一测 量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个子帧指示信息; 所述接收单元还用于接收所述目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息, 所述第一测量上报信息是所述目标移动设备根据所述第一测量指示信息进 行测量后发送的; 其中, 所述第一测量带宽指示信息用于指示第一测量带宽, 所述第一测 量带宽用于所述至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 所述第一测量带宽与第二测量 带宽相异,所述第二测量带宽用于配置在所述第一目标载频上的第一非 MTC 小区的测量; 83. The apparatus according to claim 82, wherein the sending unit is further configured to send at least one first measurement indication information to the target mobile device, and the first measurement indication information includes the carrier of the first target carrier frequency. frequency information, the first target carrier frequency is configured with at least one machine type communication MTC cell, and the first measurement indication information also includes at least one of the following information: first measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, at least One subframe indication information; The receiving unit is also configured to receive the first measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, where the first measurement reporting information is that the target mobile device performs measurements according to the first measurement indication information. sent later; Wherein, the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the first measurement bandwidth, the first measurement bandwidth is used for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth and the second measurement bandwidth are different, so The second measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the first non-MTC cell configured on the first target carrier frequency;
所述参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC 小区的参考符号的配 置, 所述 MTC小区的参考符号用于所述 MTC小区的测量; The reference symbol indication information is used to indicate the configuration of the reference symbols of the corresponding MTC cell, and the reference symbols of the MTC cell are used for measurement of the MTC cell;
所述子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 The subframe indication information is used to indicate the subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
84、 根据权利要求 65至 83中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在于, 所述装 置还包括: 84. The device according to any one of claims 65 to 83, characterized in that the device further includes:
处理单元, 用于确定所述目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。 A processing unit configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
85、根据权利要求 65至 84中任一项中任一项所述的装置,其特征在于, 所述移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,所述接入站点包括基站设备 和 /或中继设备。 85. The apparatus according to any one of claims 65 to 84, wherein the mobile equipment includes user equipment and/or mobile relay equipment, and the access site includes base station equipment and/or or relay equipment.
86、 根据权利要求 69至 72、 78至 81中任一项所述的装置, 其特征在 于, 所述路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。 86. The device according to any one of claims 69 to 72 and 78 to 81, wherein the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
87、 一种通信设备, 其特征在于, 所述设备包括: 87. A communication device, characterized in that the device includes:
总线; bus;
与所述总线相连的处理器; a processor connected to said bus;
与所述总线相连的存储器; a memory connected to said bus;
与所述总线相连的收发器; a transceiver connected to said bus;
其中, 所述处理器通过所述总线, 调用所述存储器中存储的程序, 以用 于获取第二接入站点发送的第一切换指示信息, 所述第一切换指示信息用于 指示所述第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 所述公共承载用 于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据; Wherein, the processor calls a program stored in the memory through the bus to obtain the first handover instruction information sent by the second access station, and the first handover instruction information is used to instruct the first handover instruction information. A common bearer is provided between the second access site and the first gateway device, and the common bearer is used to transmit data of at least one mobile device including the target mobile device;
用于控制所述收发器向所述第二接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第 一数据, 以便于所述第二接入站点通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转 发所述第一数据; 和 /或 For controlling the transceiver to send the first data from the mobile device to the second access site, so that the second access site forwards the first data to the first gateway device through the public bearer. first data; and/or
用于控制所述收发器接收所述第二接入站点发送的第二数据, 并控制所 述收发器向所述目标移动设备转发所述第二数据, 其中, 所述第二数据是所 述第一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标移 动设备相对应的数据。 For controlling the transceiver to receive the second data sent by the second access station, and controlling the transceiver to forward the second data to the target mobile device, wherein the second data is the The first gateway device sends data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the public transport.
88、 根据权利要求 87所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器还用于确 定能够与所述第二接入站点通信。 88. The device according to claim 87, wherein the processor is further configured to determine that communication with the second access site is possible.
89、 根据权利要求 88所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用于 确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各接 入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 89. The device according to claim 88, wherein the processor is specifically configured to determine that the second access station is in the same preset area, wherein each access station in the preset area Able to communicate with each other.
90、 根据权利要求 89所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用于 获取至少一个第一区域指示信息, 根据所述第一接入站点的小区标识、 所述 第二接入站点的小区标识、 小区列表和所述至少一个第一区域指示信息, 确 定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述第一区域指示信息用 于指示所述小区列表中属于所述第一区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的小 区标识; 或 90. The device according to claim 89, wherein the processor is specifically configured to obtain at least one first area indication information, according to the cell identifier of the first access site, the second access site The cell identifier, the cell list and the at least one first area indication information are determined to be in the same preset area as the second access site, where the first area indication information is used to indicate that the cell list belongs to The cell identifier of the preset area corresponding to the first area indication information; or
用于获取至少一个第二区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入站点的跟踪区 域标识、 所述第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识、 跟踪区域标识列表和所述至少 一个第二区域指示信息,确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域,其中, 所述第二区域指示信息用于指示所述跟踪区域标识列表中属于所述第二区 域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标识; 或 Used to obtain at least one second area indication information, based on the tracking area identification of the first access site, the tracking area identification of the second access site, the tracking area identification list and the at least one second area indication information. , determined to be in the same preset area as the second access site, wherein the second area indication information is used to indicate that the tracking area identification list belongs to the preset area corresponding to the second area indication information. tracking area identifier; or
用于获取至少一个第三区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入站点的小区标 识、 所述第二接入站点的小区标识和所述至少一个第三区域指示信息, 确定 与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述第三区域指示信息用于 指示属于所述第三区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的小区标识; 或 for obtaining at least one third area indication information, and determining, according to the cell identification of the first access station, the cell identification of the second access station and the at least one third area indication information, the information related to the second access station. The access stations are in the same preset area, wherein the third area indication information is used to indicate the cell identity belonging to the preset area corresponding to the third area indication information; or
用于获取至少一个第四区域指示信息,根据所述第一接入站点的跟踪区 域标识、所述第二接入站点的跟踪区域标识和所述至少一个第四区域指示信 息, 确定与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述第四区域指示 信息用于指示属于所述第四区域指示信息所对应的预设区域的跟踪区域标 识。 for obtaining at least one fourth area indication information, and determining, according to the tracking area identifier of the first access station, the tracking area identifier of the second access station and the at least one fourth area indication information, the The second access station is in the same preset area, wherein the fourth area indication information is used to indicate the tracking area identifier belonging to the preset area corresponding to the fourth area indication information.
91、 根据权利要求 90所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用于 从移动管理实体 MME或运营管理系统 OAM获取所述至少一个第一区域指 示信息; 91. The device according to claim 90, wherein the processor is specifically configured to obtain the at least one first area indication information from the mobility management entity MME or the operation management system OAM;
用于从 MME或 OAM获取所述至少一个第二区域指示信息; Used to obtain the at least one second area indication information from the MME or OAM;
用于从 MME或 OAM获取所述至少一个第三区域指示信息; Used to obtain the at least one third area indication information from the MME or OAM;
用于从 MME或 OAM获取所述至少一个第四区域指示信息。 Used to obtain the at least one fourth area indication information from the MME or OAM.
92、 根据权利要求 87至 91中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处 理器具体用于控制所述收发器接收所述第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求 消息, 其中, 所述第一切换请求消息包括所述第一切换指示信息; 92. The device according to any one of claims 87 to 91, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, wherein , the first handover request message includes the first handover indication information;
用于从所述第一切换请求消息中, 获取所述第一切换指示信息。 Used to obtain the first switching indication information from the first switching request message.
93、 根据权利要求 87至 92中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处 理器还用于获取所述第二接入站点的路由信息; 93. The device according to any one of claims 87 to 92, wherein the processor is further configured to obtain routing information of the second access site;
用于控制所述收发器根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第二接 入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第一数据。 For controlling the transceiver to send the first data from the mobile device to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
94、 根据权利要求 93所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用于 控制所述收发器接收所述第二接入站点发送的第一切换请求消息, 其中, 所 述第一切换请求消息包括所述第二接入站点的路由信息; 94. The device according to claim 93, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the first handover request message sent by the second access station, wherein the first handover The request message includes routing information of the second access site;
用于从所述第一切换请求消息中, 获取所述第二接入站点的路由信息。 Used to obtain routing information of the second access site from the first handover request message.
95、 根据权利要求 87至 94中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处 理器还用于控制所述收发器向所述第二接入站点发送所述第一接入站点的 路由信息, 以便于所述第二接入站点根据所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 向 所述第一接入站点发送所述第二数据。 95. The device according to any one of claims 87 to 94, characterized in that the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the first access station's information to the second access station. Routing information, so that the second access station sends the second data to the first access station according to the routing information of the first access station.
96、 根据权利要求 95所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用于 控制所述收发器向所述第二接入站点发送第一切换请求响应消息, 其中, 所 述第一切换请求响应消息包括所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 以便于所述第 二接入站点从所述第一切换请求响应消息中获取所述第一接入站点的路由 信息。 96. The device according to claim 95, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send a first handover request response message to the second access station, wherein, the first handover The request response message includes the routing information of the first access station, so that the second access station obtains the routing information of the first access station from the first handover request response message.
97、 根据权利要求 95所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器还用于控 制所述收发器向 MME发送所述第一接入站点的路由信息,以便于所述 MME 向所述第二接入站点转发所述第一接入站点的路由信息。 97. The device according to claim 95, wherein the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the routing information of the first access site to the MME, so that the MME sends the routing information to the third access site. The second access station forwards the routing information of the first access station.
98、 根据权利要求 87至 97中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处 理器还用于控制所述收发器向第三接入站点发送第二切换指示信息, 所述第 二切换指示信息用于指示所述第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共 承载, 以便于所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站 点, 以及 98. The device according to any one of claims 87 to 97, wherein the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send second switching instruction information to a third access site, and the second The handover indication information is used to indicate that a common bearer is provided between the second access site and the first gateway device to facilitate handover of the target mobile device from the first access site to the third access site, as well as
所述第三接入站点在所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至所 述第三接入站点后, 向所述第二接入站点发送来自所述目标移动设备的第三 数据, 所述第二接入站点通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发所述第 三数据, 和 /或 The third access site sends the third access point from the target mobile device to the second access site after the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site. data, the second access site forwards the third data to the first gateway device through the public bearer, and/or
所述第二接入站点在确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换 至所述第三接入站点后, 向所述第三接入站点发送第四数据, 所述第三接入 站点向所述目标移动设备转发所述第四数据, 其中, 所述第四数据是所述第 一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标移动设 备相对应的数据。 After determining that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site, the second access site sends fourth data to the third access site, and the third access site The access site forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, wherein the fourth data is the information related to the target mobile device that the first gateway device sends to the second access site through the public bearer. Data corresponding to the device.
99、 根据权利要求 98所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器还用于控 制所述收发器向所述第三接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的小区标识或跟 踪区域标识, 以便于所述第三接入站点在根据所述第二接入站点的小区标识 或跟踪区域标识确定所述第三接入站点与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设 区域之后, 向所述第二接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第三数据, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 99. The device according to claim 98, wherein the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the cell identifier or tracking area identifier of the second access site to the third access site. , so that after the third access station determines that the third access station and the second access station are in the same preset area according to the cell identity or tracking area identity of the second access station, The second access site sends third data from the mobile device, wherein each access site in the preset area is able to communicate with each other.
100、 根据权利要求 98或 99所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器还 用于控制所述收发器向所述第三接入站点发送所述第二接入站点的路由信 息, 以便于所述第三接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第 二接入站点发送来自所述移动设备的第三数据。 100. The device according to claim 98 or 99, wherein the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the routing information of the second access site to the third access site, so that The third access site sends the third data from the mobile device to the second access site according to the routing information of the second access site.
101、 根据权利要求 98至 100中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述 处理器还用于获取所述第三接入站点的路由信息; 101. The device according to any one of claims 98 to 100, wherein the processor is further configured to obtain routing information of the third access site;
用于控制所述收发器向所述第二接入站点发送所述第三接入站点的路 由信息, 以便于所述第二接入站点根据第三接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第 三接入站点发送第四数据。 For controlling the transceiver to send the routing information of the third access site to the second access site, so that the second access site sends the routing information to the third access site according to the routing information of the third access site. The third access station sends the fourth data.
102、 根据权利要求 98至 101中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述 处理器还用于控制所述收发器向所述第二接入站点发送用于指示所述目标 移动设备已从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点的第三切换指示 信息, 以便于所述第二接入站点根据所述第三切换指示信息, 确定所述目标 移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 102. The device according to any one of claims 98 to 101, characterized in that the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send a message to the second access site for instructing the target mobile device. Third switching indication information that has been switched from the first access site to the third access site, so that the second access station determines that the target mobile device is from The first access site switches to the third access site.
103、 根据权利要求 98至 102中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述 处理器还用于获取所述目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息; 103. The device according to any one of claims 98 to 102, wherein the processor is further configured to obtain the second measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device;
用于根据所述第二测量上报信息,确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接 入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 Used to determine, according to the second measurement reporting information, that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site.
104、 根据权利要求 103所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用 于控制所述收发器向目标移动设备发送至少一个第二测量指示信息, 所述第 二测量指示信息包括第二目标载频的载频信息, 所述第二目标载频上配置有 至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 所述第二测量指示信息还包括以下至少 一个信息: 第三测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个 子帧指示信息; 104. The device according to claim 103, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send at least one second measurement indication information to the target mobile device, and the second measurement indication information includes a second measurement indication information. Carrier frequency information of the target carrier frequency, at least one machine type communication MTC cell is configured on the second target carrier frequency, and the second measurement indication information also includes at least one of the following information: third measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, at least one subframe indication information;
用于控制所述收发器接收所述目标移动设备发送的第二测量上报信息, 所述第二测量上报信息是所述目标移动设备根据所述第二测量指示信息进 行测量后发送的; For controlling the transceiver to receive the second measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, where the second measurement reporting information is sent by the target mobile device after measuring according to the second measurement indication information;
其中, 所述第三测量带宽指示信息用于指示第三测量带宽, 所述第三测 量带宽用于所述至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 所述第三测量带宽与第四测量 带宽相异,所述第四测量带宽用于配置在所述第二目标载频上的第二非 MTC 小区的测量; Wherein, the third measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the third measurement bandwidth, the third measurement bandwidth is used for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the third measurement bandwidth is different from the fourth measurement bandwidth, so The fourth measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of a second non-MTC cell configured on the second target carrier frequency;
所述参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC 小区的参考符号的配 置, 所述 MTC小区的参考符号用于所述 MTC小区的测量; The reference symbol indication information is used to indicate the configuration of the reference symbols of the corresponding MTC cell, and the reference symbols of the MTC cell are used for measurement of the MTC cell;
所述子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 The subframe indication information is used to indicate the subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
105、 根据权利要求 87至 104中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述 处理器还用于确定所述目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。 105. The device according to any one of claims 87 to 104, wherein the processor is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
106、 根据权利要求 87至 105中任一项中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在 于,所述移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,所述接入站点包括基站 设备和 /或中继设备。 106. The device according to any one of claims 87 to 105, wherein the mobile device includes user equipment and/or mobile relay equipment, and the access site includes base station equipment and/or or relay equipment.
107、 根据权利要求 93至 97、 100或 101中任一项所述的设备, 其特征 在于, 所述路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。 107. The device according to any one of claims 93 to 97, 100 or 101, wherein the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
108、 一种通信设备, 其特征在于, 所述设备包括: 108. A communication device, characterized in that the device includes:
总线; bus;
与所述总线相连的处理器; a processor connected to said bus;
与所述总线相连的存储器; a memory connected to said bus;
与所述总线相连的收发器; a transceiver connected to said bus;
其中, 所述处理器通过所述总线, 调用所述存储器中存储的程序, 以用 于控制所述收发器向所述第一接入站点发送第一切换指示信息,所述第一切 换指示信息用于指示所述第二接入站点与第一网关设备之间设有公共承载, 所述公共承载用于传输包括目标移动设备在内的至少一个移动设备的数据; 用于控制所述收发器接收所述第一接入站点发送的来自所述目标移动 设备的第一数据, 并控制所述收发器通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备 转发所述第一数据; 和 /或 Wherein, the processor calls a program stored in the memory through the bus to control the transceiver to send first switching instruction information to the first access station, where the first switching instruction information Used to indicate that a common bearer is provided between the second access site and the first gateway device, The public bearer is used to transmit data of at least one mobile device including a target mobile device; used to control the transceiver to receive the first data from the target mobile device sent by the first access site, and Control the transceiver to forward the first data to the first gateway device through the public bearer; and/or
用于控制所述收发器向所述第一接入站点发送第二数据, 以便于所述第 一接入站点向所述目标移动设备转发所述第二数据, 其中, 所述第二数据是 所述第一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标 移动设备相对应的数据。 For controlling the transceiver to send second data to the first access station, so that the first access station forwards the second data to the target mobile device, wherein the second data is The first gateway device sends data corresponding to the target mobile device to the second access site through the public bearer.
109、 根据权利要求 108所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点 与所述第二接入站点能够通信。 109. The device according to claim 108, wherein the first access site and the second access site are capable of communicating.
110、 根据权利要求 108或 109所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一接 入站点与所述第二接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各 接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 110. The device according to claim 108 or 109, wherein the first access site and the second access site are in the same preset area, wherein each access site in the preset area Sites are able to communicate with each other.
111、 根据权利要求 108至 110中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器具体用于控制所述收发器向所述第一接入站点发送第一切换请求 消息, 其中, 所述第一切换请求消息包括所述第一切换指示信息。 111. The device according to any one of claims 108 to 110, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send a first handover request message to the first access site, wherein, The first switching request message includes the first switching indication information.
112、 根据权利要求 108至 111 中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器还用于获取所述第一接入站点的路由信息; 112. The device according to any one of claims 108 to 111, wherein the processor is further configured to obtain routing information of the first access site;
用于控制所述收发器根据所述第一接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第一接 入站点发送所述第二数据。 Used to control the transceiver to send the second data to the first access site according to the routing information of the first access site.
113、 根据权利要求 112所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用 于控制所述收发器接收所述第一接入站点发送的第一切换请求响应消息, 其 中, 所述第一切换请求响应消息包括所述第一接入站点的路由信息; 113. The device according to claim 112, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the first handover request response message sent by the first access station, wherein the first The handover request response message includes routing information of the first access station;
用于从所述第一切换请求响应消息中, 获取所述第一接入站点的路由信 息。 Used to obtain routing information of the first access site from the first handover request response message.
114、 根据权利要求 112所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用 于控制所述收发器接收移动性管理实体 MME发送的所述第一接入站点的路 由信息, 其中, 所述第一接入站点的路由信息是所述 MME从所述第一接入 站点获取的。 114. The device according to claim 112, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the routing information of the first access site sent by the mobility management entity MME, wherein, the The routing information of the first access site is obtained by the MME from the first access site.
115、 根据权利要求 108至 114中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器还用于控制所述收发器向所述第一接入站点发送所述第二接入站 点的路由信息, 以便于所述第一接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信 息, 向所述第二接入站点发送所述第一数据。 115. The device according to any one of claims 108 to 114, wherein the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the second access station to the first access station. The first access station sends the first data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
116、 根据权利要求 108至 115 中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器还用于确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接入站点切换至第三接 入站点; 116. The device according to any one of claims 108 to 115, wherein the processor is further configured to determine that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to a third access site;
用于控制所述收发器向所述第三接入站点发送第四数据, 以便于所述第 三接入站点向所述目标移动设备转发所述第四数据, 其中, 所述第四数据是 所述第一网关设备通过所述公共承发送给所述第二接入站点的与所述目标 移动设备相对应的数据; 和 /或 For controlling the transceiver to send fourth data to the third access station, so that the third access station forwards the fourth data to the target mobile device, wherein the fourth data is The data corresponding to the target mobile device sent by the first gateway device to the second access site through the public bearer; and/or
用于控制所述收发器接收所述第三接入站点发送的来自所述目标移动 设备的第三数据, 并通过所述公共承载向所述第一网关设备转发所述第三数 据。 For controlling the transceiver to receive the third data from the target mobile device sent by the third access site, and forward the third data to the first gateway device through the public bearer.
117、 根据权利要求 116所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一接入站点 与所述第三接入站点能够通信。 117. The device according to claim 116, wherein the first access site and the third access site can communicate.
118、 根据权利要求 116或 117所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述第一接 入站点与所述第三接入站点处于同一预设区域, 其中, 所述预设区域内的各 接入站点彼此之间能够进行通信。 118. The device according to claim 116 or 117, wherein the first access site and the third access site are in the same preset area, wherein each access site in the preset area Sites are able to communicate with each other.
119、 根据权利要求 116至 118中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器还用于控制所述收发器接收所述第一接入站点发送的第三切换指 示信息,所述第三切换指示信息用于指示所述目标移动设备已从所述第一接 入站点切换至所述第三接入站点; 119. The device according to any one of claims 116 to 118, wherein the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to receive the third switching indication information sent by the first access station, so The third switching indication information is used to indicate that the target mobile device has switched from the first access site to the third access site;
用于根据所述第三切换指示信息,确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接 入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 Used to determine that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site according to the third switching indication information.
120、 根据权利要求 116至 118中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器具体用于控制所述收发器接收 MME发送的第三切换指示信息, 所 述第三切换指示信息用于指示所述目标移动设备已从所述第一接入站点切 换至所述第三接入站点, 所述第三切换指示信息是所述第三接入站点发送给 所述 MME的; 120. The device according to any one of claims 116 to 118, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the third switching instruction information sent by the MME, and the third switching instruction information Used to indicate that the target mobile device has been switched from the first access site to the third access site, where the third switching indication information is sent by the third access site to the MME;
用于根据所述第三切换指示信息,确定所述目标移动设备从所述第一接 入站点切换至所述第三接入站点。 Used to determine that the target mobile device switches from the first access site to the third access site according to the third switching indication information.
121、 根据权利要求 116至 120中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器还用于获取所述第三接入站点的路由信息; 121. The device according to any one of claims 116 to 120, characterized in that: The processor is also configured to obtain routing information of the third access site;
用于控制所述收发器根据所述第三接入站点的路由信息, 向所述第三接 入站点发送所述第四数据。 For controlling the transceiver to send the fourth data to the third access site according to the routing information of the third access site.
122、 根据权利要求 121所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用 于控制所述收发器接收所述第一接入站点发送的所述第三接入站点的路由 信息。 122. The device according to claim 121, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the routing information of the third access site sent by the first access site.
123、 根据权利要求 121所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用 于控制所述收发器接收 MME发送的所述第三接入站点的路由信息, 其中, 所述第三接入站点的路由信息是所述 MME从所述第三接入站点获取的。 123. The device according to claim 121, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to receive the routing information of the third access site sent by the MME, wherein the third access site The routing information of the site is obtained by the MME from the third access site.
124、 根据权利要求 116至 123中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器还用于控制所述收发器向所述第三接入站点发送所述第二接入站 点的路由信息, 以便于所述第三接入站点根据所述第二接入站点的路由信 息, 向所述第二接入站点发送所述第三数据。 124. The device according to any one of claims 116 to 123, characterized in that the processor is further configured to control the transceiver to send the second access station's information to the third access station. Routing information, so that the third access station sends the third data to the second access station according to the routing information of the second access station.
125、 根据权利要求 108至 124中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器还用于获取所述目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息; 125. The device according to any one of claims 108 to 124, wherein the processor is further configured to obtain the first measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device;
用于根据所述第一测量上报信息,确定所述目标移动设备从所述第二接 入站点切换至所述第一接入站点。 Used to determine that the target mobile device switches from the second access site to the first access site according to the first measurement reporting information.
126、 根据权利要求 125所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所述处理器具体用 于控制所述收发器向目标移动设备发送至少一个第一测量指示信息, 所述第 一测量指示信息包括第一目标载频的载频信息, 所述第一目标载频上配置有 至少一个机器类型通信 MTC小区, 所述第一测量指示信息还包括以下至少 一个信息: 第一测量带宽指示信息、 至少一个参考符号指示信息、 至少一个 子帧指示信息; 126. The device according to claim 125, wherein the processor is specifically configured to control the transceiver to send at least one first measurement indication information to the target mobile device, and the first measurement indication information includes a first Carrier frequency information of the target carrier frequency, at least one machine type communication MTC cell is configured on the first target carrier frequency, and the first measurement indication information also includes at least one of the following information: first measurement bandwidth indication information, at least one reference symbol indication information, at least one subframe indication information;
用于控制所述收发器接收所述目标移动设备发送的第一测量上报信息, 所述第一测量上报信息是所述目标移动设备根据所述第一测量指示信息进 行测量后发送的; For controlling the transceiver to receive the first measurement reporting information sent by the target mobile device, where the first measurement reporting information is sent by the target mobile device after measuring according to the first measurement indication information;
其中, 所述第一测量带宽指示信息用于指示第一测量带宽, 所述第一测 量带宽用于所述至少一个 MTC小区的测量, 所述第一测量带宽与第二测量 带宽相异,所述第二测量带宽用于配置在所述第一目标载频上的第一非 MTC 小区的测量; Wherein, the first measurement bandwidth indication information is used to indicate the first measurement bandwidth, the first measurement bandwidth is used for the measurement of the at least one MTC cell, the first measurement bandwidth and the second measurement bandwidth are different, so The second measurement bandwidth is used for measurement of the first non-MTC cell configured on the first target carrier frequency;
所述参考符号指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC 小区的参考符号的配 置, 所述 MTC小区的参考符号用于所述 MTC小区的测量; 所述子帧指示信息用于指示所对应的 MTC小区使用的子帧。 The reference symbol indication information is used to indicate the configuration of the reference symbols of the corresponding MTC cell. The reference symbol of the MTC cell is used for measurement of the MTC cell; the subframe indication information is used to indicate the subframe used by the corresponding MTC cell.
127、 根据权利要求 108至 126中任一项所述的设备, 其特征在于, 所 述处理器还用于确定所述目标移动设备能够进行机器类型通信。 127. The device according to any one of claims 108 to 126, wherein the processor is further configured to determine that the target mobile device is capable of machine type communication.
128、 根据权利要求 108至 127中任一项中任一项所述的设备, 其特征 在于,所述移动设备包括用户设备和 /或移动中继设备,所述接入站点包括基 站设备和 /或中继设备。 128. The device according to any one of claims 108 to 127, characterized in that the mobile device includes user equipment and/or mobile relay equipment, and the access site includes base station equipment and/or or relay equipment.
129、 根据权利要求 112至 115、 121至 124中任一项所述的设备, 其特 征在于, 所述路由信息包括传输网络层地址和 /或隧道终端编号。 129. The device according to any one of claims 112 to 115 and 121 to 124, characterized in that the routing information includes a transport network layer address and/or a tunnel terminal number.
PCT/CN2013/071522 2013-02-07 2013-02-07 Communication method, communication apparatus and communication device WO2014121491A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2013/071522 WO2014121491A1 (en) 2013-02-07 2013-02-07 Communication method, communication apparatus and communication device
CN201380000119.2A CN104160745B (en) 2013-02-07 2013-02-07 Communication means, communicator and communication equipment

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2013/071522 WO2014121491A1 (en) 2013-02-07 2013-02-07 Communication method, communication apparatus and communication device

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2014121491A1 true WO2014121491A1 (en) 2014-08-14

Family

ID=51299198

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2013/071522 WO2014121491A1 (en) 2013-02-07 2013-02-07 Communication method, communication apparatus and communication device

Country Status (2)

Country Link
CN (1) CN104160745B (en)
WO (1) WO2014121491A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11711676B2 (en) 2015-11-12 2023-07-25 Sony Corporation Telecommunications apparatuses and methods

Families Citing this family (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN109089255B (en) * 2017-06-14 2022-01-25 中国移动通信有限公司研究院 User position notification control method, device, system, equipment and storage medium
CN110351830B (en) 2018-04-04 2020-12-04 华为技术有限公司 Communication method and communication device

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102075872A (en) * 2009-11-19 2011-05-25 华为技术有限公司 Public bearer processing methods, network node and communication system
CN102076028A (en) * 2009-11-23 2011-05-25 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Public bearer establishment method, data transmission method and core network side equipment
CN102149214A (en) * 2010-02-05 2011-08-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data transmission method and system in communication system

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102075872A (en) * 2009-11-19 2011-05-25 华为技术有限公司 Public bearer processing methods, network node and communication system
CN102076028A (en) * 2009-11-23 2011-05-25 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Public bearer establishment method, data transmission method and core network side equipment
CN102149214A (en) * 2010-02-05 2011-08-10 中兴通讯股份有限公司 Data transmission method and system in communication system

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US11711676B2 (en) 2015-11-12 2023-07-25 Sony Corporation Telecommunications apparatuses and methods

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN104160745B (en) 2018-05-18
CN104160745A (en) 2014-11-19

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
KR102242299B1 (en) Method and apparatus for performing a cell specific procedure or mobility procedure for network slice-based NR in a wireless communication system
JP7139382B2 (en) Wireless communication method and device
US8284735B2 (en) Method, apparatus and system for obtaining location area information during handover between heterogeneous networks
EP2947936B1 (en) Wireless communication system, base station, communication control method, and non-transitory computer-readable medium
KR101817969B1 (en) Wireless communication system, wireless stations, wireless terminal, communication control method, and computer-readable medium
JP2019532604A (en) Cell handover method, apparatus, and system
EP2947954B1 (en) Wireless communication system, base station, communication control method, and non-transitory computer-readable medium
CN109155945B (en) Method and device for transmitting data
CN110662308B (en) Communication method and device
CN110113766A (en) Master base station and its method
EP3378270A1 (en) Radio network node, network node and methods performed therein
KR20140031970A (en) Method for establishing x2 connection between base stations, base station and communication system
WO2016054962A1 (en) Access point handover method, network control node and user equipment in wireless communication
JP2021517751A (en) Methods, devices and computer storage media for configuring secondary cells
CN110446274B (en) Tunnel establishment method and device
WO2014121493A1 (en) Communication method, communication apparatus and communication device
US11057783B2 (en) Communication method, secondary network node and terminal
KR20110121044A (en) Wireless communication system and method for establishing connection between node in communication system and node in data service network
WO2014121491A1 (en) Communication method, communication apparatus and communication device
CN114125958A (en) Downlink positioning measurement method, device and system
TWI753973B (en) Method for transmitting information, network equipment, and terminal equipment
CN109565723B (en) Network switching method, device and system
WO2022022082A1 (en) Communication method and communication apparatus
WO2014101079A1 (en) Handover decision method, base station, and user equipment
JP2024500522A (en) Communication methods and devices

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 13874813

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 13874813

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1